The DVSA MOT Testing Guide
Last updated by DVSA on 1 April 2026
Content published by DVSA and obtained under the Open Government Licence v3.0.

How the MOT scheme is administered and the rules for authorised examiners, testers and testing different types of vehicles. This guide sets out the rules you have to follow to run an MOT test station.

Abbreviations and Definitions
Glossary of terms
Abbreviations and definitions

A

Abandon

The term used when a test cannot be completed because the Tester considers it unsafe to continue or because it becomes apparent during the test that certain items cannot be satisfactorily inspected. An appropriate fee may be charged for the test.

Abort

The term used when a test cannot be completed because of a problem with the VTS/DC testing equipment or the Tester. No fee may be charged for the test.

AE

Authorised Examiner - the organisation that operates and manages one or more VTSs and is responsible for controlling the quality of testing carried out. Except in the case of a ‘sole trader’ the AE is not a person but a legal entity. For example, a company or partnership.

AED

The AE Delegate is a Person appointed by the AE Designated Manager to assist the AEDM with administration and management functions. Note: this does not devolve the ultimate responsibility held by the AE.

AEDM

The AE Designated Manager is the person who represents the AE and who has normally attended the MOT Management Course. Typically, an AE Principal but may be a senior manager with responsibility for the totality of the entity’s MOT testing operations.

AEP

The Authorised Examiner Principal is a person who is legally responsible for the entity. For example, every partner in a partnership; every director in a company; or the sole trader in person.

AEC

The Authorised Examiner Consultant is a non-mandatory role. AE’s may assign this role to consultants they use to provide advice on MOT standards and how to run the MOT centre.

ATL

Automated Test Lane. These are authorised by DVSA for use in the automated mode and where the tester has the option of not using an assistant if so desired.

C

Catch up

The process where test data recorded while testing under Contingency Testing is subsequently entered.

Cessation

The process by which an authorisation, approval or designation is brought to an end. Cessation is used in place of the previous terms for termination/surrender or withdrawal of an Authorisation/Designation or disqualification of a Tester/Inspector.

Connected equipment

Equipment that can send test results from the MOT test equipment directly to the MOT testing service

CT

Contingency Testing, the process by which testing may continue when the computerised system is not available due to a wide scale failure affecting a significant number of VTSs.

CT20

An MOT Test Certificate for issue during a period of Contingency Testing.

CT30

A notice of refusal of a MOT Test Certificate for issue during a period of Contingency Testing.

D

DC

Designated Council. Local Authorities authorised to carry out MOT tests.

Department (the)

Department for Transport. The Government Department, which carries out the functions of the Secretary of State and under which DVSA operates.

DGW

Design Gross Weight – the maximum gross weight at which the vehicle was designed to operate. This is normally found on a plate fixed to the vehicle by the manufacturer or in the case of older or heavier vehicles by a Ministry Plate. Such plates are not required on all vehicles.

Duplicate test documents

A copy of the documents issued at the time of the test for which the duplicate is required. VT20/VT20W, VT30/VT30W

DVLA

Driver and Vehicle Licensing Agency. An agency of the Department for Transport responsible for driver and vehicle licensing.

DVSA

The Driver and Vehicle Standards Agency.

G

Group A

Collectively describes test classes 1 and 2.

Group B

Collectively describes test classes 3, 4, 5 and 7.

I

Issue of test documents

When the record is electronically accepted or a CT test document is signed by the Tester.

M

MOT tester qualification course

Level 2 Award in MOT Testing awarded to an applicant following the successful completion of an MOT course. The award is for testing classes 1 and 2 or classes 4 and 7. Previously the Nominated Tester Training course.

MOT manager course

Level 3 Award in MOT Test Centre Management awarded following the successful completion of the MOT Managers course. The course is typically for AEs and AEDMs. This course is also available for other staff to develop their knowledge of MOT management. An AE must, unless exempted, have one person who has attended this course. Previously the MOT Managers course or AE course.

MOT manager

A person filling a VTS management function – AEDM or SM.

MOT service

Formally known as the MOT Scheme or MOT Testing Scheme.

MOT testing service

The computer system and database used to manage MOT test records. Sometimes abbreviated to MTS.

N

Notify DVSA

Inform DVSA office in writing, by letter or email.

O

Officer of a company

An officer of a company is as defined in Section 744 of the Companies Act 1985, as amended or replaced by later legislation. An officer is a director, manager or secretary. In particular note that a manager has a specific meaning in that Act rather than its more normal meaning. Details of all officers are generally required to be notified to the registrar of companies.

OPTL

One Person Test Lane. These are lanes authorised by DVSA to conduct testing where the tester has the option of not using an assistant if so desired.

P

PRS

Pass after Rectification at Station - The process where defects may be rectified within one hour after the test, but before recording the results on the MOT Testing Service.

Q

QC

Quality Control.

QM

Quality Management. The system or processes used by the AE to manage the quality of testing and operations in their VTSs.

R

RBT

Roller Brake Tester.

Regulations (the)

The Motor Vehicles (Tests) Regulations 1981 as amended.

S

SA

Site Administrator is a person who can carry out VTS administrative functions, also known as VTS Administrator.

Secretary of State

Refers to the Secretary of State for Transport.

SM

Site Manager responsible for the day to day running of one or more VTSs.

Security code

Is a 6 digit code generated by a security card, email or authentication app. The code is entered into MTS by users who have roles assigned to their MTS profile.

SN

Special Notice –- an official notice issued from time to time by DVSA to inform AEs, Testers and other system users of changes to the MOT service. SNs may also be used to highlight areas of concern and to advise of developments to the Service.

Sole trader

An individual carrying out business on their own behalf rather than on behalf of a partnership, company or other body.

T

Test

All statutory tests recorded on the MTS database, regardless of whether the test is a full test or a retest. Further information on retests is provided in the Introduction sections of both MOT Inspection Manuals

Tester

MOT Tester - a person appointed by an AE to carry out tests, Inspectors appointed by Designated Councils to carry out tests, all of which are approved by DVSA. Also, DVSA staff appointed under section 66A of the Road Traffic Act.

Test slots

A test slot is a chargeable unit that enables the registration of a computerised test. A test slot is only used when the test result is a pass.

U

ULW

Unladen weight – The weight of the vehicle inclusive of the body and all parts which are ordinarily used with the vehicle when working on a road. (Unladen weight does not include the weight of water or fuel used for the propulsion of the vehicle, or of loose tools and loose equipment).

V

V5C

Vehicle Registration Certificate issued by the Driver and Vehicle Licensing Agency.

VT20

An MOT Test Certificate, which includes separate English and Welsh language versions (VT20W) and which may also incorporate advisory information.

VT29

An MOT Inspection Check List used by a Tester during a test for vehicles other than motor bicycles (see VT29M).

VT29M

Motorcycle MOT Inspection Check List used by a Tester during a motor bicycle test.

VT30

A notice of refusal of a MOT Test Certificate which includes separate English and Welsh language versions (VT30W) and which may also incorporate advisory information.

VT32

An advisory notice issued to the vehicle presenter advising the outcome of an inspection carried out by a DVSA examiner. Includes the English/Welsh dual language version (VT32W).

VIN

Vehicle Identification Number, also includes chassis or frame number.

VRM

Vehicle Registration Mark.

VTS

Vehicle Testing Station.

W

Working days

Working days exclude Saturdays, Sundays, Good Friday, Christmas Day or a bank holiday under the Banking and Financial Dealings Act 1971.

Written or in writing

Wherever the terms ‘written’ or ‘in writing’ are used they should be taken to include correspondence via e-mail or recorded electronically.

Section A
Introduction to the MOT Testing Guide
The purpose of the MOT test, what it includes, which vehicles are tested and which are exempt, who carries out the test.

Introduction to the MOT testing guide

This document is intended to help new and existing authorised examiners, testers and other interested parties comply with the requirements for authorisation by the Secretary of State to conduct statutory tests on certain motor vehicles.

The statutory requirements are contained in the Motor Vehicles (Tests) Regulations 1981 as amended. The guide does not cover the requirements for annual testing of heavy goods vehicles (HGVs) or public service vehicles (PSVs). Neither does the guide cover the requirements for type approval nor individual vehicle approval of certain vehicles before they are first registered in Great Britain.

This guide is divided into a series of sections covering specific subject areas.

Detailed information on the technical standards and procedures of the statutory test is given in the appropriate MOT inspection manual.

Additional instruction and information is also issued to vehicle testing stations about testing and procedures, in the form of special notices (SNs). DVSA reserves the right to modify the content of this guide to reflect changes in the law or in light of experience.

Availability and maintenance of the guide

The definitive document is held electronically. The electronic documents will be periodically updated and changes will be advised by special notice.

Additional information is available at DVSA and the MOT service.

Other DVSA documentation

This guide should be used in conjunction with:

  • the relevant MOT inspection manuals which are a detailed guide to the inspection for statutory MOT testing
  • special notices (SNs) - these are issued periodically by DVSA to inform those involved with MOT testing about changes and to highlight areas of concern
  • other documentation issued by DVSA

1. Purpose and scope of the test

The purpose of the MOT test is to ensure that cars, other light vehicles (including some light goods vehicles), private buses and motor bicycles over a prescribed age are checked at least once a year to see that they comply with roadworthiness and environmental standards – and to that end contributes to the government’s road safety strategy.

MOT test records

For every test conducted an electronic record is created. The electronic record of an MOT is the legal record of that test. The test result is lawful once the test has been recorded on the MOT testing service or a CT20 test certificate has been issued during contingency testing.

The vehicle testing station does not need to automatically issue a paper record of the test. However, a vehicle presenter may ask for a paper receipt of the test. If requested, the vehicle testing station must supply the relevant VT20 or VT30 certificate.

The MOT record is checked when a vehicle is taxed. The police and certain enforcement agencies can also access this information directly from the electronic record and may use it for on-road enforcement that a vehicle has an MOT or as part of other investigations.

The electronic test records are made available publicly online and and should be used by vehicle owners to confirm the MOT test result and details of their vehicle. This data can be used for a variety of road safety related purposes, such as helping motorists to make informed decisions when considering a car purchase, to help look after their vehicle and to ensure they get their vehicle tested on time.

Third parties may also access these records and use it for things such as checking validity of vehicle mileages or for part of car insurance considerations. The recorded accuracy of that test result and it being matched to the correct vehicle is therefore important.

Paper documentation (such as the receipt style test certificate and the failure document) may be issued on completion of a test, but these should only be considered as a view of the definitive electronic record.

The creation of that electronic record relates only to the condition of testable items at the time of the test and should not be regarded as:

  • evidence of their condition at any other time
  • evidence of the general mechanical condition of the vehicle
  • evidence that the vehicle fully complies with all aspects of the law on vehicle construction and use

There are a number of specific circumstances when a paper certificate must be issued. See Section H. Documentation for full details.

The test is a visual inspection and does not require the dismantling of parts of the vehicle although doors, boot lids and other means of access will normally need to be opened. In the case of motor bicycles, cover panels may also need to be removed or raised to examine the vehicle structure.

MOT history check

The definitive legal MOT records for a vehicle can be viewed on the service to check the MOT history of a vehicle.

It includes:

  • if the vehicle passed or failed
  • the mileage recorded when it was tested
  • where each test was done – you’ll need the 11-digit number from the vehicle’s log book (V5C)
  • what parts failed at each test, and if any parts had minor problems
  • when its next MOT is due
  • if a vehicle recall is outstanding

Vehicle owners are advised to check their MOT details following their test. They can get information corrected on an MOT certificate if it’s wrong. Some errors can be corrected by the MOT garage that issued the test. Other errors will need to be corrected by DVSA.

MOT reminder service

Owners of vehicles that are registered in Scotland, England or Wales can sign up to the MOT reminder service to receive text or email reminder notifications for free.

When they sign up they’ll get a reminder:

  • 1 month before their car, van or motorcycle MOT is due
  • 2 months before their lorry, bus or large trailer MOT is due

A person can register a maximum of 2 vehicles on a single phone number or any number of vehicles on an email address. Subscriptions can be managed on the online service to add or remove vehicles.

2. Test classes

The vehicles subject to test under the regulations are divided into the following classes.

Class 1

Class 1 vehicles are motorcycles and motorcycle combinations up to 200cc and electrically powered solo motorcycles with not more than 4kW maximum continuous rated power and a maximum design speed up to 45km/h (28mph).

They can be category L1, L3 or L4.

Their first test will be required after 3 years.

Class 2

Class 2 vehicles are all motorcycles and motorcycle combinations, including electrically powered variants, other than those in category L1.

They can be category L3 or L4.

Their first test will be required after 3 years.

Class 3

Class 3 vehicles are 3 wheeled vehicles not more than 450kg unladen weight (excluding motor bicycles with side cars).

3 wheeled vehicles more than 450kg unladen are in class 4.

They can be category L2e or L5e.

Their first test will be required after 3 years.

Class 4

Class 4 vehicles can be:

  • cars, passenger vehicles, motor caravans, private hire vehicles, motor tricycles, quadricycles and dual purpose vehicles in all cases with up to eight passenger seats
  • goods vehicles not exceeding 3,000kg design gross weight (DGW)
  • taxis and ambulances with up to eight passenger seats
  • passenger vehicles, ambulances, motor caravans and dual purpose vehicles with nine to twelve passenger seats

Cars, passenger vehicles, motor caravans, private hire vehicles, motor tricycles, quadricycles and dual purpose vehicles in all cases with up to eight passenger seats

They can be category L5e, L6e, L7e, M1 or N1.

Their first test will be required after 3 years.

Goods vehicles not exceeding 3,000kg design gross weight (DGW)

They will be category N1.

Their first test will be required after 3 years.

Taxis and ambulances with up to eight passenger seats

They will be category M1.

Their first test will be required after 1 year.

Passenger vehicles, ambulances, motor caravans and dual purpose vehicles with nine to twelve passenger seats

They must either:

  • be fitted with no more seat belts than the minimum required because of their construction
  • be identified as having been fitted with a type approved seat belt installation when built
  • have been tested as class 4A, 5A or 6A (PSV) with at least the same number of seat belts as are currently fitted

They will be category M2 or M3.

Their first test will be required after 1 year.

For the purpose of calculating the seating capacity on a passenger carrying vehicle fitted with bench type seats, allow a length of 400 mm measured horizontally for each seated passenger.

Taxis included in this table are those which are not exempt from MOT testing – see Section C. Designated councils, taxis and private hire vehicles.

Please refer to the appropriate MOT inspection manual to find out the minimum number of seat belts required on a particular age and type of vehicle.

If the vehicle is electrically powered, their unladen weight must not include the weight of the batteries.

If there is doubt about the power output or the weight of the vehicle, the presenter must provide documentary evidence.

Taxis and private hire vehicles may be subject to additional local requirements.

4 x 4 pickup and crew cab type vehicles with a DGW over 3000kg up to and including 3500kg are to be considered dual purpose vehicles for test purposes where no unladen weight data is available if they meet all other criteria in either option A or option B detailed within Section 2.2 Dual purpose vehicles.

American pickup means a motor vehicle with a manufacturer’s declaration (on a plate on the vehicle) that it meets the motor vehicle safety standards applicable under the law in the United States of America or Canada(c) and is capable of carrying a driver and at least one passenger; or is capable of carrying goods in an open load bed separate from the driver/passenger compartment, with or without a removable cover; and has a gross design weight over 3,000kg but does not exceed 6,500kg.

Class 4A

The class 4A test is the normal class 4 test with the addition of a check on the installation of certain seat belts.

It’s for passenger vehicles, ambulances, motor caravans and dual purpose vehicles in all cases with nine to twelve passenger seats that are fitted with more seat belts than the minimum required because of their construction and either:

  • are not identified as having been fitted with a type approved seat belt installation when built
  • have not been tested as class 4A, 5A or 6A (PSV) with at least the same number of seat belts as are currently fitted

They will be category M2 or M3.

Their first test will be required after 1 year.

For the purpose of calculating the seating capacity on a passenger carrying vehicle fitted with bench type seats, allow a length of 400 mm measured horizontally for each seated passenger.

Please refer to the appropriate MOT inspection manual to find out the minimum number of seat belts required on a particular age and type of vehicle.

Class 4A tests may only be carried out at class 5 test stations.

Class 5

Class 5 vehicles are private passenger vehicles, ambulances and motor caravans, in all cases with thirteen or more passenger seats (including community and play buses, etc.) that are either:

  • fitted with no more seat belts than the minimum required because of their construction
  • identified as having been fitted with a type approved seat belt installation to all seats when built
  • previously tested as class 5A or class 6A (PSV) with at least the same number of seat belts as are currently fitted

They will be category M2 or M3.

Their first test will be required after 1 year.

Taxis included in this table are those which are not exempt from MOT testing – see Section C. Designated councils, taxis and private hire vehicles.

Class 4A tests may only be carried out at class 5 test stations.

This guide does not cover the testing of class 6 and 6a vehicles. These vehicles are tested by DVSA testers and are carried out at DVSA testing stations and other designated premises.

Taxis and private hire vehicles may be subject to additional local requirements.

Class 5A

The class 5A test is the normal class 5 test with the addition of a check on the installation of certain seat belts.

It’s for passenger vehicles, ambulances and motor caravans all cases with thirteen or more passenger seats (including community buses, etc.) that are fitted with more seat belts than the minimum required because of their construction and either:

  • are not identified as having been fitted with a type approved seat belt installation when built
  • have not been tested as class 5A or class 6A (PSV) with at least the same number of seat belts as are currently fitted

They will be category M2 or M3.

Their first test will be required after 1 year.

Taxis included in this table are those which are not exempt from MOT testing – see Section C. Designated councils, taxis and private hire vehicles.

Class 4A tests may only be carried out at class 5 test stations.

This guide does not cover the testing of class 6 and 6a vehicles. These vehicles are tested by DVSA testers and are carried out at DVSA testing stations and other designated premises.

Class 6 and 6A

Class 6 and 6A vehicles are public service vehicles (PSVs).

They will be category M2 or M3.

Their first test will be required after 1 year.

If the vehicle is electrically powered, their unladen weight must not include the weight of the batteries.

Class 7

Class 7 vehicles are goods vehicles over 3,000kg up to and including 3,500kg DGW.

They will be category N1.

Their first test will be required after 3 years.

This guide does not cover the testing of class 6 and 6a vehicles. These vehicles are tested by DVSA testers and are carried out at DVSA testing stations and other designated premises.

Taxis and private hire vehicles may be subject to additional local requirements.

4 x 4 pickup and crew cab type vehicles with a DGW over 3000kg up to and including 3500kg are to be considered dual purpose vehicles for test purposes where no unladen weight data is available if they meet all other criteria in either option A or option B detailed within Section 2.2 Dual purpose vehicles.

2.1 Exemptions

Detailed legislation on vehicles exempt from the MOT is set out in the Motor Vehicles Test Regulations 1981 regulation 6 (as amended), and in the Road Traffic Act 1988 Section 189.

Examples of vehicles exempted from MOT testing include:

  • those constructed or first registered more than 40 years ago and not substantially modified
  • track laying vehicles
  • vehicles constructed or adapted to form part of an articulated combination
  • works trucks
  • trailers
  • pedestrian controlled mechanically propelled vehicles
  • electrically powered pedal cycles

Pick up vehicles with a fifth wheel should not be considered an articulated vehicle and should be tested as normal.

Legislation also exempts vehicles used in particular ways, for example travelling to and from test, or particular places, such as on some islands, from the need to have a valid MOT test certificate.

Trailers constructed or adapted for the carriage of goods or burden with an unladen weight of more than 1,020kg and vehicles forming part of an articulated combination are subject to HGV plating and testing.

Even when a vehicle is not required to have a test certificate it must still be maintained in a roadworthy condition.

2.2 Dual purpose vehicles

A dual purpose vehicle is one that:

  • is constructed or adapted for the carriage of both passengers and goods or burden of any description
  • has an unladen weight (ULW) not exceeding 2,040kg
  • is constructed as defined in either option A or option B below

Option A

The vehicle is so constructed or adapted so that the driving power of the engine, is, or by the use of the appropriate controls can be, transmitted to all the wheels of the vehicle.

Option B

The vehicle is permanently fitted with a rigid roof, with or without a sliding panel.

The area to the rear of the driver’s seat must be:

  • permanently fitted with at least one row of transverse seats (fixed or folding) for two or more passengers, and those seats must be properly sprung or cushioned and provided with upholstered backrests, attached either to the seats or to a side or the floor of the vehicle
  • lit on each side and at the rear by a window or windows of glass or other transparent material having an aggregate area of not less than 1,850cm² on each side and not less than 770cm² at the rear

The distance between the rearmost part of the steering wheel and the backrests of the row of transverse seats satisfying the requirements specified above, (or, if there is more than one such row of seats, the distance between the rearmost part of the steering wheel and the backrests of the rearmost such row) must, when the seats are ready for use, be not less than one third of the distance between the rearmost part of the steering wheel and the rearmost part of the floor of the vehicle.

2.3 Motor caravans

A motor caravan is “a motor vehicle (not being a living van) which is constructed or adapted for the carriage of passengers and their effects and which contains, as permanently installed equipment, the facilities which are reasonably necessary for enabling the vehicle to provide mobile living accommodation for its users”.

Motor caravans are not classed as goods vehicles for MOT test purposes and are therefore in class 4 or 5 depending on their seating capacity but regardless of their size or weight.

2.4 Living vans

A living van is “a vehicle, whether mechanically propelled or not, which is used for living accommodation by one or more persons and which is also used for the carriage of goods or burden which are not needed by such one or more persons for the purpose of their residence in the vehicle”.

Living vans may be type approved as either:

  • passenger vehicles (M1, M2 or M3)
  • goods vehicles (N1, N2 or N3)

Living vans approved as passenger vehicles must be tested as class 4 or class 5 depending on their seating capacity.

Living vans approved as N1 goods vehicles, are in either class 4 or 7 depending on their design gross weight (DGW).

Living vans approved as N2 or N3 goods vehicles (DGW over 3500kg) are subject to HGV plating and testing.

2.5 Play buses

A play bus is a motor vehicle which was originally constructed to carry more than 12 passengers but which has been adapted primarily for the carriage of playthings for children.

2.6 Ambulance

An ambulance is a motor vehicle which is specially designed and constructed (and not merely adapted) for carrying, as equipment permanently fixed to the vehicle, equipment used for medical, dental, or other health purposes and is used primarily for the carriage of persons suffering from illness, injury or disability.

2.7 Tricycles

A motor tricycle is a three wheeled vehicle with wheels symmetrically arranged, a maximum speed over 45km/h, or engine size over 50cc.

If the motor tricycle has an unladen weight not more than 450kg it is a class 3 test.

If the unladen weight is more than 450kg it is a class 4 test.

2.8 Quadricycles

A light quadricycle is a four wheeled vehicle with:

  • a maximum unladen weight of 425kg
  • a maximum speed of 45km/h
  • not over 50cc for an internal combustion engine or 4kW for any other engine or electric motor

Sub classification category L6e-BP / L6e-BU is a vehicle equipped with:

  • a maximum of two seating positions, including the seating position for the driver and enclosed driving and passenger compartment
  • access by a maximum of three sides
  • a maximum continuous rated or net power of 6kW
  • the vehicle type-approval number recorded on the manufacturer’s plate (L6e-BP / L6e-BU)

A heavy quadricycle (L7e) is a four-wheeled vehicle with:

  • a maximum unladen weight of 450kg (600kg for goods vehicles)
  • a design speed of over 45km/h
  • over 50cc for internal combustion engines, and a net engine power not over 15kW
  • payload not over 1000kg if designed for goods

2.9 Moped

A moped is a vehicle with:

  • a maximum speed of 45km/h
  • not over 50cc for a petrol engine or 4kW for any other engine or electric motor

3. Who carries out MOT tests?

The testing of vehicles is conducted principally at commercial garages (authorised examiners) and by some local authorities (designated councils). These are authorised, or designated as appropriate, by DVSA, and known as vehicle testing stations (VTSs).

VTSs and their staff are subject to inspections by DVSA to ensure that testing is properly carried out. Test equipment used must be approved by DVSA.

MOT tests are carried out by testers who are specifically trained and approved. They record test results on the MOT database and sign official test documents.

VTSs may only test those classes and types of vehicle that they are authorised to test and which are of a size and weight that can be accommodated on the authorised test equipment.

DVSA staff may also carry out tests.

Section B
Authorised Examiners
How to become an authorised examiner, what training you'll need, why your authorisation might cease, the facilities, equipment and security you need to carry out MOT tests, your responsibilities as a tester.

1. Application and authorisation

Any individual person, persons in partnership or company may apply to DVSA via an application for MOT authorisation form (VT01) to become an authorised examiner (AE), authorised to carry out MOT testing of specified vehicle classes as set out in Section A. Introduction.

DVSA publishes information about about authorised vehicle testing stations (VTSs). This includes your trading name, address and phone number to assist the public in finding a VTS in their area.

DVSA will provide information when requested under the Freedom of Information Act. Personal information will not be included in these requests.

Information regarding an AE, VTS or its staff may also be supplied in response to a request from other enforcement agencies, for example the police and HM Revenue and Customs.

An application to become an AE or gain approval for a VTS may be made separately or jointly and must show compliance with the conditions set out in the requirements for authorisation. Further information is available on how to become an MOT station, and should be read in conjunction with this guide.

Final authorisation to carry out MOT testing will be granted only to applicants who can satisfy DVSA that they are of good repute and that their premises, equipment and personnel meet the required standards.

Applying to become an authorised examiner

The application to become an AE must come from the legal entity that will be in full control of the testing operation. This will either be:

  • a company
  • a partnership
  • a sole trader

If a company is in control of the testing operation

In the case of a company, the AE would be the company itself, not the directors or company management staff regardless of who owns the company and who its directors are. The application is to be signed by any person duly authorised by the company to do so.

Written confirmation that the person is duly authorised signed by an ‘officer of the company’ is required (see Abbreviations and definitions).

The directors must be recorded on the company’s register at Companies House.

If a partnership is in control of the testing operation

In the case of a partnership the AE would be the partnership itself, for example the partnership of F Bloggs and A N Other.

The application is to be signed by a person duly authorised by the partnership to do so.

Confirmation that the person is duly authorised in the form of a statement to that effect signed by each of the partners will normally be required together with a copy of the current partnership agreement.

If a sole trader is in control of the testing operation

In the case of a sole trader the AE would be the person making the application, who must sign it.

Any authorisation by DVSA allows only the legal entity authorised to provide the testing service. If a company is reconstituted in a way that leads to a new company registration and number being issued then it will be regarded as a new entity and a new authorisation is needed.

If, in a partnership, a partner leaves or joins, the partnership becomes a new entity, so again a new authorisation is needed, as it is in the case of a sole trader who takes on a partner or forms a company (see also Transfer of records following cessation or disciplinary action).

Application outcomes

Applications will be considered by DVSA following appropriate enquiries and inspections. Applicants will be informed in writing as to the outcome of DVSA’s considerations, which will be either:

  • authorisation granted
  • approval in principle (AIP)
  • intention to refuse

Authorisation granted

This will always have a standard set of conditions but may be subject to additional conditions specified in the authorisation. Standard conditions include compliance with the requirements of the MOT testing guide and the appropriate inspection manuals, as amended from time to time; and special notices.

Approval in principle (AIP) given

This will list items to be complied with before authorisation is granted and will include a time limit after which the AIP will expire. Where the applicant is not prepared to comply with an item, or items, listed they must notify DVSA as soon as is possible, and before the expiry date of the AIP. The application will then be dealt with as in intention to refuse.

Intention to refuse notified

If DVSA, on behalf of the Secretary of State, intends to refuse an application (the legal term is ‘is minded to refuse’), the applicant will be sent a letter. This will give the reason(s) why DVSA intends to refuse the application. The applicant may, within 14 days of the date of the letter, appeal against the refusal.Details of how to do this will be included in the letter.

This process follows the same procedures as an appeal against disciplinary action see Section I8. Appeals against cessation. If an appeal is received within the deadline, it will be considered, and the applicant told of the outcome in due course. If no appeal is received, a further letter will be sent after the 14 days to confirm the refusal.

2. Training

A DVSA approved MOT Managers course that covers testing responsibilities, administrative arrangements, quality systems, disciplinary and appeal processes must be attended for each AE by:

  • an AE Principal for the AE
  • the AE Designated Manager for that AE

The course is designed to help the AE and AEDM to fully understand their responsibilities and role within the MOT Service.

Authorisations granted before 1 April 1995, that have not been subject to change, do not require their AEDM to have attended the MOT Managers Course. Appendix 1 gives more detail on the AEDM training requirements.

3. Cessation of authorisation and other changes to businesses

Your authorisation can cease by means of:

  • voluntary cessation
  • automatic cessation
  • cessation for disciplinary reasons

Voluntary cessation

An AE may voluntarily cease to be authorised or close an MOT centre at any time by notifying DVSA in writing.

To surrender your AE authorisation or close an MOT centre you must either be:

  • the sole trader
  • a partner in a partnership with permission to make the request
  • the limited company director (AEP)
  • someone acting on behalf of the company with permission to make the request

You must fill in the online form to tell DVSA you’re closing an MOT centre.

Once the AE authorisation has ceased or centre has closed, DVSA will:

  • refund any unused MOT slots
  • remove any roles assigned to this authorised examiner or MOT centre from the MOT testing service

Automatic cessation

An authorisation ceases automatically if:

  • the authorised legal entity is no longer in control of the testing operation at the VTS
  • the AE is a sole trader who dies, is adjudged bankrupt (or, in Scotland, has their estate sequestered), or becomes a patient within the meaning of Part VIII of the Mental Health Act 1983 (or, in Scotland, becomes incapable of managing their own affair)
  • the AE is a partnership and this is then dissolved (see also other changes to business)
  • the AE is a company which is no longer trading or operating (for example, dissolved or dormant), or is no longer in control of the authorised site(s) - in some cases, this could also result in disciplinary action
  • no tests have been conducted for a period of 12 consecutive months or more under the AE’s authorisation

An AE must notify DVSA if any of the above changes to the business occurs. Testing must stop immediately if any of the above circumstances occurs until DVSA confirms it can recommence.

Any test carried out after the effective date of the change will have been carried out improperly – this may adversely affect the authorisation of a reconstituted business.

To minimise any disruption to a business that wishes to continue trading following any such changes, AEs should notify DVSA in advance when any of the above changes are planned allowing any necessary applications for new authorisations to be processed before the change takes place. An authorisation cannot automatically be transferred with a business.

Cessation for disciplinary reasons

DVSA, on behalf of the Secretary of State (see Section F. The Driver and Vehicle Standards Agency), has the discretionary power to take disciplinary action against an AE, including cessation of the authorisation.

Failure to adhere to the requirements for authorisation may result in disciplinary action against the AE or the tester. Section I. Discipline explains the disciplinary and appeal processes.

If the AE is a sole trader

When the AE is a sole trader, the responsibility for taking action to ensure that the authorisation is operated in accordance with the Secretary of State’s requirements and the penalties for failure to do so falls on that person.

If the AE is a company

In the case of a company, the responsibility for taking action to ensure that the authorisation is operated in accordance with the Secretary of State’s requirements and the penalties for failure to do so falls on:

  • all the officers of the company (see Abbreviations and definitions)
  • any other person duly authorised by the company to sign applications and other similar documents relating to the authorisation

If the AE is a partnership

In the case of a partnership, the responsibility for taking action to ensure that the authorisation is operated in accordance with the Secretary of State’s requirements and the penalties for failure to do so falls on:

  • each partner
  • any other person duly authorised by the partnership to sign applications and other similar documents relating to the authorisation

Transfer of records following cessation or disciplinary action

Where the constitution or administration of a business changes, and the individual AE or one or more partners or directors or officers of a company continue under the new entity, any records, including those of disciplinary matters, will continue to be regarded as relevant to the reconstituted business. Similarly, if any individual AE, partner or director or officer of a company takes up an equivalent role with another AE, any existing records (again including disciplinary ones) will be regarded as relevant to the new AE.

Where disciplinary action results in a 2 or 5-year cessation of all sites held by the AE, any individual, partner or officer of a company is not permitted to hold any role within an AE and/or Vehicle Testing Station for the cessation period.

Independence of new AEs

Where the authorisation of the AE has ceased, for disciplinary reasons as above, anyone wishing to apply for authorisation at that site(s) must be able to show that they are sufficiently independent from the former AE, partners or officers of the company.

The maximum acceptable involvement of the former AE is as landlord.

The former AE, including the AEDM and any individuals who were directly accountable in the cessation of the previous authorisation shall not be involved in any way with the management or responsibility of any authorisation.

The spouse, partner, family members of the former AE, including the AEDM and any individuals who were directly accountable in the cessation of the previous authorisation, would not be considered sufficiently independent.

Other changes to businesses

It is not necessary to stop testing immediately for changes other than those described in automatic cessation. DVSA must be notified and receive a full and complete application within 28 calendar days where there is any other significant changes to the control or operation of the business.

Failure to notify such changes within this period may be treated as a shortcoming under Section I. Discipline and may result in the VTSs approval to test being suspended until an acceptable application has been received.

Such changes would include:

  • a sole trader entering into a partnership
  • any change in the partnerships constitution (where the AE is a partnership)
  • any change to the directors of the company (where the AE is a company)
  • any change to the person who was required to attended the MOT managers’ course - this only applies where a trained person is required under section B2. Training
  • any change in trading name or court appointed supervision of the business other than that which is described as automatic cessation
  • a company that continues to operate under the same registration and company number may continue testing provided that any changes to the officers of the company or change in the relationship to any parent company have been notified

It is possible for the AEDM, or other appropriate roles, to update some authorisation details directly on the MOT testing service, such as phone numbers, email address and correspondence address. Any other details must be notified to DVSA in writing.

The AE can cease the appointment of a tester. In the case of a multi-site AE, this cessation may be from all sites, a selection of sites, or a single site. A cessation by one AE does not affect any current or future nominations by other AEs.

4. General responsibilities

Authorisations are granted in accordance with the conditions applicable to the authorisation.

These conditions include compliance with:

  • the requirements for authorisation applicable at the time of authorisation
  • this guide
  • appropriate inspection manuals, as amended from time to time

Additional conditions may also be specified and acceptable with the written authorisation. AEs are in law fully responsible for ensuring that statutory MOT testing at their VTSs is carried out to the required standard and in the manner instructed by DVSA.

Failure to adhere to the conditions of an authorisation or notify DVSA of a change in the constitution or operation of a business or approved site may result in disciplinary action (see Section I. Discipline). For a partnership or company, all partners or directors and officers of the company are equally responsible.

Each authorisation is required to have an AEDM and a SM for each VTS, which may be the same person. See Section M. System roles and user roles.

The responsibilities of testers are set out in Section E. Tester.

AEs are held fully responsible for the actions of their staff and others acting on their behalf or with their agreement, all such staff must be adequately supervised and fully conversant with their testing duties.

Premises and equipment

Every AE must, at all times, properly maintain the premises, facilities and testing equipment at all VTSs for which they are responsible. The facilities and equipment include:

  • all facilities and equipment that were present at the time of the VTS’s approval and any additions or alternatives that have been subsequently agreed with DVSA

  • all facilities and equipment required by any mandatory upgrade introduced by DVSA

All testing equipment must be kept in good working order. Measuring apparatus must be calibrated in accordance with DVSA’s requirements. If an item of mandatory test equipment is not re-calibrated by its due date, then testing which uses that item must not continue.

Testing must stop on any class or type of vehicle as soon as any mandatory item of equipment malfunctions, in a way that could prevent a test being properly conducted on that class or type of vehicle. Testing must not be resumed until the equipment is properly repaired. If equipment fails during a test but before its use has been completed, the test must be aborted, and any fee paid returned.

Roller/plate brake testers and headlamp aim testers can be calibrated anytime during the six months following its last date of calibration. The equipment is then considered calibrated until the end of the 6th month.

For example, if an RBT is calibrated on 15 Jan 2017 – the calibration expiry is 31 July 2017. Therefore, any calibration must be carried out before 1 August 2017.

There are three exceptions to the general rule above:

  • where a roller or plate brake tester malfunctions testing may continue, for up to 2 working days from the time the defect occurred, using the DVSA approved decelerometer - only tests booked before the malfunction can be carried out under this arrangement

  • where the wheel free play detector malfunctions at an ATL or OPTL approved VTS, testing may continue for 7 calendar days from the time the defect occurred, using the conventional method with an assistant for those specific parts of the test - after that testing cannot continue

  • where an item of connected equipment is unable to connect to the MOT testing service but otherwise is performing correctly, testing may continue for up to 7 calendar days from the time the defect occurred - after that testing cannot continue for vehicles that require that equipment

For connected equipment connectivity issues only, DVSA, at their discretion may consider requests to continue testing beyond 7 calendar days, Authorised Examiners must email motadministration@dvsa.gov.uk before the initial 7-day period has expired stating the reason for the request.

All testing equipment which requires a mandatory upgrade or inspection must be completed within the requirements. Testing must stop on any class or type of vehicle as soon as the deadline for upgrade or inspection is reached. Mandatory upgrade or inspections can be introduced by DVSA, by equipment suppliers or the Health and Safety Executive. Mandatory inspections include those required on lifts and hoists covered under LOLER.

An AE must apply to DVSA for approval prior to the changes being made for:

  • addition of test classes

  • replacement or modification of any fixed test equipment that will alter the approved dimensions or layout

  • alterations to the building or the layout of equipment

The AE can apply using the Application for MOT Authorisation Form (VT01). Supporting drawings should be enclosed with the application.

No proposed change will be acceptable if it reduces clearances or dimensions (including those for access) below the limits specified in the requirements for authorisation or, for features approved only as ‘acceptable variations’, below their existing values.

DVSA must be notified of any changes to fixed equipment or equipment that needs to be connected (transfer results to the MOT testing service) using the ‘Change testing equipment’ link on the VTS page on the MOT testing service. Provided the notification has been given, the AE can proceed to have the equipment installed and use it. This includes upgrading to connected equipment where an API key must also be requested using the ‘Request a key’ link.

The changes will be checked by DVSA at the next visit. If the changes do not meet the requirements for authorisation approval may not be given.

The renewal of mobile testing equipment does not have to be notified to DVSA provided that the replacement is on the current DVSA approved list and will not affect the range of vehicles that can be tested.

Security

AEs are responsible for ensuring that blank MOT contingency testing (CT) certificates are not accessible at any time to unauthorised persons.

In the event of loss or theft of blank CT certificates the AE must immediately either:

The AE must send a full written account of the circumstances within one working day.

An AE may consider removing a tester from the list of testers at any of the VTS(s) within their authorisation to cover periods of extended absence. This could include for prolonged illness. This should be considered for periods in excess of 3 weeks. At the end of the period of absence the AE can reinstate the tester to the list of testers.

The AE shall take reasonable precautions to ensure that all MOT security code users which they are responsible for safeguard their security cards or authentication apps, passwords and their unique email address recorded on the user’s MOT testing service (MTS) profile.

The chosen method to generate an MOT security code must be protected and retained in the personal possession of that MTS user and not left unsecured.

Outside working hours, the security of the MOT security code generator is the responsibility of the MTS user.

AEs must ensure that MOT security code users do not:

  • disclose their password to anyone

  • share the MOT security card, authentication app or access to their MTS profile unique email account with anyone

  • write down their password

  • leave MOT security cards or authentication apps in an unsecured location

  • write their user ID, password or answers to their security questions on the security card

Nobody, including MOT testing service administrators or DVSA staff, is authorised to ask you for your user password. Users must report any request to disclose their password (or requests to change their password to a particular value) to DVSA via the customer service centre immediately.

Contact DVSA

DVSA Customer Service Centre enquiries@dvsa.gov.uk
Telephone: 0300 123 9000
Monday to Friday, 8am to 5pm
Find out about call charges

DVSA
The Ellipse
Padley Road
Swansea
SA1 8AN

Liability for vehicle damage

The extent of an AE’s liability for damage is set out in Regulation 14 of the Motor Vehicles (Tests) Regulations 1981 (Statutory Instrument 1981 No 1694) as amended and in part reproduced in Appendix 4: Liability for loss or damage. It describes the scope of AE’s responsibility for loss, damage or injury caused while vehicles are in their custody for MOT tests, and while the test is being carried out.

AEs must not display disclaimers of such liability in their VTSs and must ensure that no vehicle presenter is asked to sign any such disclaimer.

Convictions

AEs must notify DVSA immediately in writing of any convictions of individuals involved in the MOT service under their authorisation. This includes:

  • AEPs
  • AEDMs
  • AEDs
  • site managers
  • site admin
  • testers

For conviction definitions see Appendix 7: Convictions and repute.

Checks by DVSA staff

DVSA uses a risk based approach to managing the MOT service, assessing VTS sites and test standards to determine the potential risk of non-compliance. AEs can view their site’s risk rating on the MOT testing service.

A guide to manage your MOT centre sets out the standards and good practises a VTS should strive towards to be assessed as a low risk of non-compliance.

AEs must allow the:

  • inspection of their testing arrangements, equipment, facilities and records
  • checking of their tester’s competence
  • re-examination of recently tested vehicles by DVSA staff at any time during normal working hours or that the VTS is open

AEs should always ask to see the official warrant that DVSA enforcement staff carry. If you have doubts about anyone asking to see official documents, refuse access and call the DVSA customer service centre.

AEs must ensure their staff behave with respect and consideration towards DVSA staff, their agents and the public and remove such conduct that might reasonably be expected to cause, obstruction, insecurity, discomfort, offence, humiliation or harm.

5. Testing responsibilities

Test appointments

Appointments made for vehicles without a current MOT certificate (which could not be legally driven to and from the testing station without an appointment) must be recorded in writing. The record must include the:

  • vehicle’s registration mark
  • date and time of the appointment
  • name of the person making it

The record must be kept for at least 3 months after the date of the appointment.

Dormant sites

AEs will be expected to staff and maintain their VTSs as operational concerns. Where no tests have been conducted at a site for a consecutive period of 3 months AEDMs are required to contact DVSA (MOTAdministration@dvsa.gov.uk) detailing the reasons and any corrective action being taken. AEs may also voluntarily surrender the authorisation and close the VTS.

When no tests have been conducted for a consecutive period of 12 months, DVSA will consider this an automatic cessation of the site. DVSA will write to the AE confirming the cessation of the site. This will be a non-disciplinary cessation and AEs may re-apply at any time.

Decline to test

An AE must not carry out an MOT test on a vehicle if it is of a class or type of vehicle which they are not authorised to test, or a type of test they are not authorised to carry out. If the presenter asks for the reason in writing a CT30 may be completed and given to the presenter.

Refusal to test

Where an AE intends to refuse to test a vehicle the vehicle presenter must told straight away of any such circumstances, pointing out that consequently the test cannot be carried out. No fee may be charged for a test refused in these circumstances.

If the presenter asks for the reason in writing, the vehicle must be registered via the MOT testing service and a VT30 produced giving the reason(s).

Refer to the relevant MOT inspection manual, Introduction, for details of reasons for refusal to test.

Abandoned and aborted tests

If, once a test has been registered, it becomes clear that the test cannot be completed because of any of the circumstances set out in Appendix 3: Grounds for refusal to carry out a test, then the test must be either:

  • abandoned after being completed as far as is possible and a test certificate refused because the tester considers it unsafe to continue or because it becomes apparent during the test that certain items cannot be satisfactorily inspected - an appropriate fee may be charged for the test
  • aborted because a test cannot be completed due to a problem with the VTS’s testing equipment or the tester - no fee may be charged for the test

In both of the above the test is cancelled on the MOT testing service and a VT30 must be issued, stating the reason why the test was abandoned or aborted.

Viewing the test

Any individual presenting a vehicle has the right to observe the test from the approved viewing area(s). You are required to provide an adequate viewing facility for customers. Please refer to Section D. Requirements for authorisation for full details on the viewing area requirements.

Conduct of test and test standards and methods

AEs must ensure that the MOT tests are carried out without avoidable distraction or interruption and strictly in accordance with the conditions of their authorisation, which includes compliance with:

  • this guide
  • the requirements for authorisation
  • the appropriate inspection manual
  • any other instructions issued by DVSA

They must ensure that, for each test:

  • the vehicle is registered on the MOT testing service at the commencement of the test
  • the appropriate test result is recorded on completion
  • where required, the appropriate documentation is issued before the vehicle leaves the premises

The tester who carries out the test must:

  • make all assessments of any pass/fail criteria
  • confirm all database entries
  • sign all appropriate documentation

AEs must ensure that assistance is always available to testers for those parts of the test that require it.

Once started, a test must be completed to the maximum extent safely possible (see abandon/abort above). If a test has to be aborted because of equipment failure or because the tester is unable to continue the test (for example, if the tester becomes unwell), no fee may be charged. The reason why the test was aborted must be entered onto the system and a VT30 produced. If the tester who started the test is not available to abort the test on the MOT testing service, this can be done by another tester.

Retests (Re-examinations)

re-test flow diagram

Where the vehicle fails the test and it is expected that the defect(s) can be rectified within one hour, the tester can elect to use the PRS facility (see Abbreviations and definitions. Provided the tester has completed the initial examination before any repairs are carried out and the vehicle has been retained and repaired at the VTS.

If the defects are rectified within one hour of completion of the test, the tester must then enter the results on the MOT testing service recording the defects and the pass.

If the defects cannot be rectified, for any reason, within one hour then the vehicle must be failed. PRS is a partial re-examination for which no fee can be charged and during which the tester cannot register any new tests.

A pass result must not be recorded before the vehicle satisfies all the test requirements.

re-test flow diagram number 2

Statutory free retests, requiring only a partial re-examination, are available when:

  • the VTS has not changed ownership

  • the vehicle remains at the VTS for repair and the re-examination is conducted before the end of the 10th working day following the day of the initial test - in such circumstances the vehicle must not leave the premises and the failure result must be recorded following the initial test

  • the vehicle is returned to the same VTS where the vehicle failed the initial test before the end of the next working day on which testing is carried out and all the failure items are those which are statutory free retest items only (see Section L. Accounts and fees)

If the vehicle is removed from the VTS for repair and returned for a retest before the end of the tenth working day following the day of the initial test then, provided the test station has not changed ownership, only a partial re-examination is required. For which half the statutory maximum test fee may be charged.

When a partial re-examination is permissible, the tester must examine all the failed defects (dangerous and major) along with any items that may have been affected by repairs carried out since the initial test. Where applicable the partial retest must also include carrying out another brake performance test and entering the results in the MOT testing service. The tester should also check any minor defects and or advisory items that had been recorded at the time of the initial test and mark as repaired as appropriate.

Only one partial re-examination is permissible per full test.

In all other cases, a vehicle having failed an MOT test must have a full re-examination when presented for retest and a further test fee (up to the maximum allowed for the class) may be charged.

Vehicles in classes 4A or 5A that have passed the seat belt installation element of a test but failed in other ways, that are returned to the same VTS for retest, must be re-examined as class 4 or 5 respectively. That is, the seat belt installation check should not be repeated or the additional fee for that check charged. In such cases the VT30 for the original fail must be endorsed or a non-component advisory should be recorded to the effect that the seat belt installation check has been passed.

Ideally, any re-examination should be carried out by the tester who completed the original test, but where this is not reasonably practicable any tester listed at that VTS may carry out the re-examination.

If, during the re-examination of a vehicle in any circumstances, it becomes clear that the vehicle does not meet the necessary standard, whether because the original defect has been inadequately repaired or because another defect is present, the vehicle must be failed and a further failure for the test outcome recorded.

Charges for repair work carried out on the vehicle, with the owner’s prior consent, are made by the garage in the usual way and are not covered by the statutory test fee.

If, after the retest only minor defects remain and a pass result is recorded, then there is no further retest option to remove the minor defects.

There is no retest for tests that result in only minor defects or advisory items.

Use of testing stations by DVSA

AEs must allow their VTSs to be used by DVSA for examining vehicles subject to an appeal or complaint about a test result provided that 3 days’ notice has been given. The notice period may be reduced by mutual agreement. DVSA will pay one half of the relevant test fee for the use of the premises and equipment unless the arrangement is cancelled at least 24 hours prior to the appointment.

6. Quality management

AEs are responsible for the quality of testing within their garage or garages.

Others, most notably testers, also have a responsibility upon them associated with this, but it is for AEs to ensure there are adequate systems for the management of the quality of testing at their garage or garages.

To that end AEs must ensure an adequate system of quality management at each of their VTSs. Such a system will need to be tailored to meet the individual circumstances of the VTS or VTSs, such as:

  • number of VTSs
  • volume of test
  • numbers of testers
  • experience of staff

In all cases its objective must be the same; to best ensure that MOT testing is conducted to consistently high standards.

In operating systems, AEs should always remember that sometimes things will go wrong. A successful quality management system is one that identifies things going wrong in a timely way and helps the AE put things right. A quality regime that never identifies things going wrong is unlikely to be working effectively. Where things are found to be going wrong, then it is key to record this and show what has been done to prevent reoccurrence.

Going forward, much of DVSA’s focus in identifying how well garages are managing quality will come from reviewing their quality management system. This will mean that it is necessary to document the system and how it operates. This need not be an onerous task – and, again, needs to be proportionate to the size and complexity of the AE’s operation.

The overall quality management system should always include:

  • people
  • training
  • procedures
  • equipment
  • assurance
  • improvement

People

This should include:

  • policies for recruiting staff
  • probation criteria
  • policies around what you will do when there are quality failings
  • information about site managers (where they are used)

Where AEs do have a responsibility across sites there would be an expectation that site managers are suitable individuals with suitable training to do their job.

Training

This will include the checks you do to make sure that all of your staff have the necessary training, both mandated training from DVSA, and also any other training they need to be able to understand and implement changes to tester’s manuals, test standards and test results entry. Also, any training they require to safely work in your garage. It may include a link to your people policy so that there is clarity on what you expect from your staff in terms of their own personal development. It would be expected that such a system should be designed to ensure that all staff conducting MOT testing have followed the in-year training requirement and have passed the annual assessment.

Procedures

You need to ensure that your staff know how MOTs operate in your VTSs including:

  • what documents to use
  • how bookings are operated
  • how to access information such as manuals, guides and reports (for example, test quality information, test logs, slot usage and transactions)

Equipment

This needs to ensure that all relevant staff understand how to ensure equipment upkeep and calibration, that process is clear and there are clear procedures for dealing with any equipment failures.

Assurance

A procedure needs to be in place to check that at least a sample of MOTs are checked to ensure that the correct routines and procedures are followed and that the correct standards are applied.

An AE may consider implementing an assurance approach which could include a third party or trade representative. Any third party should cover aspects relating to MOT test standards and the administrative management of the MOT business. Alternative approaches could be to:

  • nominate an experienced and well-regarded tester to conduct the assurance checks
  • rotate the responsibility across the team
  • partner with neighbouring garages

All those carrying out assurance checks must be trained as MOT testers and hold a Level 2 qualification in MOT Testing or equivalent for the appropriate class and comply with the requirements for annual training and assessments.

The key factor in whatever approach is to ensure that all testers have a proportion of tests rechecked by someone who is independent of that tester – so they can have some degree of objectivity.

The role of AE consultant within an MTS may be allocated to individuals to assist the quality and assurance approach at the site. See Section M. System rules and user roles.

The frequency of checks may typically be expected to be 1 per tester every 2 months. However, this is based on the average garage throughput of 2 to 3 tests per day for experienced testers – so should be varied to reflect the volume of tests done or any other special circumstances – such as the experience of testers. For example, if a tester is inexperienced or doing twice the average of 2 to 3 tests per day you should consider increasing the checks to once a month.

Where a VTS has one tester it is expected that the AE should also have in place a suitable means of assuring the quality of testing This could include using a third-party assessor, a reciprocal arrangement with a local VTS. Where this is not possible other methods should be used to ensure the quality of testing, for example the use of test quality reports to check the testers own performance against the national statistics, noting reasons for differences and any action taken if appropriate.

The assurance processes in place should be subject to regular review, this will enable an AE to monitor the effectiveness and if necessary, make changes where required.

Assurance checks should include the operation of the VTS, and the test quality of the MOT tests carried out by the testers at the VTS.

Whoever is conducting the quality assurance check should either:

  • closely watch all parts of the test as they are carried out
  • closely observe the testing process and conduct a full re-examination of the vehicle to check standards application

Once the tester has completed the test, which will be the subject of a quality control (QC) check, any difference in the test result, test standards or observed defects must be discussed and resolved prior to confirmation of the test result on the MOT testing service.

The result of the assurance check must be recorded, including any agreed action. That agreed action could be additional training, a garage development session or any other appropriate action. The key thing here is to show that corrective action is taken.

Where unusually high numbers of failings are found, it would be expected that the frequency of checks is increased until such time as it is evidenced that the problem has now been solved.

Improvement

Overall, the system needs to demonstrate that things are fixed when they are found wanting. A good quality system will find problems and record their resolution so there is a culture of learning and improving.

7. Use of data and data protection

The MOT testing service contains personal data. The collection, storage and use of personal data within the service is explained generally in the DVSA personal information charter and in the privacy notice for MOT testing service.

All system users must ensure that the data held is kept secure and only released to those who have a right to see it.

Access for registered users of the MOT testing service will be via a secure log-on process, designed to reduce the opportunity for unauthorised access. In addition to an MOT security code, all users require a user ID and a password and users may only access data appropriate to their role(s).

It is the responsibility of each individual user of the system to ensure that all the information or data that is processed is done so legally. Failure to comply with the Act may lead to prosecution over and above any DVSA disciplinary action.

Some personal information relating to the users is held on the system, such as testers name and address, and care should be taken when accessing this information.

Each system role has a clearly defined set of access rules that allow access to information appropriate to that role. Audit logs will be created and kept on the system, and will record all appropriate actions against each user ID.

In order to safeguard the data, each system user should not:

  • give another person information that they would not otherwise have access to - this includes test result information

  • supply any information to a third party or member of the public unless you are told otherwise in the current MOT guide, inspection manuals or special notices (SNs), such as providing documents to vehicle presenters - any requests for information should be made in writing and sent to DVSA’s Information Access Team at DVSA headquarters

  • access personal information when there is a danger that unauthorised persons may view the information

enquiries@dvsa.gov.uk
Telephone: 0300 123 9000
Monday to Friday, 8am to 5pm

Driver and Vehicle Standards Agency
Berkeley House
Croydon Street
Bristol
BS5 0DA

Section C
Designated councils, taxis and private hire vehicles
MOT testing by local authorities (designated councils), which taxis and private hire vehicles do not need an MOT certificate.

1. Designated councils

MOT testing may also be carried out by designated councils (DCs). Their legal position, and that of the inspectors who carry out tests on their behalf, is similar to that of authorised examiners (AEs) and testers. For all practical purposes, DCs and their inspectors are treated as if they were AEs and testers respectively.

Applications for designation will be considered in the same way as those for AEs in Section B1. Application and authorisation.

DCs are required to have appropriate persons attend MOT managers courses in the same circumstances as for AEs. Similarly, inspectors appointed by DCs are required, in the same way as testers, to comply fully with all aspects covered in Section E. Tester.

The disciplinary standards applied to errant AEs will also be applied to DCs. DCs must not use any inspectors who would not be acceptable as testers. The disciplinary standards applied to errant testers will also be applied to inspectors.

Any disciplinary action taken against a tester will be taken into account in any future case, this includes where persons are subsequently appointed as inspectors. The reverse also applies.

In reading this guide, any reference to an AE should, unless stated otherwise, be treated as if it also applied to a DC.

DC testing must be carried out by staff employed directly by the council. Council owned companies and providers of contract maintenance to councils who wish to operate testing stations that had previously been directly operated by councils cannot continue to do so as a DC but must apply to become AEs in their own right. Testing as a DC must stop as soon as control is transferred.

2. Taxis and private hire vehicles

Taxis and private hire vehicles that are licensed by certain authorities do not need to have an MOT certificate. This applies only where the authorities are certified by the Secretary of State as empowered to issue their own exemption certificates.

Exemption certificates cannot be issued until the relevant vehicle has been tested by or on behalf of the authority to standards that at least equal those for MOT tests.

When a taxi or private hire vehicle ceases to be licensed, it must pass a normal MOT test; the vehicle must not continue to be used on the strength of an exemption certificate, even if not yet expired.

Such authorities may, if they see fit, impose test methods, items or standards that exceed the MOT requirements for these vehicles. DVSA has no involvement in setting these higher standards so any appeal against them has to be dealt with by the authority, not DVSA.

Some of the above authorities elect to conduct a normal MOT in addition to an exemption certificate. In such a case, the vehicle owner has the same facility of appeal to DVSA as anyone whose vehicle has passed or failed an MOT test.

Owners must, however, remember that even if the decision to fail a vehicle’s MOT test is reversed, the authority is under no obligation to issue an exemption certificate or licence for which they are fully entitled to apply standards higher than MOT standards.

Section D
Requirements for authorisation
Who is eligible to become an authorised examiner, their responsibilities, how to apply, what happens when DVSA receives an application, site requirements, mandatory roles, required training, testing requirements for all vehicle classes.

1. Authorised examiner

An authorised examiner (AE) is the organisation that operates and manages one or more vehicle testing stations (VTSs) and is responsible for controlling the quality of testing carried out. Except in the case of a sole trader the AE is not a person but a legal entity, for example a company, partnership or a local authority.

A designated council (DC) is a local authority authorised to carry out MOT tests.

Unless stated DCs are treated the same as AEs within this document.

This document sets out the requirements to be met when applying to become an AE or DC. It’s intended to assist with the application process by providing the information required on how to start a new application or to apply for a variation to an existing authorisation.

Normally an application to become an AE is made in conjunction with an application for a VTS. However, DVSA will accept an application to become an AE without a link to a tester or an approved VTS.

In all cases applicants should be conversant with their responsibilities. Before final authorisation to test is granted an AE must demonstrate compliance with all requirements.

All applicants should be fully aware of the requirements before completing and returning an Application for MOT Authorisation Form (VT01).

The application must be made by the legal entity that holds full control and responsibility for MOT testing functions. Authorisations are granted in accordance with the conditions applicable to the authorisation.

These conditions include compliance with the requirements set out in the MOT testing guide and appropriate inspection manuals (as amended) together with any additional specific conditions contained within the written authorisation notice.

AEs are in law fully responsible for ensuring that statutory MOT testing at all their VTSs is carried out to the required standard and in the manner instructed by DVSA. Failure to comply with the authorisation requirements for the MOT service may lead to your application being rejected.

An AE entity may be authorised without access to approved facilities however, before authorisation to test is granted an AE must have an approved testing facility. Authorisation of an AE and approval of a vehicle test station (VTS) may be done using a single application form; the specific requirements for a VTSs’ approval are set out in common to all classes.

Who is eligible to become an authorised examiner

Authorisation to carry out MOT testing will be granted only to applicants who can satisfy DVSA that they are of good repute, as defined in Appendix 7: Convictions and repute, and where applicable that their premises, equipment and personnel meet the required standards.

An application for appointment as an AE can be made by a:

  • sole trader
  • partnership
  • company
  • designated council

Any authorisation by DVSA allows only the legal entity authorised to provide the testing service. If a company is reconstituted in a way that leads to a new company registration and number being issued, then it will be regarded as a new entity and a new authorisation is needed. If, in a partnership, a partner leaves or joins the partnership this becomes a new entity and a new authorisation is needed. The same is true in the case of a sole trader who either takes on a partner or forms a company.

Sole trader

If the application is made by a sole trader, the AE would be the person making the application, and who must sign it.

Partnership

If the application is made by a partnership, the AE would be the partnership itself (for example, the partnership of F Bloggs and A N Other) and the application is to be signed by a person ‘duly authorised’ by the partnership to do so. Confirmation that the person is ‘duly authorised’ in a form of a statement to that effect signed by each of the partners will normally be required together with a copy of the current partnership agreement

Company

If the application is made by a company, the AE would be the company itself, not the directors or company management staff regardless of who owns the company and who the directors are. The application is to be signed by any person ‘duly authorised’ by the company to do so. Written confirmation that the person is ‘duly authorised’ signed by an ‘officer of the company’ is required. The directors must be recorded on the company’s register at Companies House.

Designated council

A designated council is:

  • the council of a county, district or London borough
  • a unitary authority or island council of a region or Islands area (in Scotland)
  • the City of London

Authorised examiners (AEs) responsibilities

It’s important that you understand all that is required to be an AE before signing the application.

General

AEs are held fully responsible for the actions of their staff and others acting on their behalf or with their agreement, all such staff must be adequately supervised and fully conversant with their testing duties. For a partnership or company, all partners or directors and officers of the company are equally responsible. Each authorised entity is required to have an authorised examiner designated manager (AEDM) (see Mandatory roles). The responsibilities of testers are set out in Section E. Tester.

Every new AE is required to have at least one person, who is an AEP, plus the AEDM, who has attended a DVSA approved MOT Managers Course.

AEs must notify DVSA immediately in writing of any conviction of an individual involved in the MOT scheme under their authorisation. This includes:

  • AE principals (AEPs)
  • AEDMs
  • AE delegates (AEDs)
  • site managers
  • site admin
  • testers

For conviction definitions see Appendix 7:Convictions and repute.

The extent of an AE’s liability for vehicle damage is set out in Regulation 14 (1) of the Motor Vehicles (Tests) Regulations 1981 (SI 1981 No 1694) as amended. AEs must not display disclaimers against liability for loss, damage or injury caused while vehicles are in their custody for MOT tests and must ensure that no vehicle presenter is asked to sign any such disclaimer. Appendix 4: Liability for loss or damage describes fully the scope of AE’s liabilities.

AEs are advised to be members, or become members, of a Chartered Trading Standards Institute (CTSI) approved code of practice. Details of approved codes can be found on the TSI website.

Premises and equipment

After approval of the site, every AE must, at all times, properly maintain the premises, facilities and testing equipment at all the VTSs for which they are responsible. This includes:

  • all facilities and equipment that were present at the time of the VTS’s approval and any additions or alternatives that were agreed with DVSA by prior notification

  • all facilities and equipment required by any mandatory upgrade introduced by DVSA

All testing equipment must be kept in good working order and measuring apparatus must be kept calibrated in accordance with DVSA’s requirements.

Testing must stop on any class or type of vehicle, if any mandatory item of equipment falls out of calibration, is missing a mandatory upgrade or inspection, is unable to connect to the MOT testing service when required or malfunctions in a way that could prevent a test being properly conducted on that class or type of vehicle. Refer to B4. General responsibilities - premises and equipment for information on what to do in the event of equipment failure.

An AE must apply to DVSA for approval prior to the changes being made if they want to:

  • add test classes
  • replace or modify any fixed test equipment that will alter the approved dimensions or layout
  • alter the building or the layout of equipment

The AE can apply using the VT01 application form. Supporting drawings should be enclosed with the application.

No proposed change will be acceptable if it reduces clearances or dimensions (including those for access) below the limits specified in the requirements for authorisation or, for features approved only as `acceptable variations’, below their existing values.

DVSA must be notified of any changes to fixed equipment and/or equipment that needs to be connected (transfer results to the MOT testing service) using the ‘Change testing equipment’ link on the VTS page on the MOT testing service.

The changes will be checked by DVSA at the next visit. If the changes do not meet the requirements for authorisation approval may not be given.

The renewal of mobile testing equipment does not have to be notified to DVSA provided that the replacement is on the current DVSA approved list and will not affect the range of vehicles that can be tested.

Access by DVSA staff

AEs must allow the inspection of their testing arrangements, equipment, facilities, records, and the checking of their tester’s competence, re-examinations of recently tested vehicles by DVSA staff at any time during normal working hours or when the VTS is open. AEs should always ask to see the official warrant that DVSA enforcement staff carry. If you have doubts about anyone asking to see official documents, refuse access and call the DVSA customer service centre.

AEs must allow their VTSs to be used by DVSA for examining vehicles subject to an appeal or complaint about a test result provided that 3 days’ notice has been given. The notice period may be reduced by mutual agreement. DVSA will pay one half of the relevant test fee for the use of the premises and equipment, unless the arrangement is cancelled at least 24 hours ahead.

Contact DVSA

DVSA Customer Service Centre
enquiries@dvsa.gov.uk
Telephone: 0300 123 9000
Monday to Friday, 8am to 5pm
Find out about call charges

Security

AEs are responsible for ensuring that blank MOT contingency testing (CT) certificates are not accessible at any time to unauthorised persons.

The AE shall take reasonable precautions to ensure that all MOT security code users which they are responsible for safeguard their MTS passwords and access to their security cards or authentication app and unique email address recorded on the users MTS profile.

Outside working hours, the security of the MOT security code generator and email is the responsibility of the service user.

Testing responsibilities

AEs must ensure that the MOT tests are carried out without avoidable distraction or interruption and strictly in accordance with the conditions of their authorisation, which includes compliance with the MOT testing guide, the appropriate inspection manual and any other instructions issued by DVSA.

They must ensure that, for each test, all assessments of pass/fail criteria are made, all appropriate documents are signed, and all database input details are confirmed by the tester who carried out the test. AEs must ensure that assistance is always available to testers for those parts of the test that require it.

AEs must offer an appointment to test any vehicle of a class within their authorisation at the earliest practicable date and time, with consideration for their existing MOT workload and customer requirements.

All appointments made for vehicles without a current MOT certificate must be recorded in writing. The record must include the vehicle’s registration mark (VRM), the date and time of the appointment and the name of the person making it. This record must be kept for at least 3 months after the date of the appointment.

An AE must not carry out an MOT test on a vehicle if it’s of a class or type of vehicle which they are not authorised to test, or a type of test they are not authorised to carry out, or the vehicle cannot be accommodated within the test facilities. They must tell the vehicle presenter immediately of any such circumstances, pointing out that consequently the test cannot be carried out.

Full details of reasons for refusal to test are contained in the respective MOT inspection manuals.

Any individual presenting a vehicle for an MOT test has the right to observe the test in safety from the approved viewing area(s).

Cessation for disciplinary reasons

DVSA, on behalf of the Secretary of State, has the discretionary power to take disciplinary action against an AE, including cessation of the authorisation. Failure to adhere to the requirements of authorisation may result in disciplinary action against the AE and/or the tester.

When the AE is a sole trader the responsibility for taking action to ensure that the authorisation is operated in accordance with the Secretary of State’s requirements and the penalties for failure to do so falls on that person. With partnerships and companies, however, individuals must ensure correct operation of testing. The responsibility therefore falls not only on the company or partnership but also on the following individuals:

  • in the case of a company, all the officers of the company and any other person ‘duly authorised’ by the company to sign applications and other similar documents relating to the authorisation
  • in the case of a partnership, each partner and any other person ‘duly authorised’ by the partnership to sign applications and other similar documents relating to the authorisation

Where the authorisation of the AE operating at a particular site has been ceased, for disciplinary reasons as above, anyone wishing to apply for authorisation at that site must be able to show that they are sufficiently independent from the former AE, partners or officers of the company. The maximum acceptable involvement of the former AE is as a landlord.

The former AE, including the AEDM and any individuals who were directly accountable in the cessation of the previous authorisation shall not be involved in any way with the management or responsibility of any authorisation. The spouse, partner, family members of the former AE, including the AEDM and any individuals who were directly accountable in the cessation of the previous authorisation, would not be considered sufficiently independent.

If an AE has received a 2 or 5 year disciplinary cessation of all their sites, none of the associated AEPs will be able to hold any role within another AE and/or Vehicle Testing Station during the cessation period.

Changes to businesses

DVSA must be told within 28 calendar days about any significant changes to the control or operation of the business. Failure to notify such changes within this period may be treated as a shortcoming under Section I. Discipline. For further information on changes to business, see Section B3. Cessation of authorisation and other changes to businesses.

A company that continues to operate under the same registration and company number may continue testing provided that any changes to the officers of the company or change in the relationship to any parent company have been notified to DVSA in writing.

Any directors added to a currently Approved AE will need to meet the current requirements, including a DBS check. An exception to this is for directors who are permanently based abroad; however, the AE must still inform DVSA of their inclusion as directors to the business.

An AE that makes a change (addition or removal) to the members (AE principals) of the business will need to meet the current requirements. For example, each AE principal will need to have an account in the MOT testing service.

It’s possible for the AEDM, or other appropriate roles, to update some authorisation details directly, such as telephone numbers, email and correspondence addresses, via the MOT testing service. Any other details must be notified to DVSA in writing.

The AE can cease the nomination of a tester. In the case of a multi-site AE, this cessation may be from all sites, a selection of sites, or a single site. A cessation by one AE or DC does not affect any current or future nominations by other AEs. DVSA must be notified by recording the change of details on the MOT testing service.

How to apply to become an AE

Application

An AE (DC) is the legal business entity that operates and manages one or more VTSs and is responsible for controlling the quality of testing carried out.

With the exception of a sole trader the AE (DC) is not a person but the legal entity, for example a partnership, a company or local authority.

All applications must be made on an Application for MOT Authorisation Form (VT01). All relevant sections should be completed, and the form returned to DVSA along with the relevant enclosures.

Those applying should not submit their application until confident that they will fully meet all the requirements as set out, further detail of the requirements are contained within the Motor Vehicle (Tests) Regulations as amended, the MOT testing guide and other sections of the applications pack (as appropriate).

Your failure to supply the required documents applicable to your application may lead to your application being delayed or refused.

Third Parties submitting an application on behalf of an AE

If a consultant or third party is dealing with an application on behalf of the AE. A letter of authority must accompany the application.

The letter of authority must be:

  • on the AE applicants headed paper
  • signed by an AE principal or the AE designated manager if you are already an approved AE

A scanned copy of letter of authority can be sent by email if it’s sent from the AE applicant’s email address.

Personal verification checks

You must provide a declaration of non-conviction supported by a basic Disclosure and Barring (DBS) certificate for each person proposed to be involved within the authorisation. This includes all company directors, partners, or sole traders and the AEDM.

The declaration of non-conviction must be signed along with the DBS check details sections completed or copy of certificate attached.

The basic DBS check must be dated within 3 months of DVSA’s receipt of any application.

A basic DBS check verifies an applicant’s identity based on the evidence provided and can confirm they are free from any unspent convictions.

A basic DBS check can be requested from a number of source, including directly from the Disclosure and Barring Service.

A criminal conviction is a judgement made by a court that a person or company is guilty of any offence. The penalty imposed may range from an absolute discharge through to imprisonment. This does not include fixed penalty offences. You must inform DVSA, in writing immediately of any convictions, as defined in Appendix 7: Convictions and repute, that occur between the date of application and authorisation of that application, and there on after.

If following approval, it’s brought to DVSA’s attention there are any unspent convictions that have not been disclosed, this may result in the cessation of authorisation to carry out statutory testing. Cessation may occur even though the conviction would no longer be considered but would have led to refusal on the initial VT01 application.

Declaration of non-conviction

In the case of a company you must provide a declaration of non-conviction for the company. A criminal conviction is a judgement made by a court that a person or company is guilty of any offence. The penalty imposed may range from an absolute discharge through to imprisonment. You must inform DVSA, in writing immediately of any convictions, as defined in Appendix 7: Convictions and repute, that occur between the date of application and authorisation of that application, and there on after.

If following approval, it’s brought to DVSA’s attention there are any unspent convictions that have not been disclosed, this may result in the cessation of authorisation to carry out statutory testing. Cessation may occur even though the conviction would no longer be considered but would have led to refusal on the initial VT01 application.

Partnership agreement

A copy of the partnership agreement signed by all partners must be provided.

Companies Act 2006

If the applicant is subject to the Companies Act 2006 you’ll need to demonstrate either:

  • the corporate name
  • the name of each partner
  • the individual person’s name

For each person named, you’ll need to give an address at which documents can be served.

You’ll need to include this in all:

  • the places where you carry on your business and where you deal with customers or suppliers
  • business letters
  • written orders for the supply of goods or services
  • invoices and receipts
  • written demands for the payment of business debts

For more information on the requirements of the Act, please visit Companies House.

The company number of the business to provide access to the Companies House record of appointments that confirms that all the listed applicants are known to Companies House.

Trained AEDM

Every new AE is required to have a trained AEDM.

Bankrupt or sequestrated

A person that is adjudged bankrupt or, in Scotland, has his estate sequestrated is not eligible to apply whilst this status remains. For applicants that have been subject to this order, within five years of the application date, DVSA require either a copy of the Certificate of Discharge or an independent declaration to confirm that you are no longer under these restrictions.

Receipt of application by DVSA

If the information supplied in the application form and enclosures is satisfactory, DVSA will progress the application. Where the application form or enclosures are incomplete, they will be returned to the applicant with details of the additional information required.

After reviewing the application and following appropriate enquiries and possible inspections the applicant will be informed in writing of the outcome of DVSA’s considerations, which will be either:

  • approval in principle (AIP) given
  • authorisation/designation granted
  • intention to refuse notified

Approval in principle given

Where the requirements for authorisation/designation are not met but with reasonable changes they can be met, the applicant will be given written AIP. This will list items to be complied with before authorisation/designation is granted and will include a time limit after which the AIP will expire. Final approval will only be given when all the required changes (or agreed alternatives) have been made.

Where the applicant is not prepared to comply with an item, or items, listed they must notify DVSA as soon as is possible, and before the expiry date of the AIP. The application will then be issued with an intent to refuse.

Delays to authorisation

To reduce the number of dormant applications, all applications will be reviewed periodically. A request will be sent to the applicant either by email or letter by recorded delivery, seeking evidence of good intent (which could be a letter confirming the application is proceeding). This review will be carried out during the 6th month after receipt of the application and 14 calendar days given for the reply. If no reply is received or the reply is such that the terms of the initial AIP are no longer valid, then the original application will be terminated without further notice.

Authorisation granted

Authorisation will be granted when DVSA is satisfied that:

  • the requirements for authorisation have been met
  • an AE Principal has attended the MOT Managers Course
  • an AE Designated Manager has attended the MOT Managers course;
  • a quality management system (if applicable) has been agreed

In the case of a council’s application, designation will be recommended. This will always have a standard set of conditions but may be subject to additional conditions specified in the authorisation/designation letter.

It’s emphasised that responsibility for ensuring that premises and equipment comply with other relevant acts, regulations, bylaws, health and safety at work requirements, and all other applicable instructions, rests with the applicant.

DVSA publishes information about authorised VTSs. This includes your trading name, address and phone number to assist the public in finding a VTS in their area.

DVSA will provide information when requested under the Freedom of Information Act. Personal information will not be included in these requests.

Information regarding an authorised examiner, VTS or its staff may also be supplied in response to a request from other enforcement agencies, for example the Police and HM Revenue and Customs.

Intent to refuse the authorisation or the designation

Where the Secretary of State is minded to refuse the application for authorisation, DVSA will notify the applicant in writing, detailing the reason(s) why the application may be refused.

The intention to refuse may be sent to the applicant at any stage during the application process when it becomes apparent that the application does not or is unlikely in the foreseeable future to meet the criteria.

The applicant may appeal against the intention to refuse to authorise or designate. Any appeal must be made in writing to the DVSA Office that issued the notice and be received within 14 calendar days from the date of the notification of the intention. An informal hearing may be requested in accordance with the Informal Hearing Notes for Guidance and Code of Practice issued with the notice.

If at the end of this appeal period no such appeal has been received DVSA will write to the applicant confirming the refusal to authorise.

If an application is from an entity or involves individuals that have been subject to cessation for disciplinary reasons, that application will not normally be considered until shortly before the cessation period expires. As such there can be no ‘intent to refuse’ until the cessation period has expired.

If at any time in the application process the applicant considers they cannot, or refuses to, meet the conditions they may give written notice to this effect to DVSA. On receipt of the applicant’s letter DVSA will confirm intent to refuse authorisation.

Additional requirements before a site is authorised to test

DVSA will accept an application to become an AE without a link to an approved VTS, however before final authorisation to test is granted an AE must demonstrate compliance with this requirement. The following additional requirements are required to be in place at each site to be approved.

MOT testing guide and inspection manuals

Online access to the MOT testing guide and the relevant inspection manuals for all the classes of vehicle for which authorisation to test is available.

Evidence of exclusive use

Evidence that the applicant has the sole use of the proposed MOT facility, including the test bay and reception area/office.

This evidence should be provided as a solicitor’s letter, supplied on headed paper, which specifically confirms ownership of the premises or lease or rental agreement.

The statement must confirm:

  • the applicant has the legal right to operate within the premises
  • that planning permission is in place
  • that the applicant is the owner of the land or that an enforceable lease or rental agreement is in place between the applicant and the owner of the land
  • the applicant has exclusive use of the premises and MOT testing facilities

This letter must be signed by a solicitor of the firm you appoint.

If the applicant is the site owner, DVSA may request they supply copies of documents from the land registry confirming that the applicant is the registered owner of the land. If a land registry entry is not available alternative proof of ownership must be accompanied by a written explanation from a solicitor.

If the applicant is not the site owner, DVSA may request evidence that the applicant has the right of exclusive use of the premises, in the form of a lease or rental agreement. The document needs to include:

  • the rent to be paid for the premises
  • specific mention that the prospective AE has exclusive use of the premises and facilities necessary for MOT testing
  • evidence that the person or body granting the lease (the lessor) owns the site, or that the lessor’s lease for the premises allows sub-letting or assignment of all or part of the lease to someone else
  • written confirmation from a solicitor that the lease is a proper and enforceable legal document

Irrespective of whether the applicant is the site owner or not, an applicant may provide written confirmation from a solicitor that a proper and enforceable lease is in place, in lieu of the document. This may, at DVSA discretion, allow a time limited approval of authorisation until suitable documents are provided. Failure to provide these documents by the time specified by DVSA will result in a suspension of authorisation until the requirements have been fulfilled.

Test appointments

Arrangements for making MOT test appointments by telephone and by personal visit.

AEs must offer an appointment to test any vehicle of a class within their authorisation and that can be safely accommodated on their MOT equipment at the earliest practicable date and time bearing in mind their existing MOT workload.

Testers

The AE will not be able to test until they appoint a DVSA approved tester. The AE must appoint a tester and conduct MOT tests within 12 months of approval to retain their authorisation.

Quality management

AEs are responsible for the quality of testing within their garage or garages.

Others, most notably testers, also have a responsibility upon them associated with this, but it’s for AEs to ensure there are adequate systems for the management of the quality of testing at their garage or garages.

To that end AEs must ensure an adequate system of quality management at each of their VTSs.

Such systems are defined further within Section B6. Quality management.

MOT testing service IT and associated equipment

Authorised examiners are responsible for the supply and maintenance of all IT equipment and internet connection used for MOT testing purposes. The requirements for this equipment are defined within Appendix 2: Facilities and security

Mandatory roles and training

For an AE to be authorised and a site to start testing, MOT specific roles must be appointed to individuals. These identify the individuals’ responsibilities with regard to the MOT service and where applicable, allow them appropriate access to the MOT testing service.

The following mandatory roles are required for the authorisation of a site to test:

  • authorised examiner principal (AEP)
  • authorised examiner designated manager (AEDM)
  • tester
  • site manager (SM)

Depending on the size and make up of a business an individual can hold one or multiple roles. The roles of AE principal and AEDM will be appointed by DVSA from the information supplied in the AE’s application, the remaining roles must be appointed by the AEDM.

There are additional non mandatory roles, giving varying levels of access to the MOT testing service, which AEs may find useful to aid with the running of their business.

Authorised examiner principal (AEP)

Authorised examiner principals (AEPs) are legally responsible for the entity. Every partner in a partnership; every director in a company or the sole trader in person must complete and submit separate AEP personal details using a VT01.

Authorised examiner designated manager (AEDM)

Every AE is required to have an AEDM who, on behalf of the AE, is responsible for ensuring testing is carried out in compliance with the Requirements of Authorisation.

Typically, the AEDM would be a person from within the AE, however it may also be a senior manager who has responsibility for testing across the entire AE.

Training requirements

Trained AE principal (AEP)

Each AE must have one AEP or more who has attained a Level 3 Award in MOT Test Centre Management or have attended the previously named MOT Managers course or Authorised Examiners course.

This course covers testing responsibilities, administrative arrangements, disciplinary and appeal processes. The course is designed to help the AE to fully understand their responsibilities within the MOT Service and the function that is carried out by the AEDM.

If the application to become an AE is from an individual they must attend the course.

If the application is from a partnership, the partner who will exercise the most direct control over all MOT testing operations must attend the course.

If the application is from a company, the director or an officer of the company having the most direct responsibility for all MOT testing operations at all sites, must attend the course.

If the application is from a designated council, then a senior council officer having direct responsibility for all MOT testing operations must be the one to attend the course.

Trained AE designated manager (AEDM)

Each AEDM must attain a Level 3 Award in MOT Test Centre Management or have attended the previously named MOT Managers course or Authorised Examiners course.

Timing of training

Normally, training must be completed before the authorisation can be granted.

In cases where a new authorisation becomes necessary only because a business undergoes one of the changes indicated below, the authorisation can be granted before training has taken place, provided that a suitable person is trained within 35 working days of the change. Failure to complete the necessary training within the specified period will result in cessation. These changes are:

  • a sole trader takes on a partner or forms a company of which he or she is a director
  • a partnership splits up, but an untrained partner continues the business as a sole trader
  • a partnership splits up, but one untrained partner continues in a new partnership or as a director of a company; the same would apply if more than one of the untrained partners stayed with the new partnership or company
  • a partnership that had originally applied for authorisation before 1 April 1995, and therefore did not need to have a trained person, is reconstituted by the addition or departure of one partner or more and therefore is now required to have a trained person in the partnership
  • a receiver or manager ‘of the body’s undertaking’ is appointed for a company

Validity of training

The training is valid indefinitely unless an AE has been subject to cessation for disciplinary reasons. The AEDM for that AE may be required to attend a further course before again being acceptable as a trained person. If the AEDM is judged to have been directly involved in the incident leading to cessation then retraining will be mandatory. In such cases retraining will normally be permitted only when the AE is eligible for re-authorisation

The training will also not be valid if an AE is given a formal warning under DVSA’s disciplinary procedures - the AEDM for that AE may be required to achieved a Level 3 Award in MOT Test Centre Management within 35 working days of the date that the AE is notified of the disciplinary action

Applications for training

A Level 3 Award in MOT Test Centre Management course is booked with a training provider. There is a charge for the course, which varies and is set by the individual course provider.

Tester

Every new AE is required to have at least one person, the tester, who has achieved a Level 2 Award in MOT Testing or previous equivalent DVSA MOT Testers course, before testing can begin. If a tester isn’t present authorisation to test can be is granted but the test station will have deemed to have surrendered it approval if testing doesn’t begin within 12 months of the approval date.

Site manager (SM)

This is the role responsible for the day to day running of one or more VTSs. The SM can carry out VTS management, and non-testing functions for example assign users within a VTS. Normally there will be only one SM per VTS, however, in some cases there may be a requirement to have more than one SM listed against a VTS.

Many smaller single site AEs may well choose to assign the SM role to the AEDM, larger single site businesses may allocate it to another manager or supervisor. The decision on how many SM roles are needed and to whom they are given is left to the AEDM based on how the business is run.

2. Common to all classes

The Driver and Vehicle Standards Agency (DVSA), on behalf of the Secretary of State appoints authorised examiners and designated councils to carry out inspections known generally as MOT tests. The following sections set out the application procedure and requirements that must be met.

This section should be read in conjunction with the requirements for authorisation for authorised examiners

This section details the requirements for those applying to have a site approved as a VTS or seeking approval for changes to an existing VTS. It covers:

  • how to apply
  • application enclosures
  • requirements for premises
  • equipment requirements
  • MOT testing signs and notices
  • acceptable variations to layout and equipment

Applicants are advised not to proceed with alterations to buildings or purchase of equipment, etc, before receiving written approval in principle from DVSA.

How to apply

Applications must be made on the current Application for MOT Authorisation Form (VT01). All relevant sections should be completed, and the signed form returned to DVSA along with any requested enclosures as outlined in this section.

Where possible application enclosures, for example plans and drawings, should be supplied in a digital format. Those applying should not submit their application until confident that it will fully meet all the requirements, approval to test will only be granted to applicants who also meet the requirements to be an authorised examiner or are already authorised.

The requirements in this section should be read in conjunction with the class specific requirements for class(es) approval is sought and the list of acceptable equipment.

If the applicant proposes to carry out building alterations or obtain new equipment, it’s recommended that this is not done before DVSA has given approval in principle to the application.

Solicitors that submit evidence on behalf of the applicant must be governed by the Solicitors Regulator Authority (England and Wales) or the Law Society of Scotland (Scotland).

Application enclosures

Applications for a new site to be approved for testing or alterations to existing sites will need to be supported by the following evidence:

  • site plan showing the buildings, the location of the testing bay, the access from and to the public highway and the location of the MOT notice board
  • a fully dimensioned drawing of the proposed testing bay, or bays, showing adjacent equipment and parts of the building, the location of the test equipment, the position and dimensions of the entrances and exits, and the area from which the test may be observed
  • planning permission or an exemption, such as a Certificate of Lawful Existing Use or Development (CLEUD), or written confirmation from the local authority. A letter from a solicitor confirming that the existing approval covers MOT testing or garage services and vehicle repair may be accepted.

The plan and drawings must show that the site will meet the requirements outlined in this section and the requirements for the class(es) approval to test is sought.

Requirements for premises

For a site to be considered for approval it must provide the following.

Premises

The premises must have:

  • test facilities housed in a weatherproof building capable of being totally enclosed and provide a satisfactory working area – this is not mandatory for roller brake test or headlamp aim standing area on class 3, 4, 5 and 7 authorisations
  • equipment laid out so that testing can be performed effectively – the equipment should be laid out and located so that other garage activities will not affect the proper conduct of the test
  • unobstructed, safe and easy access via a metalled road from the site entrance to the building entrance
  • adequate off-road parking
  • a clearly defined weatherproof viewing area from which all stages of the MOT test in progress can be observed safely without interruption, except for road testing (room for 2 seated people is considered sufficient)
  • a sign installed in the customer reception area to alert presenters of vehicles for MOT tests of the presence of the MOT viewing area
  • safe access from the customer reception to the designated viewing area if the viewing area is to be located in the workshop

Alternatively, you may opt to install a fixed display monitor in the customer reception or waiting area to display camera relayed ‘live feed’ images of the whole of the test bay area. The image displayed on the monitor must be in colour and of good quality but must not be recorded.

If monitors are used:

  • the monitor must be identified as the MOT viewing facility/area
  • the monitor must be available to view the test when requested by the vehicle presenter
  • the relayed images cannot be interrupted or used for other purposes during that period, for example displaying advertisements

Supplementary monitors (such as portable handheld devices) are acceptable only when a fixed viewing monitor is also available and functional.

Test bay

The test bay must have:

  • clear unobstructed access and egress from the entrance of the building
  • vehicle entrances and exits that conform to the dimensions applicable to the class(es) for which authorisation is sought
  • a width which conforms to the dimensions applicable to the class(es) which authorisation is sought. Minor intrusions such as wall piers may encroach on these dimensions provided vehicle testing is not impeded. Minor intrusion means any part of the building structure or other fixtures which come within the minimum bay outline.
    • they must be so positioned that vehicle movement and the recommended method of inspection are not impeded
    • items of equipment other than the brake tester console and a desk surface for MOT purposes are not normally permitted
  • headroom which conforms to the dimensions applicable to the class(es) for which authorisation is sought
  • adequate general illumination. There must be sufficient artificial lighting to enable testing to be carried out without difficulty

Layout

The layout must:

  • conform to the requirements of the class(es) for which authorisation is sought
  • have at least 600mm clearance between the outer edges of equipment in adjacent bays on side by side layouts
  • have at least 600mm clearance around all parts of a lift, including control boxes
  • have a clearance of at least 1.0m forwards of the non drive on end and 1.5m to the rear of the drive on end of a lift or pit to any entrance/exit door or wall

MOT testing distraction or disruption

Where there is an increased likelihood of distraction and disruption to MOT tests when bays are not separated by walls, for example from other activities on the premises.

New applicants should be aware that where DVSA considers there may be a risk of testing distraction or disruption, they may be asked to clearly paint the outline of the boundaries of the test bays in open plan workshops/premises.

Test bays must then be kept clear of all non-MOT testing activities and equipment when testing is in progress

Existing testing stations that make alterations increasing the likelihood of testing distraction or disruption may be required to comply with the above paragraphs

Equipment requirements

Major equipment

A testing station needs a means of allowing the underside of vehicles to be properly examined without obstruction or hindrance. This will need to be fitted with steering and suspension play detectors on the DVSA list of acceptable equipment if it’s an Automated Test Lane (ATL) or One Person Test Lanes (OPTL).

A testing station may be permitted to have more than one underside inspection facility which share the same brake tester, headlamp testing area and emissions equipment providing:

  • the underside facilities are located so that testing can be carried out effectively
  • the additional underside facility meets the requirements for the class(es) tested and does not adversely affect the standard of the test
  • if the additional underside facility is used as a headlamp standing area then it must have a dedicated headlamp aim tester unless the rails are continuous across all bays. The facility must also meet all the requirements associated with headlamp testing, including level and calibration certificates
  • the viewing area has an unrestricted view of all the testing facilities - if this cannot be achieved from one viewing area then additional viewing areas must be provided

A testing station also needs:

  • a headlamp aim testing facility
  • brake testing equipment
  • emissions testing equipment (excluding motor bicycles)

All testing equipment must be kept in good working order. Measuring apparatus must be calibrated in accordance with DVSA’s requirements. If an item of mandatory test equipment is not recalibrated by its due date, then testing which uses that item will be prevented until the item is recalibrated.

Miscellaneous equipment

A testing station also needs:

  • a tyre tread depth gauge selected from DVSA’s latest list of acceptable equipment
  • a corrosion assessment tool
  • suitable pinch bars, long and short (not applicable to class 1 and 2)
  • a steel tape measure (minimum extended length 1.0m)
  • suitable wheel chocks for the class(es) of vehicle to be tested (not applicable class 1 and 2)
  • brake pedal application device from the DVSA list of acceptable equipment (only mandatory for ATL and OPTL installations)
  • suitably positioned mirrors or colour camera system for lighting checks (only mandatory for ATL and OPTL installations)
  • a suitable handheld low voltage inspection lamp
  • a 13 Pin Trailer Socket Test Tool from the DVSA approved equipment list (not applicable to class 1 and 2)
  • a proprietary leak detection spray which meets BS EN 14291:2004 (not applicable to class 1 and 2)

MOT testing signs and notices

The three triangles MOT sign detailed in The Traffic Signs Regulations and General Directions 2016, Schedule 11, diagram 864 must be displayed in a prominent position, no part higher than 4.5m from the ground and no more than one sign on each road frontage.

The business trading name as described within either the Companies or the Business Names Acts is displayed conspicuous and legibly.

A notice board with a protective transparent covering must be positioned inside the vehicle testing station so that DVSA notices can be easily read by any persons intending to or submitting vehicles for test.

The MOT notice board must not be obscured or be inaccessible and must be of sufficient size to accommodate at least one A3 fees poster (landscape) and one Certificate of Authorisation (A4 portrait). It must not be used for any other purpose other than official DVSA MOT notices and company public liability insurance and certificates of incorporation.

If the notice board displays both MOT and business documents, there must be clear and distinct separation between the MOT documents and any documents not related to MOT testing.

All authorised examiners (AEs) must display:

  • the certificate of authorisation (VT9) issued by DVSA
  • the current fees and appeals poster (form VT9A) showing vehicle classes, test fees and appeals procedure and the details of how to contact DVSA

The current fees and appeals poster may be displayed adjacent to the ‘official’ notice board if it will not fit on the notice board proper. Additional copies of this poster can be obtained online.

Acceptable variations to layout and equipment

Provided there is no change in the class of vehicles tested, particular variations will be allowed for authorised examiners and applicants as shown below.

For existing authorised examiners

For existing authorised examiners moving their test bay or equipment within their present building(s), the test bay and equipment layout of these existing authorised examiners will be considered suitable if they meet the requirements as laid down above, except where it would be impossible to do so without major structural alteration, such as significant work to the roof, floor or loadbearing walls.

Test equipment requirements will be considered met if the existing authorised examiner retains their current equipment. If new equipment is obtained, it must meet the current relevant requirements.

For new applicants or existing authorised examiners moving into previously authorised premises using an existing test bay

For new applicants or existing authorised examiners moving into previously authorised premises using an existing test bay, provided a full test has been carried out and recorded on the MOT testing service by a tester at the site within the previous 12 months, the test bay and equipment layout of new applicants moving into previously authorised premises will be considered suitable if they meet the requirements for authorisation (previously Conditions of Appointment) that were current when the site was last accepted. Occasionally, certain updates will have to be complied with for example test equipment, tools. Advice should be sought from DVSA at the initial inspection.

Test equipment requirements will be considered met if the equipment last used for MOT testing is retained, provided that it’s still in full working order. However, any changes to required equipment that would have been necessary had the premises been in continuous testing must also be complied with.

MOT connected equipment as specified on DVSA’s latest list of acceptable equipment must be fitted and used when:

  • applying to open a new MOT centre
  • reopen a closed MOT centre (this applies regardless of how long it’s been closed)
  • a MOT centre changes from one authorised examiner to another
  • replacing previously authorised equipment
  • adding an extra test lane (where changes include the installation of equipment that needs to be connected)

The Salter type brake meter (pull along brake tester) is not acceptable for new or reauthorisations.

Authorised examiners and new applicants in remote rural areas

The premises, equipment layout and equipment of authorised examiners and new applicants in remote rural areas will be considered suitable if the requirements are met in DVSA’s view as far as is reasonably possible.

To be considered for remote rural area status:

  • the premises must be 15 miles or more by road from a testing station that meets the specification as laid down or as varied above.
  • not more than 350 tests per year are likely to be carried out

Equipment awaiting approval

Brake and headlamp test equipment will normally be selected from DVSA’s latest list of acceptable equipment.

All applicants that wish to use any equipment not on DVSA’s list of acceptable equipment will be referred to DVSA

Exceptionally, where a manufacturer has sought acceptance of their equipment but DVSA has not assessed its suitability, applicants may use equipment not on the list of acceptable equipment, provided the application is supported by:

  • a certificate signed by the manufacturer, or recognised agent in the case of imported equipment, that it meets the performance specification and is correctly installed
  • an undertaking signed by the applicant that they will cease testing until the equipment is replaced or modified if subsequently DVSA decides that it does not meet its specification, or it’s not correctly installed (this would normally be three months)

3. Class 1 and 2 vehicles

Installation and equipment requirements

November 2009

DVSA, on behalf of the Secretary of State, appoints authorised examiners and designated councils to carry out inspections known generally as MOT tests. The following section sets out the additional requirements that must be met for testing Class 1 and 2 vehicles.

The dimensions in this section are the minimum requirements for authorisation as a vehicle test station for class 1 and 2 vehicles.

The dimensions of your test bay should take into account the requirements of your business.

When considering the contents of this document you should be aware that the equipment and/or layout selected may affect the type of vehicle able to be tested.

Applicants are advised not to proceed with alterations to buildings or purchase of equipment, etc, before receiving written approval in principle from DVSA.

Premises and test bay

Premises, test bays and equipment will be considered suitable if they meet the requirements laid out in Requirements for Authorisation for Vehicle Testing Station (Common to all Classes).

Test bay

A test bay with:

  • an inspection area at least 3.2m wide by 3.7m long by 2.1m high, which must be substantially level and may include the brake test and/or headlamp aim standing area(s)
  • vehicle entrances and exits at least 2.3m wide and 2.0m high

General inspection area equipment

Inspection area equipment will be considered suitable if the following are provided:

  • wheel alignment checking apparatus comprising two straight bars of at least 2.0m long or two strong cords of at least 2.5m long
  • sufficient jacks or stands so that motorcycles without centre stands can have each of their wheels raised clear of the floor independently

The following optional equipment may also be provided:

  • a wheel supporting stand or bench capable of lifting the motorcycle to a comfortable working height
  • a positively located turning plate which allows the steering to be turned freely from lock to lock

Headlamp aim testing

A headlamp aim testing facility will be considered suitable if it has a rail mounted headlamp tester on DVSA’s latest list of acceptable equipment.

Headlamp aiming screens are no longer acceptable for new authorisations.

Headlamp tester installation

A headlamp tester installation must have:

  • a designated clearly marked vehicle standing area at least 2.5m long, 2.0m wide, certified as flat and level to within +/- 6mm - the forward edge of the standing area should be positioned so that it’s in line with the headlamp tester lens
  • rails certified as being flat and level to within +/- 2mm and parallel to the forward edge of the standing area - the rails must be straight and the headlamp tester must not have excessive rock
  • equipment positioned to take account of the vertical and horizontal location of headlamps tested, the standing area and datum line(s)
  • clearance at the rear of the tester optical head to be at least 600mm

The standing area must be durably and clearly marked with a datum line (or lines) at the headlamp tester manufactures operational tolerance limits for positioning the vehicle headlamp in relation to the headlamp tester. A centre line on the standing area at right angles to the datum line is required.

The certificate for the above must show height measurements from a level plane at all intersecting points on a 300mm (max) square grid covering the standing area and at points 300mm apart on the rails, which must be within the limits stated. It must be signed by a competent person, such as; a surveyor, manufacturer’s representative or agent and include date, status, address of firm and VTS address. A copy must be provided to DVSA for placing on the garage file

Headlamp aim operating instructions

Headlamp aim equipment operating instructions must be available.

Checking the equipment alignment

Suitable arrangements for checking the alignment of the equipment with the standing area must be in place. These may consist of evidence provided by a competent outside agency or by the VTS using the manufacturer’s acceptable equipment. Provision must be made for checks to be carried out at no more than 6 monthly intervals and for records to be kept. It’s acceptable if an alignment check is within the 6th calendar month in which the alignment was last checked.

Brake testing

A brake testing facility will be considered suitable if it has:

  • a calibrated decelerometer on DVSA’s latest list of acceptable equipment as approved for Class 1 and 2 testing (mandatory for garages authorised after November 2009)
  • either a calibrated roller or plate brake tester that is on DVSA’s latest list of acceptable equipment

Roller brake tester

A roller brake tester (RBT) must be installed so that:

  • it is centrally positioned in an area of substantially level floor (which in good building practice is within +/- 12mm of a level plane) at least 4.6m long and 1.2m wide
  • the console is positioned so that it can easily be read by the tester performing the test on the machine

Plate brake tester

A plate brake tester (PBT) must be installed so that:

  • it is centrally located in a substantially level area, at least 1.5m wide
  • there is an unobstructed area of substantially level floor at least 4m long in front of the measuring plate and a similar area at least 2m long behind it. The width of each area must not be less than that in bullet point 1 above and all of these areas must lie within the test bay
  • the measuring plate high friction surface to be flush with the floor

Weighing equipment

Suitable calibrated weighing equipment must be available, which may be incorporated into the roller or plate brake tester (weight charts are not acceptable).

Separate weighing equipment will be considered suitable provided:

  • it is accurate to +/- 3%
  • if weighing one wheel at a time, it must have a minimum capacity of 125kg for Class 1 testing or 250kg for Class 2 testing
  • if weighing the whole machine, it must have a minimum capacity of 250kg for Class 1 testing or 500kg for Class 2 testing

Additional brake testing requirements

Operating instructions must be available for the decelerometer and the roller/plate brake tester.

Suitable arrangements for re-calibration of the decelerometer, weighing equipment and either the roller brake or the plate brake tester (whichever is installed). Arrangements for checking calibration may consist of evidence provided either by a competent outside agency or by the VTS using the manufacturer’s acceptable equipment

4. Class 3 and 4 vehicles

Installation and equipment requirements

November 2009

DVSA, on behalf of the Secretary of State, appoints authorised examiners and designated councils to carry out inspections known generally as MOT tests. The following section sets out the additional requirements that must be met for testing Class 3 and 4 vehicles.

The dimensions in this section are the minimum requirements for authorisation as a vehicle test station for class 3 and 4 vehicles.

The dimensions of your test bay should take into account the requirements of your business.

When considering the contents of this document you should be aware that the equipment and/or layout selected may affect the type of vehicle able to be tested.

Applicants are advised not to proceed with alterations to buildings or purchase of equipment, etc, before receiving written approval in principle from DVSA.

Premises, test bay and equipment layout

The test bay and layout dimensions stated are the minimum requirements measured from the inside of walls and doors, as appropriate. If there is a capability to test longer wheel based vehicles, such as if the lift will accommodate more than 3.35m wheelbase and the headlamp standing area is at the minimum requirements then the headlamp standing area dimensions will take precedence and a 3.35m wheelbase would be the longest which could be tested. If a longer dimension is required then all other dimensions must be proportional to this.

Premises, test bays and equipment will be considered suitable if they meet the requirements laid out in Requirements for Authorisation for Vehicle Testing Station (Common to all Classes).

Test bay

A test bay needs:

  • vehicle entrances and exits at least 2.4m high by 2.4m wide (for plate brake testers see brake testing section below)
  • a width of at least 3.6m. On a side by side layout bay size may overlap providing a 600mm clearance/working space is provided between equipment
  • headroom of at least 2.4m (except over a lift - see below)

It must have headroom over a lift of at least 3.8m measured from the platform surfaces when fully lowered.

The headroom must extend:

  • 500mm further than the outer edges of the lift platforms
  • 500mm to the front of the platforms non drive on end
  • 1m to the rear of the drive on end of the lift platforms

Equipment layout

Class 4 - Critical lift dimensions

Platforms and wheel play/turn plate dimensions

Space requirements around lift

Headroom over lift

Underside inspection

The designated means of inspecting the underside of vehicles will be considered suitable if either a lift or a pit meeting the following is provided:

Lift

If a wheel supporting platform lift is provided, it must have:

  • platforms without upstands or guard rails at least 3.9m long - the platform length does not include access ramps
  • rolled edges or vertical rails for jacking equipment that are not more than 25mm higher than the platform.
  • platform surfaces capable of being raised at least 1.5m from the floor - this is measured from the floor on which the lift is mounted
  • a minimum of at least 760mm (may be reduced to 600mm if testing narrow track vehicles) between the inner edges of the platforms and at least 1.9m between the outer edges
  • a safe working load (SWL) of at least 3 tonnes clearly marked on the lift
  • jacking equipment clearly marked with a minimum SWL of 2.0 tonnes, capable of simultaneously raising both front or both rear wheels using the recommended test procedures and jacking points, the distance between the centre of the lifting pads must extend to a minimum of 1700mm - it must also be capable of lifting vehicles fitted with independent suspension (duplicated jacking equipment is acceptable)
  • captive bearing based turning plates, positively secured to the platforms, which permit the steered wheels to be turned freely from lock to lock - the turning plates must move laterally across the full platform width - when installed there must be a minimum distance of 3.35m from the centre of the turning plates to the drive on end of lift platform
  • chocks that operate automatically when the lift is raised - the 3.35m dimension for turning plates must not interfere with operation of the chocks - on non drive through layouts permanent chocks may be fitted to the non drive on end

You should have confirmation in writing by the lift installer that the installation of the lift complies with BS 7980:2024. A current LOLER thorough examination certificate. Vehicle lifts should be CE and or UKCA marked. Any modifications to existing vehicle lifts should conform to BS 7980:2024 and BS EN 1493:2022 regarding safety distances for toe protection.

If a scissor lift is used, the scissors must be located underneath the platforms, allowing unobstructed access between them.

An automated test lane (ATL) or one person test lane (OPTL) needs:

  • wheel play detectors from the DVSA list of acceptable equipment, securely fixed to the lift
  • at least 3.35m from the drive on end of the lift platforms to the centre line of the wheel play detectors. The 3.35m dimension for wheel play detectors must not interfere with operation of the chocks
  • written declaration from the hoist manufacturer (not installer) that the hoist is suitable to be fitted with wheel play detectors

Pit

If a pit is provided, it must have:

  • an uninterrupted working length of at least 3.9m
  • a width of at least 760mm and not more than 920mm over the working length measured across both pit walls (this may be extended up to 1300mm if used in combination with Class 7)
  • a depth of at least 1.5m and not more than 1.8m, over the working length. Staging may be used to meet this requirement
  • adequate access for personnel which does not intrude on the working dimensions. Access steps may encroach on the required dimensions to an entrance/exit door or wall provided there is a minimum clearance width of not less than 600mm
  • been sealed to prevent the ingress of water
  • jacking equipment as required for a lift. Rolled edges and vertical rails for jacking equipment must not exceed 25mm height
  • captive bearing based turning plates, positively secured to the floor which permits the steered wheels to be turned freely from lock to lock

If it has an ATL or OPTL, it must have combined steering and wheel play detectors on DVSA’s list of acceptable equipment. No part of the installation should be within 1.5m of the pit working length drive on end.

The location of turning plates and play detectors must be that the tester has adequate space to safely inspect all the items required when stood in the pit.

Headlamp aim testing

A headlamp aim testing facility will be considered suitable if it has a calibrated rail mounted 2005 specification headlamp tester on DVSA’s latest list of acceptable equipment.

Headlamp tester installation

A headlamp tester installation must have a designated vehicle standing area which is certified as flat and level to within +/- 6mm in any 3m.

It must have a clearly outlined area of floor 3.6m long measured from the datum line by 2.1m wide, which may:

  • be the lift platforms (lift platforms must rest on positive stops when lowered)
  • straddle a pit or roller brake tester
  • be the plates of a plate brake tester

If during headlamp testing vehicle wheels rest on turning plates which are not longitudinally adjustable by at least 600mm, they must be within the +/- 6mm limits.

Additional equipment fitted in the standing area must comply with the +/- 6mm level requirements.

The headlamp tester installation must have rails certified as level to within +/- 2mm and parallel to the standing area. The rails must be straight and the headlamp tester must not have significant rock or twist at any point along the rails.

The certificate for the above must show height measurement from a level plane at all intersecting points on a 300mm (max) square grid covering the standing area and at points 300mm (max) apart on the rails. It must be signed by a competent person, such as a surveyor, manufacturer’s representative or agent and include date, status, address of firm and VTS address. A copy must be provided to DVSA for the garage file.

The headlamp aim tester must have 600mm clearance behind the headlamp aim tester optical head. Floor mounted equipment must not be installed in this area.

The standing area must be durably and clearly marked with a datum line (or lines) at the headlamp tester manufactures operational tolerance limits for positioning the vehicle headlamp in relation to the headlamp tester.

Headlamp aim equipment operating instructions must be available .

Headlamp aim tester drawings

Class 4 - Headlamp aim dimensions

Headlamp tester dimensions

Brake testing

Brake testing equipment will be considered suitable if the following are provided:

  • a calibrated decelerometer on DVSA’s latest list of acceptable equipment
  • a calibrated roller brake tester or a calibrated plate brake tester that is on DVSA’s latest list of acceptable equipment - if it’s being used on an ATL lane, it needs to be approved for ATL use on DVSA’s latest list of acceptable equipment
  • roller/plate brake tester user/operator instructions

Roller brake tester

A roller brake tester (RBT) must be installed so that it is centrally located in an unobstructed working area at least 9.0m long and at least 2.4m wide. At least 3.35m to the front and rear of the RBT centre line should be substantially level (which in good building practice is within +/- 12mm of a level plane). The remainder of the area must not exceed a 10% slope (100mm in 1m).

Part of the brake testing standing area can be outside the building, providing the first part of the RBT floor plate is at least 1.5m inside the building (where a doorway meets the class 7 width requirement then the 1.5m can be measured from the RBT centre line).

Where part of the roller brake test vehicle standing area is located outside of the building, the standing area must not encroach any public thoroughfare.

In the case of a ‘drive-through’ layout where the roller brake tester is fitted after the lift or pit there shall be a clear distance of at least 3.35m between lift platforms and the RBT centre line. Lead-off ramps from floor mounted lifts shall not encroach on this area.

You must also make sure that the RBT is installed so that:

  • any part of a roller brake tester is at least 600mm from an inspection pit, lift platform or lift recess (except cross pit rollers)
  • it is in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions
  • the console is positioned to be easily read whilst performing the test
  • when a cross-pit RBT is installed there must be an isolator that prevents operation of the RBT when a person is in the pit - it must be positioned so other equipment will not interfere with brake testing. i.e. turning plates

Plate brake tester

A plate brake tester (PBT) must be installed so that:

  • it is certified as installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions
  • the plates are centrally located in a substantially level test area which (including approach and run-off area) is at least 3.0m wide
  • a clear area of 4.5m shall be provided in advance of the plate brake tester. This area must be substantially level and any gradient must not exceed 5% (50mm in 1m) nor the equipment positioned within it. All or part of the 4.5m can be outside the building. Where it is perceived that there may be a safety risk, barriers and/or warning signs may be required along the approach area and/or the run off area
  • doorways positioned within the 4.5m approach area must be at least 3m wide
  • where the plate surface is not flush with the surrounding floor, lead on and off ramps must be located at least 600mm from any doorway
  • a clear run off distance of 3.0m shall be provided after the PBT working surface (this must not include any part of the lift or lead on ramps)
  • in the case of a ‘drive-through’ layout where the plate tester is fitted AFTER the lift or pit there shall be a clear distance of 4.5m between them. Lead-off ramps from floor mounted lifts shall not encroach on this area
  • the console is positioned to be easily read whilst performing the test

Brake tester standing area drawings

Class 4 - Brake standing area dimensions

Roller brake tester layout

Emissions testing

All class 4 testing stations must have the following emissions testing equipment.

Spark ignition engine emissions

Exhaust gas analysis equipment will be considered suitable for all spark ignition engine vehicles if the following is provided:

  • a calibrated exhaust gas analyser on DVSA’s latest list of acceptable equipment suitable for all spark ignition vehicles
  • gas analyser user/operator instructions
  • confirmation that the analyser contains the current up to date database

Diesel engine emissions

Diesel smoke test equipment will be considered suitable if the following is provided:

  • a calibrated diesel smoke meter on DVSA’s latest list of acceptable equipment
  • smoke meter user/operator instructions

Connected equipment

Some types of MOT equipment are enabled to transfer test results from the test equipment to the MOT testing service (MTS).

The equipment types this applies to are:

Equipment type Mandatory from Classes
Roller brake testers 1 October 2019 4, 5, 7
Decelerometers 1 February 2020 4, 5, 7
Exhaust gas analysers 1 May 2021 4, 5, 7
Diesel smoke meters 1 May 2021 4, 5, 7

Who needs connected equipment

Connected equipment is required to be fitted and used by a garage where approval is sought:

  • for a garage that hasn’t previously conducted MOT tests (new)
  • for a currently testing VTS that is undergoing a change of ownership (where the site is transferred to a different AE)
  • at a garage that has previously been a MOT test station but has ceased to test (regardless of how long ago it tested)

It will also be required if a VTS is:

  • making a voluntary upgrade of a piece of equipment listed in the table in a VTS
  • adding an additional test lane including a piece of equipment listed in the table
  • replacing broken equipment listed in the table

Where either an Exhaust Gas Analyser or a Diesel Smoke Meter that a part of a combined unit is replaced by the same make and model this is classed as a repair to the combination unit.

How to connect equipment to the MOT service

A software code (a key) is required to connect the equipment to the MOT testing service. The key can be requested by the AEDM, AE Delegate or Site Manager via the MOT testing service using the ‘Request a key’ link.

The key should be kept securely and given to the installation engineer who will connect the equipment to the MOT testing service.

A check must be made on the first test after the equipment is installed that the results have been sent through to the MOT testing service.

Contact the equipment supplier immediately if results are not sent through.

Class 3 only testing

Where only Class 3 testing is conducted the requirements for Class 4 are varied as follows:

Premises

There are no variations to the premises requirements - they are the same as those for class 4

Test bay

The test bay must have:

  • vehicle entrances and exits at least 2.3m wide and 2.0m high
  • bay width at least 3.2m
  • bay headroom at least 2.1m
  • headroom over a lift of at least 3.2m

Equipment layout

There must be a clearance of at least 900mm to the front and rear of a lift or pit to any entrance/exit door or wall.

Lift

The lift must have:

  • platforms at least 3.00m long
  • a safe working load (SWL) of at least 1.5 tonnes clearly marked on the lift
  • a suitable method of supporting the ‘single wheel’ of any three wheeled vehicle on a firm surface with a captive bearing based turning plate - a SWL of at least 500kg must be clearly marked on the support
  • jacking equipment clearly marked with a minimum SWL of 500kg
  • captive bearing based turning plates, positively secured to the platforms, which permit the steered wheels to be turned freely from lock to lock - the turning plates must move laterally across the full platform width
  • when installed there must be a minimum distance of 2.35m from the centre of the turning plates to the drive on end of lift platforms

Pit

The pit must have:

  • an uninterrupted working length of at least 3.0m with a single bridge and turning plate
  • a suitable method of supporting the ‘single wheel’ of any three wheeled vehicle on a firm surface with a captive bearing based turning plate - a safe working load SWL of at least 500kg must be clearly marked on the support
  • jacking equipment clearly marked with a minimum SWL of 500kg

Headlamp aim testing

It must have a designated vehicle standing area at least 3.0m long and 1.8m wide.

Brake testing

It must have a calibrated Category A decelerometer on DVSA’s latest list of acceptable equipment.

A roller brake tester must be installed so that it is centrally located in an unobstructed working area at least 7m long and 3.2m wide.

A plate brake tester must be installed so that:

  • it is located in a substantially level test area which (including the approach and run-off area) is at least 3.6m wide.
  • it is situated with at least 2.0m clear space, on the side of the measuring plate, from the PBT centre line
  • doorways positioned within the 4.5m approach to the plate brake tester must be at least 3.6m in width (to enable vehicles to be off-set to test the single wheeled axle)

The brake testing facility must be able to cater with either a single front or rear wheel configuration.

Emissions testing

Emissions testing is not required for Class 3 testing.

Dual class premises (Class 3 and 4)

Premises and equipment considered suitable for Class 4 testing will also be accepted for Class 3, and 3-wheeled Class 4 testing if the underside inspection facility has a suitable method of supporting the ‘single wheel’ of any three wheeled vehicle on a firm surface and on a turning plate. A single wheel support must cater for single front or rear wheel configuration and there must be acceptable arrangements for testing headlamp aim, if applicable, for both wheel layouts.

It will also need suitable jacking arrangements. If the jacking equipment is unsuitable for raising a 3 wheeler single wheel there must be suitable additional equipment of 500kg capacity.

5. Class 5 vehicles

Installation and equipment requirements

November 2009

DVSA, on behalf of the Secretary of State, appoints authorised examiners and designated councils to carry out inspections known generally as MOT tests. The following section sets out the additional requirements that must be met for testing Class 5 vehicles.

The dimensions in this section are the minimum requirements for authorisation as a vehicle test station for class 5 vehicles.

The dimensions of your test bay should take into account the requirements of your business.

When considering the contents of this document you should be aware that the equipment and/or layout selected may affect the type of vehicle able to be tested.

Applicants are advised not to proceed with alterations to buildings or purchase of equipment, etc, before receiving written approval in principle from DVSA.

Requirements for Class 5 testing

There are three categories for Class 5 testing:

  • category 1- all single deck vehicles.
  • category 2 - double deck vehicles.
  • category 3 - articulated vehicles.

Class 5 lightweight vehicle only premises have the same requirements as for Class 7.

Normally, only a drive through layout will be accepted where approval is sought to test articulated vehicles.

Premises, test bay and equipment layout

Premises, test bays and equipment will be considered suitable if they meet the requirements laid out in Requirements for Authorisation for Vehicle Testing Station (Common to all Classes).

Premises must have a facility to prevent the build-up of exhaust fumes, either by means of ventilation or by exhaust extraction equipment for connection to the exhaust pipes of vehicles.

Test bay

To test double deck vehicles, a testing station needs a test bay with:

  • vehicle entrances and exits at least 4.6m high and 4.2m wide
  • a width of at least 4.5m
  • headroom of at least 5.0m (except over a lift)
  • headroom over a lift of at least 6.3m, measured from the platform surfaces when fully lowered, extending over an area of at least 1.5m on each side of the lift longitudinal centre and at least 6.5m fore and aft of the lift transverse centre line.

To test single deck vehicles, a testing station needs a test bay with:

  • vehicle entrances and exits 3.7m high and 4.2m wide
  • a width of at least 4.5m
  • headroom of at least 4.0m (except over a lift)
  • headroom over a lift of at least 5.3m, measured from the platform surfaces when fully lowered, extending over an area of at least 1.5m on each side of the lift longitudinal centre and at least 6.5m fore and aft of the lift transverse centre line.

Underside inspection

The designated means of inspecting the underside of vehicles will be considered suitable if either a lift or a pit meeting the following is provided.

Lift

If a wheel supporting platform lift is provided, it must have:

  • platforms without upstands or guard rails at least 7.0m long - the platform length does not include access ramps.
  • rolled edges or vertical rails for jacking equipment must not be more than 25mm higher than the platform
  • platform surfaces capable of being raised at least 1.45m from the floor. Measured from the floor on which the lift is mounted
  • a 2.88m width between posts
  • platforms with a minimum width of 650mm -a minimum width of 2.55m between the outer edges of the platforms
  • a minimum width of 800mm between the inner edges of platform
  • a safe working load (SWL) of at least 12 tonnes; the SWL to be clearly marked on the lift
  • jacking equipment preferably power operated, on a trolley platform able to move an appropriate distance along the pit - having a minimum SWL of 6.0 tonnes, capable of simultaneously raising both front wheels of any vehicle using the recommended test procedures and jacking points - it must also be capable of lifting vehicles fitted with independent suspension
  • at least two chocks, permanent chocks may be fitted at the platform forward ends, if not a ‘drive-through’ installation
  • a satisfactory intercom system between the examiner and the assistant. Means of communication will be considered on their merits

You must have confirmation in writing by the lift installer that the installation of the lift complies with BS 7980:2024. A current LOLER thorough examination certificate. Vehicle lifts should be CE and or UKCA marked. Any modifications to existing vehicle lifts should conform to BS 7980:2024 and BS EN 1493:2022 regarding safety distances for toe protection.

If a scissor lift is used, the scissors must be located underneath the platforms, allowing unobstructed access between them.

Wheel play detectors may be installed on each side of the lift at the point where the jack will be used and if installed must be controlled by a “wandering” hand control at this point so that the tester may remain close by a wheel when the wheel play detector is operated to inspect for wear.

Pit

If a pit is provided, it must have:

  • an uninterrupted working length of at least 13.0m (may be reduced to a minimum of 10m if two cross tunnels, one at either end are provided)
  • a width of at least 800mm and not more than 1.3m, over the working length
  • a depth of at least 1.4m and not more than 1.8m, over the working length. Staging may be used to meet this requirement
  • the capacity to accommodate the weight of all vehicles that fall into the category to be tested
  • been sealed to prevent the ingress of water
  • jacking equipment preferably power operated, on a trolley platform able to move an appropriate distance along the pit - having a minimum SWL of 6.0 tonnes, capable of simultaneously raising both front wheels of any vehicle using the recommended test procedures and jacking points - it must also be capable of lifting vehicles fitted with independent suspension
  • adequate access for personnel which does not intrude on the working dimensions, there must be at least one method of easy access either by a staircase at one end of the pit or by a cross tunnel, and adequate escape facilities either at the other end of the pit or along its length
  • a satisfactory ‘intercom’ system between the examiner and the assistant - means of communication will be considered on their merits

Any upstands/guard rails if fitted, to be no higher than 25mm.

Wheel play detectors may be installed on each side of the pit at the point where the jack will be used and if installed must be controlled by a “wandering” hand control at this point so the tester may remain close by a wheel when the wheel play detector is operated to inspect for wear.

Headlamp aim testing

A headlamp aim testing facility will be considered suitable if it has a rail mounted headlamp tester on DVSA’s latest list of acceptable equipment.

Headlamp tester installation

A headlamp tester installation must have a designated vehicle standing area which is certified as flat and level to within ± 6mm in any 3.0m and is either, a clearly marked area of floor 11.0m long by 3.0m wide, which may straddle a pit, or roller brake tester, or is the lift platforms.

It must have rails mounted and certified as parallel to within ± 2mm of the standing area plane.

The certificate for the above must show height measurement from a level plane at all intersecting points on a 500 mm (max) square grid covering the standing area and at points 300mm (max) apart on the rails. It must be signed by a competent person, such as a surveyor, manufacturer’s representative or agent and include date, status, address of firm and VTS address. A copy must be provided to DVSA for placing on the garage file.

If the roller brake tester encroaches on the standing area, then the standing area levels must include the cover plates and meet the +/- 6 mm requirements.

If the lift platforms form part of the standing area then steel plates must be fitted under automatic chocks. If the lift is also used as the designated standing area for headlamp testing, the platforms must rest on fixed stops when lowered.

Equipment must be correctly aligned to the standing area and positioned to take account of the vertical and horizontal location of headlamps tested.

There must be 1.0m (600mm for 2005 specification equipment) clearance at the rear of the tester optical head. Floor mounted equipment such as brake testers must not be installed in this area

The standing area must be durably and clearly marked with a datum line (or lines) at the headlamp tester manufactures operational tolerance limits for positioning the vehicle headlamp in relation to the headlamp tester.

Any other test equipment within the standing area must be arranged so that it does not interfere with the proper testing of headlamps.

Additionally, in all installations, it is recommended that the rails are sunk into the ground to avoid any excess wear and tear on them. Where vehicles are driven over them the rails must be recessed or suitably protected.

There must be suitable arrangements for checking the alignment of the equipment with the standing area. Arrangements for checking alignment may consists of evidence provided either by a competent outside agency or by the VTS using the manufacturer’s acceptable equipment. Provision must be made for checks to be carried out at no more than 6 monthly intervals and for records to be kept. It is acceptable if an alignment check is within the 6th calendar month in which the alignment was last checked

Brake testing

Brake testing equipment will be considered suitable if the testing station has:

  • a calibrated decelerometer on DVSA’s latest list of acceptable equipment
  • a calibrated roller brake tester on DVSA’s latest list of acceptable equipment
  • roller brake tester user/operator instructions
  • suitable data on ABS warning systems
  • a means of determining brake efficiency and imbalance from the roller brake tester readings
  • suitable arrangements for re-calibration of the decelerometer, and the roller brake tester

A roller brake tester (RBT) must be installed so that:

  • it is centrally located in an unobstructed, substantially level area, at least 22.0m long and 4.0m wide
  • 11.0m standing area to the rear of the RBT may extend outside a building provided the ground is substantially level is constructed of acceptable material and the roller brake tester bed plate is installed not less than 1.5 m from an entrance or exit. Where part of the roller brake test vehicle standing area is located outside of the building, the standing area must not encroach any public thoroughfare
  • vehicles are substantially level while being tested (a gradient of not more than 5%)
  • the console is positioned so that it can easily be read by the tester performing the test on the vehicle
  • an intercom system allowing the tester to communicate with the assistant when any axle is positioned in the brake rollers
  • any part of the roller brake tester is at least 600mm from an inspection pit, lift platform or lift recess (except cross pit rollers)
  • when a cross-pit RBT is installed there must be an isolator that prevents operation of the RBT when a person is in the pit -it must be positioned so other equipment will not interfere with brake testing
  • there must be four chocks available for use in the roller brake test area

The RBT may be installed outside the building. The rollers should have a canopy to protect them from the rain and the console should be mounted in a suitable position protected from the weather and excessive exhaust fumes. The brake tester should be situated adjacent to the test bay with a viewing facility.

Emissions testing

All class 5 testing stations must have the following emissions testing equipment:

Spark ignition engine emissions

Exhaust gas analysis equipment will be considered suitable for all spark ignition engine vehicles if the following is provided:

  • a calibrated exhaust gas analyser on DVSA’s latest list of acceptable equipment
  • gas analyser user/operator instructions
  • confirmation that the analyser contains the current up to date database

Diesel engine emissions

Diesel smoke test equipment will be considered suitable if the following is provided:

  • a calibrated diesel smoke meter on DVSA’s latest list of acceptable equipment
  • smoke meter user/operator instructions

Connected equipment

Some types of MOT equipment are enabled to transfer test results from the test equipment to the MOT Testing service (MTS).

The equipment types this applies to are:

Equipment type Mandatory from Classes
Roller brake testers 1 October 2019 4, 5, 7
Decelerometers 1 February 2020 4, 5, 7
Exhaust gas analysers 1 May 2021 4, 5, 7
Diesel smoke meters 1 May 2021 4, 5, 7

Who needs connected equipment

Connected equipment is required to be fitted and used by a garage where approval is sought:

  • for a garage that hasn’t previously conducted MOT tests (new)
  • for a currently testing VTS that is undergoing a change of ownership (where the site is transferred to a different AE)
  • at a garage that has previously been a MOT test station but has ceased to test (regardless of how long ago it tested)

It will also be required if a VTS is:

  • making a voluntary upgrade of a piece of equipment listed in the table in a VTS
  • adding an additional test lane including a piece of equipment listed in the table
  • replacing broken equipment listed in the table

Where either an Exhaust Gas Analyser or a Diesel Smoke Meter that a part of a combined unit is replaced by the same make and model this is classed as a repair to the combination unit.

How to connect equipment to the MOT service

A software code (a key) is required to connect the equipment to the MOT testing service. The key can be requested by the AEDM, AE delegate or site manager via the MOT testing service using the ‘Request a key’ link.

The key should be kept securely and given to the installation engineer who will connect the equipment to the MOT testing service.

A check must be made on the first test after the equipment is installed that the results have been sent through to the MOT testing service.

Contact the equipment supplier immediately if results are not sent through.

6. Class 7 vehicles

Installation and equipment requirements

DVSA, on behalf of the Secretary of State, appoints authorised examiners and designated councils to carry out inspections known generally as MOT tests. The following section sets out the additional requirements that must be met for testing Class 7 vehicles.

The dimensions in this section are the minimum requirements for authorisation as a vehicle test station for class 7 vehicles.

The dimensions of your test bay should take into account the requirements of your business.

When considering the contents of this document you should be aware that the equipment and/or layout selected may affect the type of vehicle able to be tested.

Applicants are advised not to proceed with alterations to buildings or purchase of equipment, before receiving written approval in principle from DVSA.

Premises, test bay and equipment layout

The test bay and layout dimensions stated are the minimum requirements measured from the inside of walls and doors, as appropriate. If there is a capability to test longer wheel based vehicles, more than 4.2m wheelbase, and the headlamp standing area is at the minimum requirements then the headlamp standing area dimensions will take precedence and a 4.2m wheelbase would be the longest which could be tested. If a longer dimension is required then all other dimensions must be proportional to this.

Premises, test bays and equipment will be considered suitable if they meet the requirements laid out in Requirements for Authorisation for Vehicle Testing Station (Common to all Classes). Class 5 lightweight requirements are as Class 7 conditions of appointment.

Test bay

The testing station must have a test bay with:

  • vehicle entrances and exits at least 3.2m high by 3.0m wide. If part of the brake test standing area the door must be at least 3.5m wide (for Plate brake testers see brake testing section below)
  • a width of at least 4.2m
  • headroom of at least 3.2m (except over a lift)

It must have headroom over a lift of at least 4.8m measured from the platform surfaces when fully lowered which extends:

  • 500mm further than the outer edges of the lift platforms
  • 500mm to the front of the non drive on end of the lift platforms
  • 1m to the rear of the drive on end of the lift platforms

Underside inspection

The designated means of inspecting the underside of vehicles will be considered suitable if either a lift or a pit meeting the following is provided:

Lift

If a wheel supporting platform lift is provided, it must have:

  • platforms without upstands or guard rails, at least 4.8m long - the platform length does not include access ramps
  • rolled edges or vertical rails for jacking equipment must not be more than 25mm higher than the platform
  • platform surfaces capable of being raised at least 1.4m from the floor. (measured from the floor on which the tester stands)
  • adjustable platforms which allow the class of vehicle to be tested - a minimum of at least 760mm between the inner edges of the platforms and at least 2.1m between the outer edges
  • a safe working load (SWL) of at least 3.5 tonnes clearly marked on the lift
  • jacking equipment clearly marked with a minimum SWL of 2.6 tonnes, capable of simultaneously raising both front or both rear wheels - duplicated jacking equipment is acceptable
  • heavy duty captive bearing based turning plates, positively secured to the platforms, which permit the steered wheels to be turned freely from lock to lock - the turning plates must move laterally across the full platform width - when installed there must be a minimum distance of 4.2m from the centre of the turning plates to the drive on end of lift platforms
  • chocks that operate automatically when the lift is raised - the 4.2m dimension for turning plates must not interfere with operation of the chocks - on non-drive through layouts permanent chocks may be fitted to the non drive on end

You must have confirmation in writing by the lift installer that the installation of the lift complies with BS 7980:2024, a current LOLER thorough examination certificate. Vehicle lifts should be CE and or UKCA marked. Any modifications to existing vehicle lifts should conform toBS 7980:2024 and BS EN 1493:2022 regarding safety distances for toe protection.

If it has an automated test lane (ATL) or one person test lane (OPTL) it needs:

  • wheel play detectors from the DVSA list of acceptable equipment, securely fixed to the lift
  • at least 4.2m from the drive on end of the lift platforms to the centre line of the wheel play detectors - the 4.2m dimension for wheel play detectors must not interfere with operation of the chocks
  • written declaration from the hoist manufacturer (not installer) that the hoist is suitable to be fitted with wheel play detectors

If a scissor lift is used, the scissors must be located underneath the platforms, allowing unobstructed access between them.

Pit

If a pit is provided, it must have:

  • an uninterrupted working length of at least 6.0m
  • a minimum width of 760mm and not more than 1.3m over the working length measured across both pit walls
  • a depth of at least 1.4m and not more than 1.8m, over the working length. Staging may be used to meet this requirement
  • adequate access for personnel which does not intrude on the working dimensions. Access steps may encroach on the required dimensions to an entrance/exit door or wall provided there is a minimum clearance width of not less than 600mm
  • been sealed to prevent the ingress of water
  • jacking equipment as required for a lift. Rolled edges and vertical rails for jacking equipment must not exceed 25mm height
  • suitable captive bearing based turning plates, positively secured to the floor which permit the steered wheels to be turned freely from lock to lock

If it is an ATL or OPTL, it must have combined steering and wheel play detectors on DVSA’s list of acceptable equipment. No part of the installation should be within 1.5m of the pit working length drive on end.

The location of turning plates, steering and wheel play detectors must be that the tester has adequate space to safely observe the items required to be observed when stood in the pit.

Headlamp aim testing

A headlamp aim testing facility will be considered suitable if it has a calibrated rail mounted headlamp tester on DVSA’s latest list of acceptable equipment.

Headlamp tester installation

A headlamp tester installation must have a designated vehicle standing area which is certified as flat and level to within +/- 6mm in any 3m and is a clearly outlined area of floor of 4.5m long measured from the datum line by 2.5m wide. This may:

  • be the lift platforms (lift platforms must rest on positive stops when lowered
  • straddle a pit or roller brake tester.
  • be the plates of a plate brake tester.

Additional equipment fitted in the standing area must comply with the +/-6mm level requirement.

Rails must be certified as level to within +/- 2mm and parallel to the standing area. The rails must be straight, and the headlamp tester must not have significant rock or twist at any point along the rails.

The certificate for above must show height measurement from a level plane at all intersecting points on a 300 mm (max) square grid covering the standing area and at points 300mm (max) apart on the rails. It must be signed by a competent person, such as a surveyor, manufacturer’s representative or agent and include date, status, address of firm and VTS address. A copy must be provided to DVSA for the garage file.

There must be 600mm clearance behind the headlamp aim tester optical head. Floor mounted equipment must not be installed in this area

The standing area must be durably and clearly marked with a datum line (or lines) at the headlamp tester manufactures operational tolerance limits for positioning the vehicle headlamp in relation to the headlamp tester.

Headlamp aim equipment operating instructions must be available.

Brake testing

Brake testing equipment will be considered suitable if the following are provided:

  • a calibrated decelerometer on DVSA’s latest list of acceptable equipment and
  • a calibrated roller brake tester or a calibrated plate brake tester that is on DVSA’s latest list of acceptable equipment. If an ATL lane, it must be approved for ATL use on DVSA’s latest list of acceptable equipment
  • roller/plate brake tester user/operator instructions

Roller brake tester

A roller brake tester (RBT) must be installed so that it is centrally located in an unobstructed working area at least 14m long and at least 3.5m wide.

At least 4.2m to the front and rear of the RBT centre line should be substantially level (which in good building practice is within +/- 12mm of a level plane). The remainder of the area must not exceed a 10% slope (100mm in a 1m).

Part of the brake testing standing area can be outside the building, providing the RBT centre line is at least 1.5m inside the building in the case of a ‘drive-through’ layout where the roller brake tester is fitted after the lift or pit there shall be a clear distance of at least 4.2m between them. Lead-off ramps from floor mounted lifts shall not encroach on this area.

Where part of the roller brake test vehicle standing area is located outside of the building, the standing area must not encroach any public thoroughfare.

It must be installed so that:

  • any part of a roller brake tester is at least 600mm from an inspection pit, lift platform or lift recess
  • it is in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions
  • the console is positioned to be easily read by the tester performing the test
  • when a cross-pit RBT is installed, there must be an isolator that prevents operation of the RBT when a person is in the pit - it must be positioned so other equipment will not interfere with brake testing. i.e. turning plates

Plate brake tester

A plate brake tester must be installed so that:

  • it is certified as installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions
  • the plates are centrally located in a substantially level test area which (including approach and run-off area) is at least 3.6m wide
  • doorways positioned within the 7m approach area must be at least 3.6m wide
  • where the plate surface is not flush with the surrounding floor, lead on and off ramps must be located at least 600mm from any doorway
  • a clear run off distance of 4m shall be provided after the plate brake tester working surface (this must not include any part of the lift platforms)
  • in the case of a ‘drive-through’ layout where the plate tester is fitted after the lift or pit there shall be a clear distance of 7m between them - lead off ramps from floor mounted equipment shall not encroach on this area
  • the console is positioned so that it can easily be read whilst performing the test

A clear area of 7.0m shall be provided in advance of the plate brake tester. This area must be substantially level and any gradient must not exceed 5% (50mm in 1m) nor have any other equipment positioned within it. All or part of the 7.0m can be outside the building. Where it is perceived that there may be a safety risk, barriers and/or warning signs may be required along the approach area and/or the run-off area.

Emissions testing

All class 7 testing stations must have the following emissions testing equipment:

Spark ignition engine emissions

Exhaust gas analysis equipment will be considered suitable for all spark ignition engine vehicles if the following is provided:

  • a calibrated exhaust gas analyser on DVSA’s latest list of acceptable equipment
  • gas analyser user/operator instructions
  • confirmation that the analyser contains the current up to date database

Diesel engine emissions

Diesel smoke test equipment will be considered suitable if the following is provided

  • a calibrated diesel smoke meter on DVSA’s latest list of acceptable equipment
  • smoke meter user/operator instructions

Connected equipment

Some types of MOT equipment are enabled to transfer test results from the test equipment to the MOT testing service (MTS).

The equipment types this applies to are:

Equipment type Mandatory from Classes
Roller brake testers 1 October 2019 4, 5, 7
Decelerometers 1 February 2020 4, 5, 7
Exhaust gas analysers 1 May 2021 4, 5, 7
Diesel smoke meters 1 May 2021 4, 5, 7

Who needs connected equipment

Connected equipment is required to be fitted and used by a garage where approval is sought:

  • for a garage that hasn’t previously conducted MOT tests (new)
  • for a currently testing VTS that is undergoing a change of ownership (where the site is transferred to a different AE)
  • at a garage that has previously been a MOT test station but has ceased to test (regardless of how long ago it tested)

It will also be required if a VTS is:

  • making a voluntary upgrade of a piece of equipment listed in the table in a VTS
  • adding an additional test lane including a piece of equipment listed in the table
  • replacing broken equipment listed in the table

Where either an Exhaust Gas Analyser or a Diesel Smoke Meter that a part of a combined unit is replaced by the same make and model this is classed as a repair to the combination unit.

How to connect equipment to the MOT service

A software code (a key) is required to connect the equipment to the MOT testing service. The key can be requested by the AEDM, AE delegate or site manager via the MOT testing service using the ‘Request a key’ link.

The key should be kept securely and given to the installation engineer who will connect the equipment to the MOT testing service.

A check must be made on the first test after the equipment is installed that the results have been sent through to the MOT testing service.

Contact the equipment supplier immediately if results are not sent through.

Section E
Tester
Who is eligible to become a tester, when applications might be refused, training and keeping up to date.

1. General

Testers are those persons appointed by authorised examiners (AEs) and approved by DVSA to carry out MOT tests to the correct standards, register tests on to the MOT testing service prior to starting a test and confirm test results when completed. The tester must personally make all the decisions regarding testable items. Similarly, inspectors employed by designated councils (DCs) will be treated in the same way as testers employed by AEs.

Before prospective testers and those returning to testing are permitted to carry out tests they must:

A tester may be assigned to more than one vehicle testing station (VTS). Where a tester is assigned to other VTSs testers must ensure that the correct test location is selected on MOT testing service prior to starting a test.

A tester may commence testing following the authorised examiner designated manager (AEDM) or site manager (SM) of that VTS assigning them the tester role at that VTS via the MOT testing service. Even if the tester is still testing at another VTS, it is the AE’s responsibility to ensure that all testers on their list of testers remain fully competent. This includes ensuring testers:

  • have completed their annual tester training and assessment and successfully completed their annual assessments
  • are fully familiar with the equipment at the particular VTS and are up to date with any changes - AEs cannot assume that a previous AE has done this

The AE of each VTS is responsible for any breach of the standards for tests at their own VTS, regardless of the contractual arrangements with their testers.

If a tester ceases to be actively involved in MOT testing (whether due to a change of duties, employment or location or for any other reason) the appropriate person must update the MOT testing service. In addition the AEDM must immediately inform DVSA in writing or by email that a tester has died, in order to prevent any further correspondence and/or reminders being issued to that tester.

An individual shall cease to be a tester, where they become a patient within the meaning of Part VIII of the Mental Health Act 1983 or, in Scotland, becomes incapable of managing their own affairs

An individual shall cease to be a tester at a particular VTS, where the relevant AE revokes the appointment of that tester. The AE can revoke the appointment of a tester at any time. In the case of a multi-site AE, this may be from all sites, a selection of sites, or a single site.

Using the MOT testing service a tester may remove their name from the list of testers at a VTS, this can also be done by the AEDM or SM. In exceptional circumstances the tester may request in writing or via email if preferred that DVSA remove their name.

Testers must notify DVSA and their associated AE immediately, in writing or by email, of any conviction, as defined in Appendix 7: Convictions and repute.

If a tester receives a 2 or 5 year disciplinary cessation, they will not be able to hold any role within an Authorised Examiner and/or Vehicle Testing Station during the cessation period.

Testers must ensure that personal details recorded within their MOT testing service user profile are correct and kept up to date. Any changes to their details can be made by the tester via the service or in exceptional circumstances by contacting the DVSA Customer Service Centre.

The tester’s profile must also include a unique current email address. This will be used for:

  • essential correspondence
  • MOT testing service sign in authentication
  • forgotten password
  • account reclaim

Contact DVSA

DVSA Customer Service Centre
enquiries@dvsa.gov.uk
Telephone: 0300 123 9000
Monday to Friday, 8am to 5pm
Find out about call charges

2. Eligibility for becoming a tester

Before attending an MOT testers course an applicant needs to be sure that they meet the DVSA requirement. They will need to:

From 1 April 2022, you must provide a basic Disclosure and Barring (DBS) certificate. The basic DBS check must be dated within 3 months of your DVSA demonstration test. A basic DBS check verifies an applicant’s identity based on the evidence provided and can confirm they are free from any unspent convictions. Find out more about applying for a basic DBS check.

In addition, anyone wishing to become a tester for vehicles of classes 3, 4, 5 or 7 must either possess an acceptable vocational educational qualification or acceptable accreditation.

Further details on acceptable qualifications are given in Appendix 5: Tester qualifications and Appendix 6: Tester training and demonstration tests and on GOV.UK

Intention to refuse the authorisation of a tester

If DVSA intends to refuse the authorisation because the candidate repeatedly fails to pass the initial practical demonstration test or does not meet the criteria set out in Ongoing requirements they will write to the applicant explaining the intention to refuse. The intention to refuse may be sent to the applicant at any stage during the authorisation process when it becomes apparent that the applicant does not or is unlikely in the foreseeable future to meet the criteria.

The candidate may appeal against this intention. Any appeal must be made in writing to the DVSA office who issued the intent to refuse to authorise and be received within 14 days from the date of the notification of the intention. An informal hearing may be requested in accordance with the Informal Hearing Notes for Guidance and Code of Practice issued with the notice.

If at the end of this appeal period no such appeal has been received DVSA will write to the candidate confirming the refusal to approve.

Disqualification of testers from driving

A tester is not automatically subject to cessation from MOT testing on loss of a driving licence. A disqualified tester must not carry out road tests where these are necessary. This requirement can pose major problems for motorcycle VTSs where a road test may be necessary for a number of reasons but is less troublesome for other classes where a road test is only normally necessary if a decelerometer brake test is needed. A tester without a valid driving licence should not start an MOT test if a road test is likely to be needed.

If however, that need becomes apparent during a test, the test must be aborted and repeated in full by a tester with a valid driving licence. Should the VTS be unable to provide a suitable tester at the time, it must refund any test fee paid or, if the customer agrees, make an alternative appointment when a suitable tester will be available.

Restricted driving licences for tester

A tester without a valid driving licence category, for the class of vehicle to be tested, should not start the MOT test if a road test is likely to be needed.

However, if that need becomes apparent during a test, the test must be aborted and repeated in full by a tester with an appropriate driving licence. Should the VTS be unable to provide a suitable tester at the time of test, it must refund any test fee paid or, if the customer agrees, make an alternative appointment when a suitable tester will be available

Non UK licences

Current UK law states that:

You can drive in Great Britain (GB) on your full, valid EC/EEA driving licence until you are 70, or for three years after becoming a GB resident, whichever is the longer period. Alternatively, you may apply to exchange your licence for a UK equivalent.

In order to continue driving after these periods a British licence must be obtained.

If your driving licence has been previously exchanged from a non-EC/EEA country, you can drive for up to 12 months from the time you first became resident. You may be able to exchange your licence for a British one.

Further information about driving in GB on a non-UK driving licence can be found on GOV.UK

In the case of a tester or prospective tester who holds only a non UK licence this will be treated as equivalent to a UK licence if evidence is produced to show that the person has been a UK resident for less than 12 months. If the non-UK licence is neither to the European Communities model nor in English, it must be accompanied by a certified translation. An International Driving Permit issued on the basis of a non-UK licence will be treated similarly, if produced along with the national licence on which its issue was based and a certified translation if required.

3. Ongoing requirements

In addition to meeting the criteria given in Eligibility for becoming a tester, those seeking to become testers must successfully:

  • complete a Level 2 Award in MOT testing - this explains the processes of MOT testing and reinforces the standards set out in the relevant inspection manuals
  • pass a demonstration test invigilated by a DVSA vehicle examiner

Testers must keep up to date with current practices and standards by:

  • studying all relevant special notices (and acknowledge on MTS when required), the MOT testing guide, the Matters of Testing blog, emailed messages from DVSA and appropriate inspection manuals and their amendments

  • successfully completing annual training and assessment as stipulated by DVSA

  • training on the use of any new or modified equipment installed at their VTS

  • studying or training on the significance and correct functioning of any new features that are introduced on vehicle types that they are likely to be asked to test

Testers will be required to carry out demonstration tests when requested by DVSA vehicle examiners.

Testers will be required to undertake additional training or carry out demonstration tests before being allowed to test vehicles in classes that they have not previously been testing.

Testers should access their test quality information reports via the MOT testing service, to compare their personal performance with the national averages. Testers should note that there may be valid reasons as to why their own personal performance may differ from the national average, for example average age of vehicle tested. Comparison where a difference is found should lead the tester to question why the difference exists.

4. Impersonating a tester

Any test carried out by a person impersonating an approved tester will be regarded as having been carried out by an unauthorised person. Disciplinary action may therefore be taken against the AE and approved tester concerned. In addition, the unauthorised person may be refused tester status, or refused re-approval as a tester for a period of two years after the offence or after the end of any current period of cessation.

Section F
Driver and Vehicle Standards Agency
The role of the Driving and Vehicle Standards Agency (DVSA), how to make a complaint about DVSA.

1. DVSA role

DVSA administers the MOT service on behalf of the Secretary of State. This role includes:

  • documenting test methods and standards
  • documenting the standards of facilities, equipment, repute, experience, competence, qualifications and administration necessary for those carrying out MOT testing
  • authorising those who meet the necessary standards to carry out MOT testing
  • ensuring the provision of training in test methods and administration to those who will be involved in the operation of the MOT service, standards are agreed with the department. This provision is delivered through third party training providers approved by participating awarding organisations that meet DVSA requirements
  • updating and maintaining access to digital MOT test records and test related documentation
  • monitoring the performance of those carrying out MOT testing and recommend, retraining and/or disciplining where standards are not maintained
  • conducting statutory appeals against test failures
  • investigating complaints about testing standards and resolving disputes

2. Complaints regarding DVSA

All complaints regarding DVSA should be directed in the first instance to the corporate office at DVSAs headquarters.

Find out how to make a complaint.

Section G
Vehicle presenters
How to appeal against a decision to refuse to pass a test, and how to complain against the decision to pass a test.

1. Statutory appeal against the refusal to pass a test

An owner or presenter of a vehicle has the right to appeal against a decision to refuse to pass a test following an MOT examination.

Any complainant must be given a notice of appeal form (VT17) and told to post or email the completed form to the DVSA customer service centre to arrive as soon as possible but no later than 14 working days after the date of the test.

The complainant must also be told they may have to pay the full amount of the test fee applicable to the class of vehicle and not to undertake any repairs or adjustments to the vehicle until it has been examined by a DVSA examiner. DVSA will contact the complainant to discuss the complaint and may arrange for the vehicle to be re-examined.

Find out more about how to appeal an MOT test result.

Details can also be found on the MOT test and appeals poster (VT9A) which must be displayed on the MOT notice board in every vehicle testing station (VTS).

Contact DVSA

DVSA Customer Service Centre
enquiries@dvsa.gov.uk
Telephone: 0300 123 9000
Monday to Friday, 8am to 5pm
Find out about call charges

DVSA
The Ellipse
Padley Road
Swansea
SA1 8AN

2. Complaint against the decision to pass a test

An owner or presenter of a vehicle has the right to complain against the decision to pass a test following an MOT examination.

Any complainant must be given a notice of appeal form (VT17) and told to post or email the completed form to the DVSA Customer Service Centre. DVSA will contact the complainant to discuss the complaint and may arrange for the vehicle to be re-examined if the alleged defects appear to call into question the test result providing there is a reasonable chance of assessing what the vehicle’s condition had been at the time of test.

It is not possible to make a blanket ruling on how long after the test such an assessment can be made.

It is, however, unlikely that mechanical defects can be assessed for complaints made more than 28 days after test or that corrosion defects can be assessed for complaints made more than 3 months after test.

Any repairs made to the vehicle also make such an assessment less likely to be relevant.

Find out more about how to appeal an MOT test result.

Details can also be found on the MOT test and appeals poster (VT9A) which must be displayed on the MOT notice board in every VTS.

Section H
Documentation
Inspection manuals and the MOT testing guide, special notices, leaflets and customer information, forms, test certificates, how to get a replacement test document, how documentation should be retained.

1. Inspection manuals and MOT testing guide

The definitive versions of the MOT testing guide and inspection manuals are available to be viewed on the MOT testing service and on GOV.UK. A special notice (SN) will advise you when amendments to the electronic versions are published.

Vehicle testing stations (VTSs) do not have to retain paper copies and DVSA no longer support hard copy updates for these publications. Where a customer requests further information they should be shown via the MOT testing service or directed to the online version.

2. Special notices

SNs are issued periodically by DVSA to inform those involved with MOT testing about changes to the service and to highlight areas of concern. Authorised examiners (AEs) must ensure that all testing staff always have ready access to all current, relevant SNs and that all current testers have read and acknowledged them.

The SN is sent to all service users via the MOT testing service and you can also view MOT manuals and special notices: detailed information.

3. Leaflets and customer information

Customer information and leaflets are available in electronic format and may be viewed online and printed. There is no requirement for AEs to stock or distribute this information.

The current information available is:

4. Forms

The official forms used in connection with the MOT service are listed below, together with notes on their use. These forms must only be used for MOT purposes and in accordance with this guide.

VT01 - Application for MOT authorisation or a variation to MOT authorisation

The form must be completed in accordance with the relevant guidance notes. See Section B1. Application and authorisation.

Any false statement may put at risk the application or any authorisation resulting from it.

When a change is made which requires the submission of a VT01, you can download the form or request a form from the DVSA customer service centre.

Contact DVSA

DVSA Customer Service Centre
enquiries@dvsa.gov.uk
Telephone: 0300 123 9000
Monday to Friday, 8am to 5pm
Find out about call charges

DVSA
The Ellipse
Padley Road
Swansea
SA1 8AN

VT9 - Authorisation of an examiner

DVSA issues this certificate when an AE is authorised. It specifies the classes of vehicle that the AE can test and the approved premises. It must be displayed on the designated MOT notice board at that VTS. You can apply for a replacement VT9 certificate online if you have lost or damaged the original.

VT9A - Vehicle testing classes, fees and appeals poster

This poster outlines the:

  • test classes
  • test fees
  • retest procedures
  • appeals procedure
  • DVSA customer service centre details

It must be publicly displayed in the VTS on the designated MOT notice board or adjacent if it will not fit.

Download the MOT test fees and appeals poster.

VT17 - Notice of appeal

This form is used by anyone who wishes to appeal against the result of a test. It must be made available to the customer upon request and is available on GOV.UK.

It covers the decision to either pass or fail a vehicle. It must be completed and sent by the appellant to DVSA customer service centre.

An appeal against the decision to fail a vehicle must be sent to DVSA customer service centre not more than 14 working days from the date the failure was recorded.

An appeal against the decision to pass a vehicle should be made within 28 calendar days of test for mechanical defects and 3 months of test for corrosion related defects.

VT20 - Test certificate

When required, this must be printed via the MOT testing service except when operating in contingency testing (CT), where test documents will be handwritten.

For information on contingency test certificate (CT20) see N. MOT contingency testing procedures.

Production or completion of the VT20 test certificate

A test record is created on the MOT testing service database, on completion of the test when the tester is satisfied that all the test requirements have been met.

A test certificate must be printed and issued if:

  • The customer requests a copy
  • The vehicle is not registered in the UK
  • The vehicle is imported
  • There is no VIN on the vehicle as presented
  • There is no VRM on the vehicle as presented
  • The test was conducted under contingency and the customer requests a copy from the MOT testing service

A test certificate must be printed via the MOT testing service when requested except when operating in CT. In such instances all test documents must be hand-written. Templates for handwritten forms are available to print from the MOT testing service. Customers may exchange hand-written certificates for printed ones. This can only be done after the result has been entered as part of the CT catch up process. The exchange of a hand-written test certificate for a printed test certificate is free of charge.

Except in the cases of a duplicate, exchange or a replacement certificate, the tester who carried out the test must sign the test certificate, after checking its content.

In the case of a retest for which only a partial re-examination is required or as described in Section B5. Testing responsibilities - Retest, the tester who has carried out the retest examination must confirm on the MOT testing service the test result, pass or fail, after they have re-examined the vehicle to the extent required by Section B5. Testing responsibilities - Retest. They must also sign and check the content of the certificate for accuracy.

Test record corrections

Amendments to test records can only be carried out before the expiry date of the test record.

If an error on a test record is identified, the tester who carried out the test must amend the test record on the MOT testing service after the relevant details have been verified.

However, if the original tester isn’t available another tester may make the change to the record.

A test record can only be amended by the VTS that carried out the test for a change in vehicle colour or a change to the current odometer reading. Changes to an odometer reading can only be completed within 28 calendar days of the test completion, the new reading must be that seen on the day the change is made.

If the VRM of a vehicle is changed after the test has been recorded on the MOT testing service, this cannot be altered by a VTS. The customer should be advised to contact the Driver and Vehicle Licensing Agency (DVLA).

DVSA amends test records and can issue replacement test certificates when the original AE is no longer authorised. DVSA may change:

  • VRM and/or VIN
  • Vehicle colour
  • Vehicle make or model
  • Odometer reading
  • Country where the vehicle is registered
  • The MOT test centre that is stated on the record

If the test result is recorded against an incorrect VRM and/or VIN, you must contact the DVSA customer service centre.

Test records cannot be amended if the VTS is operating under CT.

Find out more information about correcting MOT certificate mistakes.

Replacement test documents

If a test record has been amended, if required, a replacement certificate must be issued free of charge. The original test certificate issued via the MOT Testing Service should be destroyed.

If a substitute tester amends the test record they must sign the replacement certificate on the issuer signature line.

Details of who changed the test record, the VTS number and the date of issue will be printed at the appropriate place on the test certificate.

For replacement CT20 see Section N. MOT contingency testing procedures.

Replacement test documents cannot be issued if the VTS is operating under CT.

Duplication of test documentation

Test details are held on the system so duplicates may be issued by any VTS on payment of the appropriate fee, providing that the customer can demonstrate their right to acquire the duplicate document.

In order to validate that right, the customer must provide either the test number from the original certificate or the unique reference number from the V5C, plus the VRM. If the customer requests the duplicate at the original VTS, they may alternatively present the subject vehicle to satisfy this proof.

Where the request is made at a VTS that didn’t test the vehicle before issuing the certificate the VTS will need to enter onto MOT testing service the 11-digit reference number from that vehicles latest log book (V5C).

DVSA may issue duplicates when the original AE is no longer authorised or when the presenter cannot satisfy their right as specified above. For further information contact the DVSA customer service centre. Details of who issued the duplicate, the VTS number and the date of issue will be printed at the appropriate place on the test document.

Duplicate test documents can be produced by all VTS roles, the producer must add their signature on the issuer signature line.

Vehicle owners can also acquire a duplicate test certificate free of charge online from the check MOT history service.

A duplicate must not be issued by a VTS more than 18 months after the date of the test.

A VTS issuing a duplicate test certificate is entitled to charge a fee for this as specified on the MOT test fees and appeals poster (VT9a).

Duplicate test documents cannot be issued if the VTS is operating under CT (see Section N. MOT contingency testing procedures).

Alterations to VT20

VT20s showing alterations must not be issued.

If the VRM of a vehicle is changed after an MOT test, see Replacement test documentation.

Dangerous defects

If the tester considers a non-testable item to be so defective as to render the vehicle dangerous to drive on the road, the tester must warn the vehicle presenter of the nature of such defects. This must be recorded by selecting the dangerous defects option when entering the results on the system or manually by annotating the certificate when hand completed. Dangerous defects must be clearly explained to the vehicle presenter.

VT29/VT29M – MOT inspection checklist

This form may be used by testers to record information whilst conducting an MOT test. Download a copy of the MOT inspection checklist, it is also available to print on the MOT testing service.

When testing in CT, testers must use this form to record:

  • any failure defects with sufficient detail to allow subsequent data entry
  • any advisory items found

VT30 – Refusal of an MOT test certificate

When required, this must be printed via the MOT testing service except when operating in contingency, then test documents will be handwritten. Templates for handwritten forms are available to print from the MOT testing service.

For information on CT certificates see Section N. MOT contingency testing procedures.

Following test registration, a VT30 must be issued:

  • when a tester refuses to test a vehicle for any of the qualifying reasons set out in Appendix 3: Grounds for refusal and the vehicle presenter requests a ‘refusal to test’ decision in writing
  • when a test has to be abandoned because the tester considers it unsafe to continue or because it has become apparent during the test that certain items cannot be satisfactorily examined
  • when a test is aborted due to a problem with VTS equipment or tester
  • on request when a test is completed and the vehicle has failed to meet the required standards
  • if the tester considers an item on the vehicle, whether testable or not, to be so defective as to render the vehicle dangerous to drive on the road

If the test is abandoned because items cannot be examined

When a test has to be abandoned because the tester considers it unsafe to continue or because it has become apparent during the test that certain items cannot be satisfactorily examined, the tester must:

  • complete as much of the test as possible and include any failure defects found during the partial test
  • give the reason why it was considered that the test could not be completed

If the vehicle fails to meet the required standards

When a test is completed and the vehicle has failed to meet the required standards. the test record must detail the reasons for failure and if required the VT30 must be issued and signed by the tester who carried out the test.

If the vehicle remains at the VTS for repairs that are likely to take more than 1 hour to complete, the test failure must be recorded on the MOT testing service and if required a VT30 must be issued on completion of the test.

If the tester decides to use the pass after rectification at station (PRS) facility (see Section B5. Testing responsibilities), then they must complete the test before repairs are carried out. Once the repairs are complete the tester must register the results on the MOT testing service and if required, issue a VT30 in addition to a VT20.

If the vehicle is dangerous to drive on the road

If the tester considers an item on the vehicle, whether testable or not, to be so defective as to render the vehicle dangerous to drive on the road, the tester must warn the vehicle presenter of the nature of such defects.

Non testable defects must be recorded by entering a manual advisory and selecting the dangerous option.

Dangerous defects must be clearly explained to the vehicle presenter.

VT32 – Advisory notice

An advisory notice is issued to the vehicle presenter advising the outcome of an inspection carried out by a DVSA examiner. It includes the English/Welsh dual language version (VT32W).

Exchange test documentation

Test documentation issued under CT, may be exchanged for printed versions at the original VTS if requested. No charge can be made for this service. If the customer is unable to produce the hand-written documents the procedure for duplicate issue should be followed.

For information on exchange CT certificates see Section N. MOT contingency testing procedures.

Welsh language policy

DVSA has a Welsh language policy for records and documents issued at locations in Wales. It says:

  • MOT test certificates will be generated in both English (VT20) and Welsh (VT20W) - all standard machine printed text will have the Welsh equivalent - the tester can print either or both certificates as required

  • refusal notices will be generated in both English (VT30) and Welsh (VT30W) - all standard machine printed text will have the Welsh equivalent - the tester can print either or both certificates as required

  • advisory notices will be VT32W with all standard machine printed text in both English and Welsh

  • when operating in CT, hand-written entries need only to be in English and the VT30W need not be issued

  • contingency test certificates will be printed in English only

5. Retention of documentation

All documentation copies must be retained in a readily retrievable manner at the issuing VTS for the duration of the retention period. Following this period all documents should be securely destroyed in an environmentally friendly manner.

Retention periods

The number of months that each document must be retained for is explained in the following table.

Document Retention period for normal testing Retention period for contingency testing
VT20 0 N/A
CT20 0 3 months
VT29 (inc M) 0 3 months
VT30 / CT30 0 3 months
Emissions records 3 months 3 months

A month is defined as a calendar month from the date the test result was entered.

Emissions records from all test results, including all BET tests, must include all relevant vehicle details. Digitally stored emissions records are acceptable if the data is readily retrievable upon request.

If emissions records are not available, DVSA could consider that an emission test was not conducted.

Section I
Discipline
What happens when shortcomings are found in MOT testing or operations, why disciplinary action may be taken against authorised examiners and testers, disciplinary points and how they're evaluated, when formal disciplinary action will be taken, making an appeal against cessation of authorisation.

1. Shortcomings in testing and operation

When shortcomings are found either in testing or in the operation of the MOT testing service, DVSA will take action according to the circumstances. For minor shortcomings this will usually consist of advice or counselling, but for more serious cases (or repeated minor shortcomings) formal disciplinary action and prosecution may be considered.

The Secretary of State has absolute discretion to notify persons that they shall cease to be authorised examiners (AE) or testers. These functions are carried out on behalf of the Secretary of State by DVSA.

This section provides guidance for all involved in MOT testing, whether as testers, AEs or DVSA staff, on how this discretion will normally be applied and:

  • explains the procedures normally to be followed when DVSA becomes aware that a tester or AE may not be maintaining the required standards necessary to ensure integrity of the MOT testing service

  • sets out the maximum level of disciplinary action that will normally be applicable so as to ensure procedural consistency

The section is not intended as a set of rules to be rigidly applied. DVSA uses predefined sanctions and a disciplinary points system to gauge the severity of shortcomings, the total number of points is then used as a guide to the appropriate level of disciplinary action. In judging what course to follow in a particular case or series of cases, DVSA will consider all known circumstances and may alter the level of action to reflect the circumstances.

DVSA reserves the right to modify, in light of experience, the points or actions indicated in this section. DVSA will tell you about such modifications in special notices or by amending the pages of this guide.

Where the guide does not cater for a specific shortcoming, points will be allocated in line with those given to shortcomings of similar significance.

DVSA may publish details of vehicle testing stations (VTS) who have been removed from the MOT service following formal disciplinary action. Details will be published after the appeal period has lapsed or the appeal has been determined.

2. Underlying principles - general

Where a vehicle is re-examined after test, any action taken will be based on its likely condition at the time of test, taking into account all known factors that could have changed the condition of the vehicle.

All judgements are based on the balance of probabilities. However, the Secretary of State does have considerable discretion about who may be testers or AEs and, while seeking always to adhere to the principles stated here, reserves the right to exercise that discretion as widely as seems appropriate to the particular circumstances.

In deciding the appropriate course of action to be taken shortcomings that constitute a threat to road safety, having an impact on the environment or likely to affect the integrity of the MOT scheme or DVSA will be treated with the utmost seriousness and carry more weight in the determination of the final outcome.

The outcome of formal disciplinary action may take the form of:

  • no further action
  • an advisory warning letter
  • a temporary suspension notice
  • a formal warning
  • cessation of a tester’s approval or an AE’s authorisation in the form of either short term cessation (for 28 calendar days with conditional return) or cessation (for 2 or 5 years)

When considering the outcome of disciplinary cases, DVSA will also consider if the good repute of an AE (including any individuals who is part of the AE) and a tester has been lost. Where good repute has been lost, any affected individual(s) will be unable to hold any role within the MOT testing service.

Where this occurs, DVSA will notify any authorisations that are affected by this loss of good repute, advising that the individual(s) concerned can no longer be involved in MOT testing operations. For further information about repute, see Appendix 7: Convictions and repute

When a problem is brought to DVSA’s attention, either by a tester who is being pressurised by an AE to test improperly or by an AE who is unhappy with a tester’s performance, this will not normally count against the party reporting it. However, where an AE is unhappy with the testing standards of a tester the AE should consider stopping the tester from testing pending the outcome of any action by DVSA.

Testers must be in a fit condition, both physically and mentally, to carry out testing to the required standard. A tester taking medication should read the instructions for its use and, if in doubt, not continue testing without their doctor’s confirmation that the medication will not affect their ability to test. If a tester is recovering from illness or injury, he/she should test only if confirmed as fully fit to do so. A tester being on medication or recovering from illness will not normally be treated as mitigation for errors in testing.

The effectiveness of a tester who is under severe emotional stress must also be suspect. If the stress is likely to affect the tester’s ability to test, they should not test. Similarly, testers whose judgement may be affected by alcohol or other substances should not test. In either event, these factors will not normally be regarded as mitigation, however, each case will be treated on the merits of the evidence available. AEs should implement reasonable management controls to try to ensure that the testers they use are in a fit condition to test.

3. Underlying principles - testers

In cases involving tester’s judgement or minor procedural omissions or deviations from the testing system a formal warning will usually be issued on the first offence that in DVSA’s opinion justifies formal action.

Where there is one or more instances of more serious procedural omissions or deviations from the testing standards this may lead to a short-term cessation.

Where there are instances of significant procedural omissions, for example major elements of the test missed, significant negligence or significant malpractice, a single instance will usually lead to cessation.

A single serious incident of substandard testing that could have a significant effect on road safety will usually lead to cessation.

Cessation will usually be justified for a single case if the tester is personally involved in an act which could also justify single offence cessation for an AE or where very serious infringements have taken place.

Appendix 8.1. Cessation without previous warning (single offence cessation) indicates the type of case usually considered to be very serious.

Serious infringements that involve fraud may be considered for prosecution.

Cessation will be justified if

A tester who has been required to stop testing because of failure to complete required training or demonstration tests but who continues to take part in testing, other than as an assistant, may have disciplinary action taken against them resulting in cessation.

Where disciplinary action has resulted in the issue of a formal warning or short-term cessation letter this may be taken into consideration should further disciplinary action be contemplated. Such letters generally remain valid for 5 years from their date of issue.

A tester who has been issued with a 2 or 5 year cessation will not be permitted to hold any roles within an AE and/or VTS during the cessation period. Requesting or accepting any MOT roles during this period could result in the loss of their good Repute as defined in Appendix 7: Convictions and repute. It could also affect any future application to re-enter the MOT Scheme following cessation.

4. Underlying principles - authorised examiners

Cessation will be considered where any individual involved in an authorisation:

Except in the case of very serious infringements that DVSA consider to justify single offence cessation action, an AE will normally have been issued with a formal warning and given the opportunity to correct failings, before the subsequent offences under consideration lead to the cessation of authorisation. Appendix 8.1. Cessation without previous warning (single offence cessation) indicates the type of case usually considered to be very serious.

Serious infringements that involve fraud may be considered for prosecution.

Where offences are serious enough to justify consideration for cessation, with the exception of single offence cessation, short term cessation (with or without training) action will normally be considered in the first instance.

Where single offence cessation is considered, DVSA will take care to ensure that the offence justifies such serious action having regard to the risk to road safety or the repute of the MOT testing service.

Normally, the points counted against an AE will be no less than those counted against the tester for the same fault unless there is clear evidence of deceit by the tester and the AE has not been remiss in the application of management controls and quality assurance. Tester shortcomings brought to DVSA’s attention by an AE as a result of management quality checks will not normally be counted against the AE.

Previous disciplinary sanctions can be taken into consideration for 5 years should further disciplinary action be contemplated from the date of issue.

If an AE has received a 2 or 5 year disciplinary cessation of all their sites, none of the associated AEPs will be able to hold any role within another AE and/or VTS during the cessation period. Requesting or accepting any MOT roles during this period could result in the loss of their good repute as defined in Appendix 7: Convictions and repute. It could also affect any future application to re-enter the MOT scheme following cessation.

Multi-site AEs

In considering cases involving AEs who operate at more than 1 site, each site will be treated separately in the first instance. If the repute of the MOT testing service is considered to have suffered through the actions of the AE, DVSA has the right to issue a notice of cessation to the AE regarding all of the AEs’ sites. If a specific site is subject to cessation for disciplinary reasons, then no further sites will be authorised in the same catchment area within the period of cessation. Regardless of whether any individual sites are subject to notices of cessation, DVSA may review the overall effectiveness of that AE’s management system.

If it appears to DVSA that there are problems affecting a significant proportion of sites DVSA may ask for an action plan to be prepared and implemented to improve the group performance. If problems continue, DVSA may consider granting no further authorisations until the record of the remaining parts of the group has improved or, in severe cases issuing notices of cessation to part or all of the group. In considering the overall performance of the group, convictions relating to non-VTS sites within the group may also be taken into consideration

Where an AE has been shown on the balance of probabilities to be culpable of misdemeanours affecting all sites, for example deliberate failure of minor items to encourage trade, and the resulting accumulated disciplinary points are sufficient to warrant disciplinary action all sites may be issued with notices of cessation.

5. Disciplinary action - how it can arise

Some examples of typical circumstances that can lead to disciplinary action against a tester or AE are:

  • a justified complaint where defects have been found on a vehicle that had previously passed its MOT test (this is known as an ‘inverted appeal’)
  • a justified appeal against a vehicle that had previously failed its MOT test (this is known as a ‘statutory appeal’)
  • a re-examination of a recently tested vehicle by DVSA revealing an incorrect pass/fail decision
  • an observed test where a vehicle (with or without induced defects) is submitted for examination by a ‘mystery shopper’ (a person posing as a customer) in order to check the tester’s testing methods or standards and those methods or standards appear to be inadequate/incorrect
  • an unobserved test with induced defects - this provides for leaving the vehicle at the VTS and collecting it later that day in order to check the tester’s testing methods or standards - generally, this is used to target sites where there are perceived standards issues or other enforcement methods are impracticable
  • an observed test when DVSA has asked for test procedures to be demonstrated by a tester and these procedures have proved unsatisfactory
  • the recognition by DVSA of a deficiency in the operation of the MOT testing service at a VTS
  • other more involved investigations in cases where DVSA believe there may be significant abuses, which may include covert surveillance of sites offering MOT tests or at sites where potentially testable vehicles are present
  • data analysis or intelligence that triggers investigations leading to identification of a deficiency
  • involvement in offering a service that undermines MOT test standards or the integrity of the MOT testing service, such as removing or bypassing emission control equipment or the ‘clocking’ of odometer instruments

Serious corrosion will not normally be considered to warrant disciplinary action, for the application of incorrect testing standards, if it was reported more than three months after the original test. In the case of other defects, disciplinary action is unlikely to be considered if the fault was reported more than 28 days after the original test.

6. Points evaluation, and possible action

Shortcomings found are attributed a predefined sanction or scored under a points system; the points for particular shortcomings are set out in the appendices listed below. Shortcomings not listed are allocated the same scores as others of similar seriousness.

Subject Appendix
Single offence cessation 8.1
Incorrect test standards 8.2
Incorrect test methods 8.3
Incorrect operation of MOT service 8.4

Action after initial assessment of points

The course of action to be taken by DVSA will be determined by DVSA’s initial assessment.

A low points score may lead to advice being given to the tester or AE.

A higher score may result in DVSA considering formal disciplinary action. DVSA will determine whether starting the formal disciplinary procedure is justified; if it is not, appropriate advice may be issued to the AE or tester.

A level 1 sanction will lead to advice being given to the tester or AE.

A level 2 sanction will lead to a temporary suspension notice being issued to the AE or tester.

A level 3 sanction will result in DVSA considering formal disciplinary action against the AE or tester.

At the end of this section is a flow-chart showing the normal chain of events from the finding of shortcomings to the point at which action is considered.

Advice

If the points score from a visit is below the level shown in the chart at the end of this section or a level 1 sanction is defined, advice will normally be given.

It is not part of the formal disciplinary system however, it can be taken into account in considering the significance of mitigation offered in a formal disciplinary case arising within 5 years of the advice being given.

For any advice to be used in this way it must be given in writing and this will normally be via a copy of the vehicle examiner’s report, or advisory warning letter/notice. They can be delivered electronically via email or through an MOT testing service notification/event.

Temporary suspension notices

Temporary suspension notices will be issued if a level 2 sanction is defined at the point a shortcoming is discovered.

A temporary suspension notice will remain in place until sufficient rectification to the shortcoming found has taken place, and sufficient evidence of rectification is accepted by DVSA.

Temporary suspension notices can be taken into account in considering the significance of mitigation offered in a formal disciplinary case arising within 5 years of the notice being issued.

Formal disciplinary action will normally be initiated if a level 3 sanction is defined or the points score from a visit or occurrence is at or above the level shown in the chart at the end of this section.

7. Formal disciplinary procedure

Unless otherwise specified, if formal disciplinary action is to be considered, a letter (referred to as a contemplated disciplinary letter) will be sent to each of those parties against whom action is being considered.

The letter will be accompanied by copies of all documentary evidence that is being considered such as vehicle examiner’s reports or photographs and will invite written representations to be made via email about the case within 15 working days of the date of the letter.

In addition, if the maximum level of sanction indicated is cessation, the contemplated disciplinary letter will note any previous formal warnings and short term cessation letters which will be considered in deciding what action DVSA will take.

Where cessation is contemplated and previous formal warnings or short-term cessations are cited, testers and AEs may make relevant representations about all cited formal warnings or short-term cessations.

DVSA will review the evidence and representations on any previous formal warnings or short-term cessation letters that are being considered.

Formal warnings which have previously been reviewed will not be reviewed further, unless new and additional evidence is provided.

Once the deadline is passed, DVSA will consider the action to be taken. All representations made by, or on behalf of, the tester or AE will be studied, together with the evidence and photographs sent along with the contemplated disciplinary letter. Should any new evidence (other than clarification or confirmation of previous evidence) be considered by DVSA, the tester or AE will be given the opportunity to comment on it.

The case may then be re-scored considering all the evidence offered.

Disciplinary casework and letters will be sent to you by email as the preferred option. This will be encrypted and sent to your personal email address on the MOT testing service (MTS) system, which will ensure data protection. In the case of an AE, the email will be sent to the authorised examiner designated manager (AEDM) of the AE. It is therefore essential, users check their email address is correct, personal and not shared. Instructions on how to open the letters will be contained within the same email.

If you have engaged a third-party consultant, it will be your personal decision to forward this information onto them. We will not send this information to anyone except the individual(s) concerned in the case.

Where a case is judged serious enough to justify formal action, one of the following options will be chosen:

  • a formal warning, a warning which will be taken into account in the event of future formal disciplinary action
  • a formal warning as above but with a requirement to successfully complete additional training
  • a tester’s approval or AE’s authorisation will cease in the form of either a short term cessation, (for a period of 28 calendar days) or a cessation (for a period of two or five years)

If the action is a formal warning with a requirement to complete additional training, the notice will also tell the tester or AE that if they do not complete and record evidence of the training, they will be prevented from testing from a date specified. That date will normally be 35 working days after the date of the notice. Once the training has been successfully completed, testing rights will be restored. The case will still count as a formal warning should any future disciplinary action be considered.

Testers and AEs will be notified of the final decision in writing along with any conditions attached to the outcome.

Fast track

This process simplifies and speeds up the disciplinary process. It provides less uncertainty for the authorised examiner and tester, as they will know the outcome sooner.

The process will only be used when:

  • there is factual evidence that can be documented 
  • the evidence is not contested
  • the authorised examiner (AE) and tester both agree that the shortcoming has occurred, and they are content to use this process
  • the AE or vehicle testing station (VTS) and tester have no preceding disciplinary cases in the previous 5 years

and where the shortcomings have been identified in any of the following circumstances:

  • statutory test results are recorded using the wrong vehicle details
  • mystery shopper for Class 4, 5 or 7 only, where 2 to 4 defects are missed or incorrectly applied
  • a targeted reinspection, MOT Compliance Survey or an appeal for Class 4, 5 or 7, where 2 to 4 defects are missed or incorrectly applied

Where the outcome is a 2 or 5 year cessation

The AE must submit a full application and meet all current requirements to be accepted back into the MOT scheme, and their AEDM must attend an MOT managers course.

A tester must demonstrate they meet the acceptable criteria for becoming a tester as specified in Section E2. Eligibility for becoming a tester. In addition, they must also complete the required training and complete a practical demonstration, refer to Appendix 6 Tester Training and Demonstration Tests.

Where the outcome is short term cessation

The AE must submit an application and meet all the requirements for an AE following a short term cessation be accepted back into the MOT scheme.

This will include:

  • completion of a VT01 application form
  • DBS checks for each AE principal and the AEDM
  • declarations of non-conviction for the business and each AEP
  • declaration that the site remains unchanged from the previous authorisation
  • the AEDM may have to attend an MOT managers course if they have not done so in the previous 2 years
  • if the AEDM is not an AE principal, an AE principal may need to attend an MOT managers course on behalf of the AE

The application must be submitted after the issue of the notice of cessation but before the end of the period of cessation. After this date a full application will need to be submitted. Testing may only resume after the 28 day cessation period and once these and any other requirements have been met.

The maximum level of sanction normally considered appropriate for any particular points score is set out in the following appendices:

Subject Appendix
Testers 8.6
Authorised examiners 8.7

AEs and testers can provide mitigation that is relevant to the current disciplinary case, DVSA will consider this and it may lead to a reduction in the sanction that is imposed.

Additionally, in the case of an AE, if evidence is offered of the operation of a quality-control or quality management regime significantly better than the minimum acceptable to DVSA, in operation prior to the disciplinary case, this will be taken into consideration and could lead to a reduction in the level of sanction taken.

Although steps put in place to prevent further issues will be considered, AEs and testers should not expect this to mitigate the current case.

Notice of cessation

Where cessation is the outcome of formal disciplinary action this will normally become effective 35 working days after the issue of a notice of cessation. In the case of cessation for 2 or 5 years this period may be reduced. For example, the notice has early effect should DVSA believe there to be a serious risk to road safety.

For a tester, the notice period before cessation becomes effective may be reduced to either:

  • 10 working days, if the particular case justifies more than 100 points
  • Immediate effect, if the particular case justifies 500 points or more

For an AE, the notice period before cessation becomes effective may be reduced to either:

Cessation may be implemented with immediate effect, without DVSA first issuing the normal contemplated disciplinary letter or considering any representation in a few very serious cases that DVSA sees as representing a very significant risk to road safety or the integrity of the MOT service.

The notice period before cessation becomes effective for AEs and Testers may be extended to a maximum of 24 hours. During this period testing may be monitored, where anomalies are identified the cessation will take immediate effect.

Cessations in relation to convictions or repute, as defined in Appendix 7: Convictions and repute will normally be implemented for:

  • the AE - 28 days after the DVSA have been notified

  • a tester - with immediate effect

Period of cessation for testers

When a tester ceases to be approved for disciplinary reasons, this will normally be for:

Period of cessation for authorised examiners

When an AE has ceased to be authorised for disciplinary reasons this will normally be for:

  • 28 calendar days - in the case of short-term cessation

  • 2 years - the period may be extended to 5 years where the cessation results from repeated shortcomings considered to have major road safety implications or damage the integrity of the MOT testing service.

  • 5 years - where the cessation results from a shortcoming(s) listed in Appendix 8.1. Cessation without previous warning (single offence cessation)

  • an indefinite period - where cessation has been actioned in relation to conviction as defined in Appendix 7: Convictions and repute - the cessation will remain in place until all convictions become spent

8. Appeals against cessation

Testers who have ceased to be approved and AEs who have ceased to be authorised following disciplinary action may appeal against the action to the Secretary of State.

An AE or tester wishing to lodge such an appeal must do so in writing, as soon as possible and no later than 14 days after the date of the notice of cessation, via the DVSA office that notified the decision.

Cessation will take effect on the date notified even if the appeal is still under consideration.

The Secretary of State has delegated the decision on such appeals to the Chief Executive of DVSA who is supported by a wholly independent section.

An important element of this procedure is that appeals must be fully made aware of the relevant issues and arguments so that they can properly review the decision.

Your written representations or statement must contain full particulars of the reason(s) for the case you wish to appeal. DVSA may refuse a request for an appeal where acceptable grounds for the appeal have not been advised.

To assist you, the grounds of appeal have been categorised. The following list is not exhaustive, and it is recognised that there are some overlapping ground. The grounds of appeal include:

  • the disciplinary procedures have not been followed by DVSA at each and every stage
  • the technical evidence is disputed
  • other evidence is disputed
  • the wrong interpretation has been placed upon the facts
  • the sanction imposed or the number of disciplinary points allotted is not in accordance with the MOT testing guide
  • the penalty is not proportionate to the offence
  • there are mitigating circumstances

Once a decision has been made by our MOT appeals team, in general, there is no further form of appeal to DVSA. Once you have exercised your right of appeal and no new evidence has been provided that would change our decision; it would not be appropriate for the case to be reviewed further.

If you remain dissatisfied with the outcome of the appeal you can ask your MP to refer the case to the Parliamentary and Health Services Ombudsman (PHSO); although please be aware due to the nature of MOT testing sitting under a legislative process, they may not be prepared to consider your request. If they do, please note that PHSO will only look for instances of maladministration.

Further information can be found on the ombudsman website.

Alternatively, you can seek to have the decision judicially reviewed. A High Court judge will scrutinise the decision to establish whether the decision made was lawful.

Read more about how a judicial review works.

If you choose to seek a judicial review of the decision, this should be lodged as soon as practically possibly and no later than 3 months after the date of the appeal decision.

Informal hearings

An appellant may ask for an informal hearing, guidance on which can be found in Appendix 8.8: Informal hearings.

9. Formal warning review

There is currently no statutory right for a tester or AE to appeal against the issue of a formal warning at the time it is issued however, there is a non-statutory provision for a tester or AE to request a review of a formal warning.

If a tester or AE believes that the issue of a current formal warning was unjustified, or the disciplinary points allocation was excessive he may request a review of the decision.

A tester or AE wishing to request such a review must do so in writing:

  • no later than 14 days after the date of issue of the formal warning letter
  • via the DVSA office that issued the formal warning

The formal warning will be independently reviewed by the DVSA MOT appeals section.

Where cessation is contemplated and previous formal warnings cited, testers and AEs may make representations about all cited formal warnings, irrespective of those that have already been formally reviewed.

10. Disciplinary action flow chart

Disciplinary action flow chart

Disciplinary action flow chart

Y= Yes N= No

Cessation may be implemented with immediate effect, without DVSA first issuing the normal contemplated disciplinary letter or considering any representation in a few very serious cases that DVSA sees as representing a very significant risk to road safety or the integrity of the MOT service.

Section J
Vehicle prohibitions
Who can issue prohibition notices, how a prohibition notice can be lifted, how to test vehicles with prohibition notices.

1. Prohibitions general

DVSA’s examiners and specially authorised police officers have the power to issue prohibition notices (PG9) to prevent use on public roads of any vehicle found to be defective. In serious cases the prohibition has immediate effect, but in less serious cases, its effective date may be delayed for up to ten days.

If a prohibition notice is issued to a vehicle of a class which is required to pass an MOT test, or which would normally only be required to pass an MOT test if it was older, that notice can be lifted only through the following procedure:

  1. The defect or defects noted on the prohibition notice must be remedied, as must any other defects that would prevent the vehicle from passing an MOT test.

  2. The vehicle must be submitted for and pass a normal MOT test which has to be carried out by a suitable vehicle testing station (VTS) in the normal way.

  3. If the PG9 was issued by the police, follow the prohibition removal instructions issued by the police. If the PG9 was issued by a DVSA examiner, the prohibition is automatically cleared once the vehicle has passed its MOT.

2. Role of the VTS

It’s an offence to move a prohibited vehicle on a public road except in limited and clearly defined circumstances that are listed in the notes on the prohibition notice.

Where asked to carry out a test on a vehicle that has a prohibition notice in force, it is essential - to protect the vehicle owner and driver from prosecution - that a firm appointment with the VTS is made and recorded.

To protect the authorised examiner (AE) and his staff from prosecution, the AE must ensure that, while the vehicle is in the custody of the VTS, it is not driven on the road unless such driving is considered necessary for:

  • test runs following repairs or rectification, within 3 miles of the place of repair

  • conducting the MOT test itself

A prohibited vehicle submitted for test must be treated in all aspects as a normal MOT, concluding with the issue of the appropriate documentation. However, if you are asked to rectify the defects as well this should not be done during the test.

Section K
Police vehicle defect rectification scheme (VDRS)
What the vehicle defect rectification scheme is, when police may issue a vehicle defect rectification form, the role of the VTS in the VDRS scheme, what fees the VTS can set for VDRS.

1. Introduction

At the end of 1986 all police forces in England, Wales and Scotland introduced the vehicle defect rectification scheme (VDRS). The aim was to improve road safety by checking that defects noted by the police are put right, something that prosecution does not necessarily ensure. Authorised examiners (AEs) are invited to take part in the VDRS scheme because of their experience in such work, but co-operation is voluntary.

Queries about the procedure, the content or completion of defect forms, see Role of the VTS and other relevant matters should be directed to the police force that issued the document, not the department or DVSA.

2. Vehicle defect form

When a police officer finds a fault on any vehicle that is, or will be, required to pass an MOT test, they may issue a vehicle defect rectification form instead of advising or prosecuting the driver or issuing a prohibition notice. Once the defect is rectified, the form is endorsed by a tester to confirm that this has been done adequately.

The driver or owner must then return the completed form in the manner instructed on the form within the specified time, usually 14 days to avoid prosecution for the defects. Alternatively, to avoid prosecution, the driver or owner may produce evidence that the vehicle has been scrapped.

3. Role of the VTS

A vehicle testing station (VTS) may be asked to verify that the faults have been rectified and to endorse the form, or to rectify the faults as well. If a vehicle is presented at a VTS that is not authorised to test that class of vehicle, the driver should be told to go to an appropriate station (unless the defects are absolutely straightforward – for example, a light not working).

A tester should carry out the examination and once satisfied that all defects listed on the form (whether an MOT testable defect or not) have been properly rectified complete the appropriate section. If the tester cannot satisfy them self that the defects listed have been rectified, they must not endorse the form. The tester need only be satisfied that the listed defects have been rectified; other faults that may be noted during the examination should be brought to the attention of the presenter.

To endorse the form, you may use any embossing stamp or ordinary rubber stamp that includes the business name and phone number. Ideally this should also include your VTS number, but this can be added by hand if you don’t have a stamp that includes it.

4. Fee

There is no set fee for this examination; the charge is a commercial matter for agreement between the presenter and the VTS.

This police-initiated examination is quite separate from the statutory testing duties. The vehicle must not be registered via the MOT testing service and MOT documents must not be used in connection with it. However, any malpractice in connection with the VDRS scheme could lead to loss of repute and disciplinary action against AEs or testers within the MOT service.

Section L
Accounts and fees
Fees for tests, retests, duplicate certificates, replacement certificates, VAT, credit card payments, test slots, paying for MOTs with an account.

1. Test fees

Where statutory fees for testing are reviewed authorised examiners (AEs) will be formally advised of any changes.

The fees are the maximum that may be charged. AEs are permitted to charge less than the statutory fee for a test, a retest or for a duplicate test certificate. It is stressed that, irrespective of the fee charged, the required examination must be carried out in full and in accordance with the department’s requirements. Failure to do so may result in the cessation of the AEs authorisation and testers approval to test.

Current statutory maximum test fees are notified periodically via a special notice and the MOT test fees and appeals poster which must be publicly displayed on, or adjacent to, the MOT notice board from the date specified in the special notice.

2. Retest fees

There are two occasions where an AE/vehicle testing station (VTS) must not charge a retest fee.

A

An AE or VTS must not charge a retest fee if the vehicle:

  • stays at the VTS at which the examination took place so that defects on testable items can be repaired
  • is retested before the end of the 10th working day following the day of the initial test

The vehicle must remain at the VTS and must not leave at any time.

B

An AE or VTS must also not charge a retest fee if the vehicle:

  • is retested at the same VTS where the vehicle failed the test before the end of the next working day on which testing is carried out
  • has only failed for one or more of the items listed below

All classes

  • access panels
  • battery
  • bonnet
  • boot lid
  • brake pedal anti-slip
  • doors (including hinges, catches and pillars)
  • dropsides
  • electrical wiring
  • fuel filler cap
  • horn
  • lamps (excluding headlamp aim)
  • headlamp cleaning or levelling devices (not requiring a headlamp aim check)
  • loading door
  • main beam ‘tell-tale’
  • mirrors
  • rear reflectors
  • registration plates
  • seat belts (but not anchorages)
  • seat belt load limiter
  • seat belt pre-tensioner
  • seats
  • sharp edges or projections
  • steering wheel
  • tailboard
  • tailgate
  • towbars (excluding body around anchorage points)
  • trailer electrical sockets
  • tyre pressure monitoring system
  • vehicle identification number (VIN)
  • windscreen and glass
  • windscreen wipers/washers

All classes (except class 1 and 2)

  • tyres
  • wheels

Class 5 only

  • break glass hammer
  • door open warning device
  • emergency exits and signs
  • entrance door remote control
  • entrance and exit steps
  • stairs

The VTS must not have undergone a change in ownership during this period. If the VTS has undergone a change of ownership none of the above applies and a full test must be carried out for which a full fee may be charged.

Where the vehicle fails the test and the vehicle is repaired and subsequently re-examined using the Pass after Rectification at Station (PRS) facility, see Section B5. Testing responsibilities, no further test fee can be charged for the re-examination.

Partial retests

If the vehicle is removed from the VTS for repair and returned to the same VTS (provided the test station does not change ownership) and is retested before the end of the 10th working day following the day of the initial test, then only a partial retest is needed and a retest fee of up to half the statutory maximum test fee may be charged.

Class 4A and 5A retests

Where, on initial test, a vehicle in Class 4A or 5A passes on all aspects of seat belt installation but fails in other areas that are part of the Class 4 or 5 test respectively, they may be retested as a Class 4 or 5. This must be done at the same VTS where the vehicle was originally failed as a Class 4A or 5A.

The total number of belts fitted at the time of retest must be no more than were fitted at the original test. The tester who conducted the original test must endorse the original VT30 or enter a non-component advisory to the effect that the seat belt installation check standards have been met and showing the number of belts installed. That tester (and the AE) will be accountable for the standards applied in the installation check.

The fee charged for such a retest will depend on the failure items and circumstances involved. If the conditions set out in retest fees apply, then no fee may be charged.

If the vehicle is returned before the end of 10 working days then half the statutory maximum fee may be charged, otherwise the fee charged may be up to the statutory maximum permitted for Class 4 or 5 as appropriate to the number of seats.

Retest qualification period

Vehicles which remain at the VTS for repair and re-examination no longer qualify indefinitely for a partial free retest. These vehicles will only qualify if that re-examination is carried out before the end of 10 working days following the day of the initial test. Vehicles not re-examined within the above timescale must undergo a full test and the statutory maximum test fee for the class of vehicle being tested may be charged.

Only one partial re-examination is permissible per full examination.

The VTS must not have undergone a change of ownership during this period.

3. Duplicate, replacement and exchange certificate fees

The maximum fee for any duplicate test certificate is £10. A duplicate certificate is that issued in accordance with Section H4. Forms when an original has been lost or damaged.

No fee may be charged for the issue of a replacement test certificate (for example a test certificate issued because an error was made on the original test certificate). A replacement test certificate is one issued in accordance with Section H4. Forms when a tester is satisfied that some of the information entered on the original certificate is wrong.

No fee may be charged for ‘exchange’ documents. See Section H4. Forms.

4.VAT, credit card payments and appeal fees

Test fees themselves are not currently subject to VAT, although where a vehicle presenter re-charges their client an amount greater than the test fee actually charged, VAT may be chargeable on some or all of that re-charge. Any enquiries on this subject should be directed to the local VAT office.

Where an AE accepts payment for an MOT by credit or debit card, they must not add an additional amount to the test fee to cover any administration fee if it results in the cost exceeding the maximum test fee chargeable.

The customer should not be expected to cover any additional costs over and above the maximum charge for the MOT.

DVSA may consider action against any AE found to be charging a fee higher than the maximum.

If the AE is discounting the fee and the extra charge does not cause a payment in excess of the maximum fee this is acceptable.

The fee payable to DVSA for an appeal against the decision to fail an MOT test is the maximum fee for the appropriate vehicle class. This fee may be returned, in part or fully, if DVSA agrees that the appeal was justified.

5. Test slot charges

AEs are required to pay a charge to DVSA for each test pass recorded on the MOT testing service. Test slots must be purchased in advance. The registration of a new test or retest at a VTS will not be permitted if the AE does not have at least one test slot available.

Test slots used by DVSA during the course of an appeal will not be deducted from the AE account.

6. MOT accounts

Every AE has a slot account that will hold all the test slots purchased by the AE.

VTSs controlled by the AE take from this ‘pool’ of slots. An AE may monitor their account usage at any time via the MOT testing service.

Slots can be purchased by any person in the AE holding the role of authorised examiner designated manager (AEDM) or authorised examiner delegate (AED).

Payments and any credits due to an AE will be processed through DVSAs finance department.

AEs experiencing problems buying slots or with the slot account updating should contact the MOT testing service desk.

AEs should be aware that payments that are refused by their banks or building societies will have their payment reversed from the system by taking away the amount of unpaid slots purchased. These unsatisfactory actions may affect the repute of an AE.

Methods of paying for slots

An AE can pay for slots using the following preferred methods:

  • debit and credit cards

  • direct debit

AE’s may also pay by cheque or postal order; a form will have to be completed which is available online. Whichever method is used, AEs should monitor their slot balance regularly.

AEs that choose the direct debit method to pay for slots should be aware that it can take up to 5 working days for your slot account to be updated.

AEs are reminded that should their authorisation cease completely, they will need to cancel the direct debit mandate. This can be done on the MOT testing service or directly with their bank.

Account refunds

A refund may be available for unused slots if the AE has ceased to be approved or to test.

AE no longer approved

If the AE has ceased, AEs must fill in the online form to tell DVSA that an MOT centre is closing. MOT Administration will progress the refund along with other actions relating to garage or AE closure. The refund will be completed by DVSA finance in Swansea.

Reduce AE slot account balance

Exceptionally, an AE may request a refund to reduce the slot balance. The AE must fill in a slot refund request form.

It will take approximately 14 days from the date the refund request is processed to when the cheque is generated and sent to the AE.

Section M
System rules and user roles
MOT testing service user roles, what they can do, what their responsibilities are, which roles are mandatory, authorised examiner's responsibility for security of the MOT testing service.

1. Introduction

This section sets out the roles and responsibilities of people who fulfil particular tasks within the MOT service.

A person can hold one role or multiple roles depending on the size and circumstances of the Authorised Examiner and VTS.

Some of these roles will need access to the MOT testing service.

Each MOT testing service user will have a set of tasks (or functions) that they are allowed to perform. For convenience, these tasks are grouped together into ‘roles’. Each of these roles is given a role name, for example Tester, VTS Admin.

When a user logs on to the MOT testing service, the service checks what roles the user holds and gives them access only to the appropriate functions.

The table shows the list of roles recognised by DVSA and if they have access to the MOT testing service.

Role Access to the MOT testing service
AE Principal Yes
AE Designated Manager Yes
AE Delegate Yes
AE Consultant Yes
Site Manager Yes
Tester Yes
Quality Control Yes - via tester or other suitable role
Site Admin Yes

2. Getting a role

To hold an MOT role, all role holders must first meet the minimum requirements and:

  • have no unspent convictions
  • be of good repute
  • have not been subject to disciplinary action that would prevent them from holding any role in the MOT testing service

Refer to Appendix 7 Convictions and Repute.

Some roles require additional preconditions to be met before the role can be gained, for example some roles require the individual to have technical qualifications and/or attend mandatory training.

To obtain a role a person must:

  • meet the minimum requirements
  • set up an account in the MOT testing service
  • set up security sign in authentication. Role holders require a security code generated by an authentication app or email to sign into MTS
  • fulfil the requirements for each role requested (see role information)
  • be assigned the role by an appropriately authorised person

To guard against unauthorised use, the MOT testing service can only be accessed by authorised personnel who can satisfy the security requirements and are known to the system. To identify themselves, they must use their user identification number, password and MOT security code. Each user must only use their own personal MOT security code and password.

Roles are assigned or removed to/from a person using a role hierarchy.

A person may assign and remove a role to a person within the scope of their own AE or VTS. For example, a site manager can remove testers from their own VTS but not testers assigned to a different VTS.

Role Assigned by Removed from MTS
AE Principal DVSA DVSA
AEDM DVSA DVSA
AE Delegate AEDM AEDM/self
AE Consultant AEDM AEDM/self
Site Manager AEDM, AED AEDM/AED/self
Tester AEDM, AED, SM AEDM/AED/SM/self
Site Admin AEDM, AED, SM AEDM/AED/SM/self

The role of AEDM (Authorised Examiner Designated Manager) is assigned by DVSA from the information supplied by the AE during the application process. The AEDM is responsible for assigning other roles within their organisation and VTS.

Designated councils and their inspectors are treated as if they were AEs or testers in relation to the roles described in this section.

3. Roles and Responsibilities

For an AE to be authorised and a site to start testing, specific MOT roles must be appointed to individuals. These identify the individuals’ responsibilities with regard to the MOT Service and where applicable, allow them appropriate access to the MOT testing service.

The following mandatory roles are required for the authorisation of a site to test:

  • Authorised Examiner Principal (AEP)
  • Authorised Examiner Designated Manager (AEDM)
  • Tester
  • Site Manager (SM)
  • Quality Control (QC)

There are additional non mandatory roles, giving varying levels of access to the MOT testing service, which AEs may find useful to aid with the running of their business.
These are:

  • AE delegate (AED)
  • AE consultant (AEC)
  • Site admin

4. Authorised Examiner roles

A role that is classed as an AE level role holds tasks and responsibilities for that authorisation and covers all the VTSs within the scope of the AE.

Authorised Examiner Principal (AEP)

Role purpose

To identify the entity and people responsible for the business.

Who holds the role

Authorised Examiner Principals (AEPs) are the people who make up the business i.e. the sole trader, partners in a partnership, directors in a company. They are legally responsible for the entity.

Method of appointment

An AEP is appointed through the approval process and must fulfill certain requirements before they are accepted into the MOT Scheme.

Tasks and responsibilities

The people constituting the entity are responsible for ensuring that the MOT requirements for their authorisation are met. This includes ensuring that systems and controls are in place to make sure that all tests carried out under their approval are conducted correctly.

The AEPs and business may be subject to disciplinary sanctions should the requirements not be met. The AEP(s) are the people that can represent the AE when corresponding with DVSA regarding disciplinary events or they can be represented by their AEDM.

Within the MOT testing service, a number of business rules for AEs and testers set out in the MOT testing guide are automatically enforced, that is, if the data held in the system does not indicate compliance, then testing is not permitted.

The AEP role has access to view data held on the MOT testing service regarding their AE and VTS, staff and test information.

Authorised Examiner Designated Manager (AEDM)

Role Purpose

The purpose of the AEDM role is:

  • to oversee the management, operation and quality of all the vehicle testing stations under the umbrella of the Authorised Examiner (the business)
  • ensure an adequate system of Quality Management at each of their VTSs; to best ensure that MOT testing is conducted to consistently high standards
  • a single point of contact for the DVSA who is enabled and responsible for speaking on behalf of the Authorised Examiner

Who holds the role

This role is held by a Principal of the business or senior manager such that they hold a position within the business that enables them to speak directly for the business. The AEDM must have direct responsibility for MOT testing at all VTS sites within an Authorisation. They should be of a standing where they exercise the most control over the creation, development and implementation of policy and management of the MOT operation for the entire business on behalf of the AE.

A consultant is not considered appropriate for this role.

There is only one AEDM per authorisation. This person is accountable directly to the business owner(s).

This role does not devolve the ultimate responsibility held by the Authorised Examiner (AE) who is liable for the correct operation of the business.

Method of appointment

An AEDM must be nominated by the Authorised Examiner. The application is made using a VT01 which must be signed by an AE principal.

All of the entry requirements must be met including a current DBS check and declaration of any disciplinary history within any DVSA scheme.

The applicant must attend and pass a Level 3 Award in MOT Test Centre Management or have attended the previously named MOT Managers’ Course or Authorised Examiners’ course.

Existing authorisations granted before 1 April 1995 do not require an AE to have an AEDM to have attended the MOT Managers Course unless there is a change to the AE authorisation. (See Appendix 1 for further conditions relating to the training requirements of this role.)

Tasks and responsibilities

Below is a list of the tasks and responsibilities that is expected to be covered by an AEDM.
The way in which systems and controls are implemented will vary depending on the size and circumstances of the AE, for example a single site AEDM would not be expected to put in place the same systems as a multi-site AEDM, but the same level of quality would be expected.

Duties may include but are not limited to:

First point of call
The first point of call representing the Authorised Examiner for DVSA

Manage legislative requirements
Understand the responsibilities of an Authorised Examiner. Understand the rules governing the management of MOT testing. Keep up to date with changes and ensure staff understand what is relevant to their roles. Know why it is important to comply with MOT rules and the consequence of not complying with MOT rules.

Quality systems
Understand the test centre quality systems needed within a vehicle testing station.
Ensure adequate systems, plans and resources are in place to ensure quality standards are met and maintained. The systems should include:

  • People
  • Training
  • Procedures
  • Equipment
  • Assurance
  • Improvement

Quality Audits
Ensure regular quality audits are completed to maintain correct standards. Obtain sufficient, valid information from your quality assurance system and other sources, including customers, to enable you to evaluate accurately whether processes and products/services are meeting the required standards. Detect and record any shortfall in the quality of processes, products, and services, investigate the cause(s) and take prompt remedial action. Report quality performance, including shortfalls and corrective actions taken. Identify and assess risks of shortfalls in the quality of processes and products/services and take preventative action to mitigate these risks.

Manage compliance requirements
Develop effective policies and procedures to ensure test centre(s) meet all official published requirements in relation to vehicle testing which includes but is not limited to:

  • Tests are registered and conducted correctly
  • Mandatory training and assessments are completed
  • Premises comply with requirements of authorisation
  • Keep up to date with any mandatory changes required for test stations
  • Maintenance and reporting procedures are in place
  • Equipment is in good working order and where necessary calibrated
  • MOT related documentation/records are readily available
  • Tests are correctly managed, such as test slots can be accounted for
  • Customer procedures are in place, such as booking in systems, complaints systems
  • Instil good practice

Customer experience
Ensure the customer receives a high quality of service. Resolve customer problems.

Access to data and functions

The AEDM will use the MOT testing service to carry out specific tasks and supervision.

Functions and data that the AEDM will access include:

Finance

  • Purchase slots
  • Check transactions

Staff

  • Allocating/removing roles
  • Quality checks
  • Checking the performance of testers and VTSs using data available within reports such as test quality information and test logs

Data and communication

  • Checking AE data is correct and up to date
  • Receive/acknowledge special notices and notifications
  • Access MOT publications

The Authorised Examiner is ultimately responsible for the correct operation of all their VTSs and test standards for every test conducted under their approval. The assignment of an AEDM does not change or devolve that responsibility.

Authorised Examiner Delegate (AED)

Role Purpose

To assist the AEDM with managing the testing operations. This role has access to the same supervisory and management functions within the MOT testing service as the AEDM with the exception that it cannot assign the AED role to another person. The way in which the role operates will vary depending on the circumstances of the Authorised Examiner. A large AE with multiple VTSs may employ many AEDs to spread the workload and manage their VTSs more effectively. However, this does not detract from or remove the ultimate responsibility from the AEDM and AE. The AED is not a mandatory role and a smaller AE may decide it is not necessary.

Who holds the role

The role can be held by any person who meets the minimum requirement for holding a MOT role.

Method of appointment

The AE delegate role is assigned by the AEDM.
If due to unplanned events an AEDM is not available and has not appointed an AED, DVSA may assign the AED role when appropriate.

Tasks and Responsibilities

The AED role is flexible in its use. It has the same access to data and functions as the AEDM, but it is for the AE and AEDM to decide how and to what degree they are used. Note: this is a voluntary role and is not recognised by DVSA as authorised to speak on behalf of the AE for approval or disciplinary matters unless designated by the AEDM or an AEP of that authorisation.

Authorised Examiner Consultant (AEC)

Role Purpose

To provide advice on MOT standards and how to run the MOT centre. To assist the AE with quality management of testing within their VTSs.
To help AEs and AEDMs to fulfil their responsibilities.

Who holds the role

The role can be held by any person who meets the minimum requirement for holding a MOT role. Whilst there is no mandatory training requirement it is advised that the AEC attend and pass a Level 3 Award in MOT Test Centre Management.

Method of appointment

The role can be assigned by the AEDM and AED, typically to a third party. By allocating the role the AEDM is agreeing to give the AEC access to data for tests and the testers at their VTSs.

Tasks and Responsibilities

The AEC role will report to the AEDM and has access via MTS to:

  • test performance data using test logs and test quality information
  • testers annual assessment information
  • service reports
    Using this data, the AEC will provide informed independent insight and advice to the AEDM. The role can view data only and cannot carry out any other actions, such as buying slots, starting tests or assign roles.

5. Vehicle Test Station Roles

Roles that are classed as VTS level hold tasks and responsibilities that only apply to the VTS to which that person is assigned.

Site Manager (SM)

Role purpose

The purpose of this role is to manage the day to day running of a VTS and supervise the quality of testing. A site manager may manage more than one VTS. If a user holds this role at more than one site, they need to ensure that each site is correctly managed.

Who holds the role

The role is held by the person who has direct contact and supervision of the MOT testing operation within that garage.
Normally there will be only one SM per VTS, however, in some cases there may be a need to have more than one, for example where there are multiple shifts. Smaller single site AEs may choose to assign the SM role to the AEDM, larger single site businesses may allocate it to another manager or supervisor. The decision on how many SM roles are needed and to whom they are given is left to the AEDM based on how the business is run.

Method of appointment

The Site Manager is assigned by the AEDM or AED.

Tasks and responsibilities

A site manager is responsible for the tests and facilities within the garages to which they are assigned. A site manager would be expected to manage the tasks below or escalate to the appropriate managers where necessary.

Duties may include but are not limited to:

VTS Compliance
Ensure VTS data on MTS is correct and up to date Manage or escalate when necessary:

  • Tests are registered and conducted correctly using prescribed methods
  • Contingency procedures are followed
  • Check site review summaries and act upon as necessary
  • The VTS complies with requirements of authorisation
  • Keep up to date with any mandatory changes required for their test stations
  • Maintenance and reporting procedures are in place and used
  • Equipment is in good working order and where necessary calibrated
  • MOT related documentation/records are readily available
  • Tests are correctly managed, such as test slots can be accounted for
  • Customer procedures are in place, such as booking in systems, complaints systems and used

Staff

  • Manage adding and removing roles of tester and VTS admin (if required)
  • Ensure testers complete mandatory training and assessments
  • Spread best practice
  • Check new staff meet the required standards
  • Ensure new staff understand the VTS reporting procedures, such as equipment operation

Quality management

  • Ensure testers are up to date with test standards and special notices
  • Use data from MTS to check test performance
  • Ensure regular quality control checks are carried out
  • Ensure any shortfall in the quality of test standards is acted upon prompt remedial action is taken
  • Escalate issues where necessary

Customer experience

  • Ensure the customer receives a high quality of service.
  • Resolve customer problems.

Quality control (QC)

Role purpose

To check the correct standards are applied to the MOT tests carried out within their VTS and where shortcomings are identified to ensure a process is followed to ensure corrective action is taken.

Who holds the role
Quality Control checks are carried out by a person who holds a Level 2 qualification in MOT Testing or equivalent for the appropriate class and comply with the requirements for annual training and assessments. They may be designated from the list of testers at the site or use a Third Party.

Method of appointment
Quality Control is a process. There is not a specific role within the MOT testing service for Quality Control.
The person selected to carry out the tasks for quality control is chosen by the Site Manager/AEDM/AED and is a part of the AEs Quality Management system.

Tasks and Responsibilities
The QC will check that at least a sample of MOTs carried out by the testers in a VTS are checked to ensure that the correct routines and procedures are followed and that the correct standards are applied.

Duties may include but are not limited to;

Quality Audits
Carry out regular quality control checks:

  • Closely watch all parts of the test as they are carried out.

Or

  • Closely observe the testing process and conduct a full re-examination of the vehicle to check standards application.

Record Shortfalls
Detect and record any shortfall in the quality of test standards. On completion of an observed test, any difference in the test result, test standards or observed defects between the tester and QC must be discussed and resolved with the tester prior to the test result being entered on MTS.

Remedial action
Take prompt remedial action when shortfalls are found:

  • Record the result of assurance checks
  • Remedial action must be recorded and agreed.

Escalate issues
Escalate issues where necessary:

  • Where unusually high numbers of failings are found – it would be expected that the frequency of checks is increased until such time as it is evidenced that the problem has now been solved.
  • Escalate issues that cannot be resolved or are of a severity that they should be brought to the attention of the site manager or AEDM.

Tester

Role purpose

A Tester carries out MOT tests to designated standards, registers tests on to the MOT testing service prior to starting a test and confirms test results when completed.

Who holds the role

A tester must meet the eligibility requirements and have achieved a Level 2 Award in MOT Testing or previous equivalent DVSA MOT Testers course. Refer to Section E Testers.

Method of appointment

A tester is approved by DVSA after successfully completing mandatory training and assessments. The Tester is appointed to a VTS by their Site Manager/AEDM/AED.

Tasks and Responsibilities

Duties may include but are not limited to;

MOT tests

  • Carry out statutory MOT tests for vehicles presented at the VTS for test
  • Amend incorrect test records and issue replacement documentation
  • Participate in quality control checks
  • Take prompt remedial action for any shortfall in the quality of test standards
  • Ensure that test equipment used when they conduct an MOT test meets MOT mandatory requirements

VTS compliance
Within each VTS;

  • Understand the VTS reporting procedures for equipment defects etc within the VTS
  • Use equipment that is in good working order and where necessary calibrated. A tester must not conduct tests with equipment that does not meet the mandatory requirements.
  • Ensure MOT related documentation/records are managed as required

Training

  • Complete mandatory training and assessments within the required timescales

Site Admin (SA)

Role Purpose

To assist the Site Manager with the day to day running and administration of the VTS.

Who holds the role

The role can be held by any person who meets the minimum requirement for holding a MOT role and is assigned by the Site Manager/AED/AEDM.

Tasks and Responsibilities

The Site admin role is flexible in its use. It has similar access to data and functions as the site manager, but it is down the Site Manager/AED and AEDM to decide how and to what degree they are used.

Duties may include but are not limited to;

Test performance

  • Check test performance data of testers using test logs and Test Quality information report
  • Issue duplicate certificates
  • Check test slot count

Tester compliance

  • Check completion of testers training and annual assessments

VTS compliance
Within each VTS cover:

  • VTS reporting procedures for MOT equipment for example, within the VTS
  • MOT equipment is in good working order and where necessary calibrated
  • MOT related documentation/records are managed as required
  • Check site review summaries and act upon as necessary
  • Keep VTS details up to date on MTS

6. How to organise Roles within an Authorisation

The management structure of the Authorisation will dictate who fills a particular role.
The minimum roles that are required for the operation of a VTS are;

  • AE Principal
  • AEDM
  • Site Manager
  • Tester

One person may hold all of these roles.

The following examples are suggestions only and can be varied to suit the particular Authorisation:

Sole trader or partnership with one VTS
In these types of Authorisation, the sole trader or one of the partners would typically have the role of AEDM assigned to them by DVSA. Other roles such as AED and Site Admin, which perform a specific function within the MOT business, can be assigned to other persons.

Sole trader or partnership with more than one VTS
These Authorisations will be set up in the same manner as the example above. However, for each VTS there must be an SM, though a person can be an SM of more than one VTS. It would be up to the Sole Trader or Partners to decide the distribution of the other roles within their organisation.

Companies
In these types of organisations, the AE is the company itself and there must be an AEDM role assigned, usually to a director or the officer of the company having direct responsibility for all MOT testing operations. It would be up to the Company to decide the distribution of the other roles within their organisation.

Designated Councils
These will be treated in the same way as companies above. The position of AEDM should be assigned to someone who is able to speak on behalf of the Council and who has direct responsibility for all MOT testing.

7. MOT Testing Service Rules Controlled by the System

Within the MOT Testing Service, a number of business rules for AEs and Testers set out in the MOT Testing Guide are automatically enforced, that is, if the data held in the system does not indicate compliance, then testing is not permitted.
Testers should be aware that it is extremely important to regularly check for new notifications and Special Notices on their home page and ensure they are read.

8. MOT Testing Service System Security

AEs should be aware of their responsibility for the security of the MOT Testing Service. They must ensure that all staff under their control are aware of DVSA’s and the MOT Testing Service security requirements.

MOT Testing Service facilities are to be used only for legitimate MOT business and the system is continuously monitored to detect unauthorised access and transactions.

Every user (regardless of role) is responsible for the security of the MOT Testing Service, which includes their personal and authentication information used to access the system.

Everyone with an officially assigned user ID and role (AEP, AEDM, AED, SM, Site Admin, Tester or AEC) must:

  • not have more than one MOT testing Service account/user id
  • not disclose their personal email address log on details to anyone who could then use this information to gain access to MTS
  • keep their personal details on MTS up to date including an individual/personal email address
  • not use a shared email or one that others have access to
  • not store password and login details on any device used in connection with the MTS
  • not disclose their password or login details to anyone
  • not share their security card, or allow access to their authentication app or authentication email
  • not allow anyone else access to their personal MTS account
  • not misuse the system for unofficial business or illegal activities
  • not use IDs belonging to other users or allow other people to use their ID
  • not use remote desktop/access software

Additionally, AEs are responsible for ensuring that their staff do not:

  • disclose their security details, (including password, login details or authentication codes) to anyone
  • make unauthorised copies of software or data
  • attempt to gain unauthorised access to MOT Testing Service functions or data
  • make unauthorised alterations to the system or application configuration or software
  • disclose to unauthorised individuals or organisations personal or sensitive information held on the system
  • misuse the system for unofficial business or illegal activities
  • use IDs belonging to other users or allow other people to use their ID

Do not disclose your Password to anyone. Nobody, including MOT service desk operatives or DVSA staff, is authorised to ask you for your password. Users must report any request to disclose their Password (or requests to change their Password to a particular value) to the DVSA Customer Service Centre.

Contact DVSA

DVSA Customer Service Centre
enquiries@dvsa.gov.uk
Telephone: 0300 123 9000
Monday to Friday, 8am to 5pm
Find out about call charges

Section N
MOT contingency testing procedures
Contingency procedures for MOT testing, completing contingency test certificates, contingency testing catch ups, issuing duplicate and replacement contingency testing certificates.

1. Carrying out MOT contingency testing

When the MOT testing service is not available, users must follow contingency procedures in order that MOT testing can continue and customers are able to receive relevant documentation. MOT central records can be updated later with test details.

Contingency test (CT) procedures will be invoked by the MOT testing service desk when the MOT testing service is not available due to an authorised outage.

An authorised outage is defined as:

  • the service being unavailable or parts of it not working because of DVSA technical problems

  • a widespread broadband communication outage

CT must not be used when IT equipment or services at a vehicle testing station (VTS) stops working. This includes:

  • IT equipment

  • internet connection

  • printers

Authorised examiners (AEs) are responsible for repair of this equipment or service and MOT testing must stop until the fault has been rectified.

During CT, test documents are handwritten without contacting the MOT testing service desk.

When normal service resumes all tests carried out under CT conditions must be input onto MOT central records.

Testers must attempt a normal registration on MOT testing service every occasion before starting a new test.

Authorising contingency testing

Users who experience a problem accessing MOT testing service should first check the service status page.

This page will advise on any problems with the service and if appropriate may display the contingency testing code.

If the status page says the service is running normally and you are still experiencing problems, contact the DVSA service desk.

If an automated message deals with the problem please do not continue with the call, there is no need to speak with an operator.

Contact DVSA service desk

customerservices@dvsa.gov.uk
Telephone: 0330 123 5654
Monday to Friday 8am – 6pm (excluding Bank holidays)
Saturday 8am to 2pm

Where VTSs are unable to contact the DVSA service desk, they should phone the DVSA customer service centre.

Contact DVSA customer service centre

enquiries@dvsa.gov.uk
Telephone: 0300 123 9000
Monday to Friday, 8am to 5pm
Find out about call charges

Contingency testing incident code

The code will be used to validate any MOT documentation issued during the period of the CT.

VTSs must not test using CT procedures without a valid incident code.

A contingency code will last for one day, in the event of multiple authorised outages the same code will be used however; a new code is required for each new day an authorised outage lasts.

The fault tracking incident number issued by the DVSA business service desk during the reporting of a fault is not the same as a CT incident code and must not be entered on any MOT documentation.

2. Contingency testing documentation

Before any CT test is started the VTS must have the required test documentation that may be necessary to complete the test.

Backdating a test record or certificate or carrying out an MOT test without issuing the proper document may lead to formal disciplinary action being taken.

The documents are automatically filled in with the VTS name, number and address for security purposes.

VTSs must download from the MOT testing service (MTS) at least one copy of each:

  • contingency MOT test certificate (CT20)

  • contingency refusal of an MOT test certificate (CT30)

Copies may be saved on a PC or tablet and printed when needed and/or hard copies may be kept and photocopied as required.

The MOT inspection checklist (VT29/VT29M) will also be required during CT.

Vehicle registration process during contingency testing

When registering a test in contingency the tester must collect all the following information using a VT29/VT29M.

Additional information required during CT should be recorded on the blank reverse side of the form:

When all of the above vehicle information has been obtained, a test may commence as appropriate and the VT29/VT29M is used in the normal way to record the test result. The tester must record defects including their severity, any advisory items and brake test readings.

Recording the vehicle registration mark (VRM)

The registration mark entered on the VT29/VT29M must be that actually carried by the vehicle at the time of test using only standard alpha numeric format.

If both military and civilian marks are displayed the civilian mark is to be used.

If the vehicle does not display a registration mark, ‘NOT DISPLAYED’ must be written in this section.

If a non-UK registration mark is displayed, that should still be entered in this section.

Recording the vehicle identification number (VIN), chassis number or frame number, where present

The full VIN, chassis or frame number must be entered onto the VT29/VT29M.

Write ‘NOT FOUND’ if a VIN, chassis or frame number is:

  • not required due to the age of the vehicle
  • cannot be found
  • unreadable

If the VIN is less than the standard 17 characters it is not necessary to add or repeat digits in order to make the VIN/chassis entry 17 characters in length.

Storage requirements for contingency testing certificates

AEs are responsible for ensuring that blank MOT CT certificates are not accessible at any time to unauthorised persons.

Copies of all issued documents must be retained as specified in Section H. Retention of documentation.

Completing contingency testing documents

At the end of a test or re-test, the appropriate CT documentation must be completed and issued to the vehicle presenter.

All CT documents must be handwritten using a ballpoint pen. Entries on test certificates must be written clearly and firmly to ensure that any subsequent attempt to alter them will be obvious. Any box that is not used must be clearly marked as not applicable (‘N/A’).

Documents showing errors or alterations must not be issued. All alterations or errors must be clearly marked as ‘cancelled’ however; there is no requirement to retain the cancelled document.

A second copy of all CT20 and CT30 certificates issued during CT must be retained by the VTS.

CT20 test certificate

See Filling in a CT20 certificate.

CT30 - contingency refusal of an MOT test certificate (CT30)

The CT30 must be issued to notify the vehicle presenter of any defects.

See Filling in a CT30 certificate.

MOT inspection check list - VT29/29M

When testing in CT, testers must use this form to record vehicle details and any identified defects.

This must include the defect severity (dangerous, major or minor) and any advisories with sufficient detail to aid the completion of CT documents and accurate data entry during CT catch up.

The VT29/29M must be retained as specified in Section H. Retention of documentation).

Where a vehicle undergoes a partial re-test, the following details must be recorded against the original VT29 for the re-test:

  • the statement ‘re-tested’ must be written next to the defects plus any new advisory defects

  • if the repaired defect is satisfactory tick the appropriate ‘pass’ box

This form is available to print from the MOT testing service or from GOV.UK.

It may also be used to record any advisory items found.

Emissions records

Relevant emissions records are to be treated in the normal way and must be retained for 3 months following the requirement of Section H. Retention of documentation of this guide.

Refusal to test

A hand completed CT30 should be issued to any vehicle presenter who requests written confirmation of the reason why the tester has refused to test their vehicle. This CT30 must be handwritten ballpoint pen.

No copy of this CT30 needs to be retained as it is not recorded on MOT central records. See Section B5. Testing responsibilities and Appendix 3: Grounds for refusal of this guide for the reasons why a tester may refuse to test a vehicle.

3. Filling in a CT20 certificate

You must complete the following sections of the CT20 test certificate.

Contingency MOT test number

This is the 8-digit alpha numeric number (contingency code) supplied by the DVSA service desk.

Registration mark

This should be copied from the vehicle.

VIN or chassis/frame number

This should be either:

  • the full VIN/chassis/frame as quoted
  • ‘NOT FOUND’

EU classification

The EU classifications with their vehicle descriptions can be found in the Introduction.

Country of registration

This is the country in which the vehicle was registered.

Odometer reading

This should be the odometer reading displayed at the time of test. Units (‘miles’ or ‘km’) must be entered.

If no odometer reading is displayed, ‘NOT DISPLAYED’ should be written in this section.

There is no requirement to record the odometer reading history.

Method of writing dates and times

The months of issue and expiry of a test certificate must always be put first followed by the day and year. No space must be left in which figures can be inserted.

Two numbers must always be used in the day of the month. The last 2 figures of the year must also be entered in words to prevent alteration. For example, May 01st 2016 Sixteen.

The time should be shown using the 24-hour clock. For example, 2:40pm should be shown as 14:40.

Expiry date of certificate

The CT20 certificate expiry date must only be 12 months less one day from the date of the test itself irrespective of whether a current test certificate still has time to run or it is an early first test.

When the service is restored, the odometer reading history and any additional time due as a result of permitted early testing will be added automatically to the test record and included on the exchange certificate.

Minor defects and advisories

Record all minor defects and any advisories, numbered sequentially. Defect descriptions must reflect the wording that would be printed if the system was operating normally in order that the information produced on exchange documents after catch up matches the handwritten version produced under CT.

If there is insufficient room then continue on another CT20. Where more than one sheet is required then each should be numbered at the bottom of the page. For example, 1 of 2, 2 of 2.

4. Filling in a CT30 certificate

You must complete the following sections of the CT30 test certificate.

CT number and vehicle details

The CT30 must clearly show the CT incident code and the required vehicle details as described for the CT20.

Defects

Record all defects, including the defect severity (dangerous, major or minor) and any advisories, numbered sequentially. Defect descriptions recorded must reflect the wording that would be printed if the system was operating normally in order that the information produced on exchange documents after catch up matches the handwritten version produced under CT.

If there is insufficient room then continue on another CT30. Where more than one sheet is required then each should be numbered at the bottom of the page - 1 of 2, 2 of 2.

Re-tests

Where a vehicle fails a re-test a new CT30 must be completed. Copies of all CT30 refusal notices must be retained as specified (see Section H. Retention of documentation).

5. Carrying out a contingency testing catch up

Catch up is the process for entering CT test result details onto MOT central records.

Catch up must be completed as soon as the service becomes available again.

Only the original test details are entered, duplicates are not recorded. If, as a result of an error on a CT certificate, a replacement CT certificate has been issued before the test has been caught up, the details entered at catch up should be those shown on the replacement certificate including the time and date of the actual test.

After normal service has been resumed, VTSs must ensure that all CT tests carried out have been entered onto MOT central records.

In order to check this, site managers must view or print off the VTS test log and compare this with the test documentation issued during CT.

Once site managers (SMs) are satisfied that this has been correctly done, CT documentation should be retained as specified in Section H. Retention of documentation.

If any outstanding CT tests come to light, these tests must be caught up immediately.

Testers are required to perform catch up for their own tests however another tester at the same VTS may under exceptional circumstances perform catch up tests on behalf of other testers.

Any tester entering results on behalf of another tester should choose ‘other’ on the contingency result entry screen and record the following in the ‘reasons’ box:

  • the original tester’s name

  • the original tester’s user ID

Incomplete tests prior to contingency testing

If you have registered a test but not completed entering the results when the system fails, when the system returns to normal the incomplete test will still be present. Continue as follows:

  • if the date is the same date as when the test was started this test record may be completed by entering the test results etc as noted on contingency paperwork before performing catch up

  • if the date is different this test record must be aborted and the test record created via catch up procedures

Errors noted during catch up

In some circumstances an error on a CT certificate may be noted at catch up, for example in trying to match with previous test records you may spot that you have transposed the characters in the VIN. If this happens, record the correct information on the VTS copy of the CT document issued and use the details you now know to be correct to perform catch up.

VTS test log

When the SM considers that all CT tests have been recorded onto MOT central records (catch up) SMs must view or print off the VTS test log. This will enable the SM to check and ensure all tests carried out under CT conditions have been recorded onto MOT testing service.

Exchange CT test documentation

Test documentation issued under CT must be exchanged for printed versions at the original VTS if requested. No charge can be made for this service. The required exchange documents should be produced using the ‘Issue Duplicate Test Documents’ process.

The original test details recorded during CT must be recorded on MOT central records, using catch up, before exchange documents can be printed.

Any returned hand-written test documentation must be retained by the VTS. CT certificates must be marked ‘exchanged’ and stapled to the corresponding copy CT documentation where available.

Changes in testing staff for contingency testing

During any CT incident it will not be possible to appoint and remove testers using the MOT testing service. In such circumstances the DVSA customer service centre must be notified in writing of the full name and user ID of any tester being appointed or removed.

As DVSA may not have access to MOT testing service either, the previous VTS of any incoming tester must be recorded along with the approximate date as to when they last tested.

When the CT incident has ended the VTS must assign the testing role to the tester before the tester will be able to be carried out computerised testing at the VTS and perform catch up of any CT tests that they had carried out.

6.Amending test records and issuing duplicate and replacement certificates when contingency testing

The procedures for producing duplicate certificates, amending test records and issuing replacement certificates vary depending upon:

  • the time of the original test
  • when the duplicate or test record amendment was requested
Original test When duplicate or replacement requested What to do
Before the CT incident During the CT incident Do not use a CT certificate. More information on what to do.
CT test During the CT incident Complete a duplicate or replacement for a CT certificate by hand. More information on what to do.
CT test After CT but before catch up Enter the details that match the replacement CT certificate as a normal test before issuing a computerised certificate. More information on what to do.
CT test After CT and catch up Follow normal duplicate and replacement procedures. More information on what to do.

If the test was before the CT incident and they request a duplicate certificate, a test record amendment or replacement certificate during the incident

CT certificates must not be used to provide duplicates or replacements of certificates that have already been recorded on MOT testing service.

Test records cannot be amended during CT.

The situation should be explained to the applicant and they should be advised that a computerised document can be produced as soon as the system returns to normal. If the applicant is not satisfied with this response they should be advised to contact the DVSA customer service centre shown on the VT9A fees and appeals poster.

If the test was a CT test and they request a duplicate, a test record amendment or replacement certificate during the incident

A duplicate or replacement for a CT certificate must be completed by hand onto a normal CT certificate.

It must include the additional information. A copy of the replacement certificate must then be attached to the original CT paperwork.

When performing catch up duplicate certificates are not required to be recorded and the original CT certificate should be recorded as normal.

For replacement certificates, the original CT certificate should be marked ‘cancelled’ and the reason for the replacement must be clearly marked. The cancelled certificate must then be attached the original CT paperwork.

When performing catch up enter the new details recorded on the replacement certificate as a normal test.

A duplicate of a CT certificate can only be produced at the VTS who carried out the test but can be completed by any tester at that VTS; the producer must add their signature to the ‘issuer’s signature’ box.

The maximum fee for the duplicate certificate should be that shown on the latest MOT fees poster.

Amendments to the test record and its accompanying replacement certificate must only be issued by a tester, preferably the tester who carried out the original test. The tester must be satisfied that the amendments required are correct and refer to the vehicle that was actually tested.

Test record amendments and replacement certificates are issued free of charge.

If the test was a CT test and they request a duplicate certificate, a test record amendment or replacement certificate after the incident but before a catch up

In the case of a duplicate certificate, where the CT incident is over, but catch up has not yet been carried out, the tester must perform catch up before a computerised duplicate can be issued.

In the case of a replacement certificate, where the CT incident is over, but catch up has not yet been carried out, the tester must be satisfied that the amendments required are correct and refer to the vehicle that was actually tested.

The VTS copy of the CT certificate should be marked with the correct information and where available to customer copy must be retained with the VTS CT paperwork.

The tester must perform catch up entering the details that match the replacement CT certificate as a normal test before a computerised certificate can be issued.

If the test was a CT test and they request a duplicate or replacement certificate after the incident and a catch up

Normal duplicate and replacement procedures apply. See Section H4. Forms.

7. Examples of contingency testing documentation

Example 1 - CT20 contingency test pass certificate

CT certificates are handwritten, using indelible ink, during CT.

example of a contingency pass certificate

Example 2 - CT30 contingency refusal of an MOT test certificate

CT certificates are handwritten, using indelible ink, during CT.

example of a contingency refusal certificate

Appendix 1
MOT management training
The training you'll need to be an MOT manager, when you'll need to complete the training, why you may need to retrain, how to apply for MOT manager training, what is covered in the course and how it's assessed, what happens if an MOT manager leaves an their role.

A. Who to train

Trained AE principal (AEP)

Each AE must have one AEP or more who has attained a Level 3 Award in MOT Test Centre Management or have attended the previously named MOT Managers course or Authorised Examiners course.

This course covers testing responsibilities, administrative arrangements, disciplinary and appeal processes. The course is designed to help the AE to fully understand their responsibilities within the MOT Service and the function that is carried out by the AEDM.

If the application to become an AE is from an individual they must attend the course.

If the application is from a partnership, the partner who will exercise the most direct control over all MOT testing operations must attend the course.

If the application is from a company, the director or an officer of the company having the most direct responsibility for all MOT testing operations at all sites, must attend the course.

If the application is from a designated council, then a senior council officer having direct responsibility for all MOT testing operations must be the one to attend the course.

Trained AE designated manager (AEDM)

Each AEDM must attain a Level 3 Award in MOT Test Centre Management or have attended the previously named MOT Managers course or Authorised Examiners course.

Typically, the AEDM would be a person from within the AE, however it may also be a senior manager who has responsibility for testing across the entire AE.

B. Timing of training

Normally, training must be completed before the authorisation can be granted.

In cases where a new authorisation becomes necessary only because a business undergoes one of the changes indicated below, the authorisation can be granted before training has taken place, provided that a suitable person is trained within 35 working days of the change. Failure to complete the necessary training within the specified period will result in cessation. These changes are:

  • a sole trader takes on a partner or forms a company of which they are a director
  • a partnership splits up, but an untrained partner continues the business as a sole trader
  • a partnership splits up, but one untrained partner continues in a new partnership or as a director of a company the same would apply if more than one of the untrained partners stayed with the new partnership or company
  • a partnership that had originally applied for authorisation before 1 April 1995, and therefore did not need to have a trained person, is reconstituted by the addition or departure of one partner or more and therefore is now required to have a trained person in the partnership
  • a receiver or manager ‘of the body’s undertaking’ is appointed for a company

C. Validity of training

With two exceptions the training is valid indefinitely.

If the AE is subject to cessation

When an AE has been subject to cessation for disciplinary reasons, the AEDM for that AE may be required to attend a further course before again being acceptable as a trained person. If the AEDM is judged to have been directly involved in the incident leading to cessation then retraining will be mandatory.

If the AE is given a formal warning

When an AE is given a formal warning under DVSA’s disciplinary procedures, the AEDM for that AE may be required to attend a further course within 35 working days of the date that the AE is notified of the disciplinary action.

D. Apply for training

A Level 3 Award in MOT test centre management course is booked with a training provider. There is a charge for the course, which varies and is set by the individual course provider.

Find an MOT tester or manager course.

Applicants on the MOT test centre management course must supply photographic identification on attendance at the course.

E. Course content

The course will cover the responsibilities of an AE and knowledge, skills and responsibilities of becoming an MOT manager. It lasts at least 16 hours and has 4 parts which cover:

  • how to manage the legislative and compliance requirements of a vehicle test centre

  • how to deal with customer service problems within a vehicle test centre

  • how to develop and supervise staff within a vehicle test centre

  • vehicle test centre quality system and quality audit

Assessments in the course

The course also includes a multiple-choice question test, which must be passed in order to qualify.

The course provider will provide further information on the content and structure of their course.

F. Departure of the trained AEDM from the AE

If a trained MOT manager ceases to perform the AEDM role within an authorisation testing may continue provided that a new AEDM is notified to DVSA and training is then completed within 35 working days of the previous AEDM’s departure. If by the end of that period the company does not have a trained MOT Manager, testing must cease and may not restart until the appropriate person has been trained.

G. Authorised examiners in receivership

Under the regulations a company’s authorisation ceases if “a receiver or manager of the body’s undertaking is appointed” (for simplicity this person will be referred to hereafter as ‘the receiver’). DVSA tries in such circumstances to authorise the receiver as quickly as possible to minimise the upset.

Should the receiver not have attended an MOT managers course, this will not delay their authorisation provided that the receiver (or in the case of large organisations, a senior member of the receiver’s team) completes the MOT managers course within 35 working days of the new authorisation being granted.

Appendix 2
Facilities and security
The facilities and security needed to carry out MOT testing, signs and notices, maintaining and calibrating testing equipment, documentation, IT and associated equipment, the MOT security code.

1. General

The following information supplements the requirements set out in the appropriate requirements for authorisation.

2. Sign and notices

The three triangles MOT sign detailed in ‘The Traffic Signs Regulations and General Directions 2016, Schedule 11, diagram 864’ must be displayed in a prominent position, no part higher than 4.5m from the ground and no more than one sign on each road frontage.

The business trading name as described within either the Companies Act 2006 or the Company, Limited Liability Partnership and Business (Names and Trading Disclosures) Regulations 2015 is displayed conspicuously and legibly.

3. Notice board

A notice board must be installed with a protective transparent covering which must be positioned inside the vehicle testing station so that DVSA notices can be easily read by any persons intending to or submitting vehicles for test.

The MOT notice board must not be obscured or be inaccessible and must be of sufficient size to accommodate at least one A3 fees poster (landscape) and one certificate of authorisation (A4 portrait) and must not be used for any other purpose other than official DVSA MOT notices and company public liability insurance and certificates of incorporation.

If the notice board displays both MOT and business documents, there must be clear and distinct separation between the MOT documents and any documents not related to MOT testing.

All authorised examiners (AEs) must also display:

  • the certificate of authorisation (VT9) issued by DVSA
  • the current fees and appeals poster (form VT9A) showing vehicle classes, test fees and appeals procedure and the details of how to contact DVSA

The current fees and appeals poster may be displayed adjacent to the ‘official’ notice board if it will not fit on the notice board proper. Additional copies of this poster can be obtained online.

4. Equipment calibration

The MOT list of acceptable equipment lists the various makes and models of test equipment that have a measuring capability, such as headlamp aim testers and brake testers. The suitability of other test equipment is individually assessed at each VTS.

Find MOT equipment approved by DVSA.

Equipment maintenance, calibration and records

All testing equipment must be kept in good order and measuring apparatus must be calibrated regularly in accordance with DVSA’s requirements. In all cases calibration records must be kept for a minimum of two years.

In the case where the serial number of the equipment cannot be found the VTS should make up a number, which identifies the equipment, and mark the equipment accordingly. Where a VTS uses an item of test equipment that is awaiting approval, the AE should contact DVSA for advice.

The AE is required to ensure that calibrations are carried out when required. For roller brake testers (RBTs), plate brake testers (PBTs), automated test lane (ATL) weighing facility, motorcycle weighing equipment (where applicable) and headlamp aim testers, the calibration expiry date will be taken as the month end date. For example, a certificate showing an expiry date of 15 July 2024 will be taken as 31 July 2024. See Roller and plate brake testers, ATL and motorcycle weighing facilities, and headlamp aim testers

RBTs, PBTs, weighing equipment and headlamp aim testers can be calibrated anytime during the six months following its last date of calibration. The equipment is then considered calibrated until the end of the 6th month.

Test equipment must be calibrated and maintained in accordance with DVSA’s requirements. AEs must ensure maintenance and calibration appointments are arranged and carried out in a timely manner to prevent these becoming overdue.

If an item of mandatory test equipment is not re-calibrated – or, in the case of ATL or OPTL steering and suspension play detectors, not inspected – by its due date, then testing which uses that item must stop until the equipment has been recalibrated or inspected.

Testing must also stop if any mandatory item malfunctions in a way that could prevent a test being properly conducted. Testing must not be resumed until the equipment has been properly repaired. If equipment fails during a test but before its use has been completed, the test must be aborted and any fee paid returned.

Maintenance periods

All equipment must be maintained in good working order at all times.

In the case of ATL or one person test lane (OPTL), maintenance periods for steering and suspension play detectors is a minimum of:

  • 6 months for pneumatic equipment
  • 12 months for hydraulic equipment

Maintenance must be conducted by the manufacturer, manufacturer’s agent, a suitably qualified maintenance engineer or calibration specialist and a maintenance report issued detailing any remedial work conducted.

A signed and dated declaration that the equipment is in good working order must be issued after the maintenance has been completed.

Portable appliance testing

Under Health and Safety legislation (including the Health and Safety at Work Act 1974, the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989 and the Provision and Use of Work Equipment Regulations 1998), employers are responsible for the inspecting and testing of all types of electrical equipment in all work situations.

Among other things, the Provision and Use of Work Equipment Regulations require that equipment provided for use at work is safe, maintained in a safe condition and, in certain circumstances, inspected to ensure this remains the case.

In particular, the Electricity at Work Regulations place a legal responsibility on employers and employees to comply with the provisions of the regulations and take reasonable steps to ensure that no danger results from the use of electrical equipment.

It is therefore the responsibility of AEs to ensure that all electrical equipment used on their premises, has been tested to ensure that it poses no risk to health and safety.

Further information on PAT, including leaflets, can be obtained from the Health and Safety Executive

Frequency and location of calibration

Equipment should be calibrated as follows.

Exhaust gas analysers

The user should make a daily leak check on the hose and probe. Most machines have an automatic facility for doing this. If not, a physical check of the hose and probe must be carried out to confirm that there are no leaks.

Depending on the make or type, exhaust gas analysers must be calibrated every 3, 6 or 12 months. This must be carried out according to the approved procedure by a recognised calibration technician only. An exhaust gas analyser must be calibrated with a certified calibration gas and when the ambient temperature is above 5°C.

Gas analysers cannot be properly calibrated if the mains AC voltage is less than 204V or more than 264V.

Roller brake testers, plate brake testers, ATL and motorcycle weighing facilities, headlamp aim testers

RBTs, PBTs, ATL and motorcycle weighing facilities, and headlamp aim testers can be calibrated anytime during the six months following its last date of calibration. The equipment is then considered calibrated until the end of the 6th month. Where the calibration certificate only states the month and year of expiry, the last day of that month should be taken as the calibration expiry date.

The requirement for motorcycle weighing equipment to be calibrated only applies to sites approved to the November 2009 Requirements for Authorisation.

Decelerometers

Decelerometers calibrated prior to 1 April 2023 must be calibrated at intervals not exceeding 2 years.

From 1 April 2023 decelerometers must be calibrated at intervals not exceeding 1 year.

Decelerometers may only be calibrated by:

  • the manufacturer
  • a calibrator accredited by the United Kingdom Accreditation Service (UKAS)

Salter brake testers

From 1 April 2023, calibration of Salter brake testers will no longer be acceptable if completed by vehicle testing station (VTS) staff.

Salter brake testers must be calibrated at intervals not exceeding 2 years.

Salter meters can be done by:

  • the manufacturer’s local depot if available
  • a firm that has taken over responsibility for equipment support from the manufacturer
  • a calibration specialist
  • a local trading standards office

Tyre tread depth gauges

Tyre tread depth gauges require a periodic accuracy check at least every 6 months. This can be done by placing the base foot onto a flat surface, such as a window glass, and checking that the zero datum’s align.

AEs are to keep a separate record showing the date of the accuracy check.

Diesel smoke meters

Diesel smoke meters should be checked by the user every week.

They should be calibrated every 12 months by a technician accredited by UKAS.

Calibration personnel

Equipment may be calibrated on site only by the following personnel.

Exhaust gas analysers and diesel smoke meters

Exhaust gas analysers and diesel smoke meters should be calibrated by a technician accredited by UKAS. There are two exceptions:

  • equipment (non-catalyst or catalyst) with an approved automatic monthly self-gassing facility requires a 12 monthly UKAS calibration with monthly calibrations which may be performed by VTS staff

  • non-catalyst OIML Class 1 equipment with an approved self-gassing facility requires a 6 monthly UKAS calibration with an intermediate calibration which may be performed by VTS staff

Roller brake testers, plate brake testers and headlamp aim testers

From 1 April 2023, calibration of brake testers and headlamp testers will no longer be acceptable if completed by vehicle testing station (VTS) staff.

RBTs, PBTs and headlamp aim testers must be calibrated by either:

  • the original manufacturer
  • firm that has taken over responsibility for equipment support from the manufacturer
  • a calibration specialist

ATL and motorcycle weighing facilities

From 1 April 2023, calibration of ATL and motorcycle weighing facilities will no longer be acceptable if completed by vehicle testing station (VTS) staff.

ATL and motorcycle weighing facilities should be calibrated by either:

  • the original manufacturer
  • a company which has taken over responsibility for equipment support from the manufacturer
  • a calibration specialist

Calibration is only required for motorcycle weighing facilities for sites approved to the November 2009 Requirements for Authorisation.

Independent calibrators

VTSs employing calibration specialists must satisfy themselves of the technical competence and viability of the company concerned and be able to demonstrate this to DVSA upon request. .

Documentation

In cases where a VTS employs either the manufacturer or a calibration specialist, there must be a written contract and the test station must obtain a certificate for each calibration.

5. Calibration certificates

All certificates must contain:

  • a certificate serial number
  • details of the equipment, including make, model and serial number
  • title and address of calibration company or agency
  • signature of calibrator and date of calibration
  • smoke meter and gas analyser calibration certificates shall meet the UKAS and DVSA standard agreed

Calibration certificates must include a record of the test load, gauge readings and percentage error. Calibration results may be recorded in kgf or the equivalent in imperial lbs.

Retention

Calibration records must be readily retrievable and be kept for a minimum of two years. Calibration records may be retained digitally or as a hardcopy.

Exhaust gas analysers certificates

Calibration certificates for exhaust gas analysers are normally valid for 3, 6 or 12 months from the date of issue. However, if the certificate is issued no more than 14 days before the expiry of an existing certificate, then the expiry date may be 3, 6 or 12 months from the date of expiry of the old certificate.

Roller brake tester and plate brake tester certificates

Certificates for RBTs and PBTs must include a record of the test load, gauge readings and percentage error. The following limits apply in both forward and reverse operation as applicable.

Some older roller brake testers were approved to different calibration values to those listed. To accept any different values, evidence must have been supplied in the manufacturer’s original operating instructions.

Minimum values for roller brake testers

The minimum values for roller brake testers are as follows.

Class 1 and 2

If approved before 1 July 1996, the minimum values are:

  • 30kgf (66lb)
  • 100kgf (220lb)
  • 200kgf (440lb)

If approved from 1 July 1996 onwards, the minimum values are:

  • 0
  • 50kgf (110lb)
  • 100kgf (220lb)
  • 200kgf (440lb)
  • 300kgf (660lb)

Class 3 and 4

If approved before 1 July 1996, the minimum values are:

  • 100kgf (220lb)
  • 200kgf (440lb)
  • 400kgf (880lb)
  • 500kgf (1100lb)

If approved from 1 July 1996 onwards, the minimum values are:

  • 0
  • 100 kgf (220lb)
  • 200 kgf (440lb)
  • 400 kgf (880lb)
  • 600kgf to 800kgf (1320kgf to 1760lb)

Class 5 (all equipment)

For low range, the minimum values are:

  • 0
  • 100kgf (200lb)
  • 200kgf (440lb)
  • 400kgf (880lb)
  • 600kgf to 800kgf (1320lb to 1760lb)

For high range, the minimum values are:

  • 0
  • 1200kgf to 1500kgf (2640lb to 3300lb)
  • 2000kgf to 2500kgf (4400lb to 5500lb)
  • 3500kgf to 4000kgf (7700lb to 8800lb)

Class 7 (all equipment)

The minimum values are:

  • 0
  • 200kgf (440lb)
  • 400kgf (880lb)
  • 600kgf to 800kgf (1320lb to 1760lb)
  • 1200kgf to 1500kgf (2640lb to 3300lb)

Minimum values for plate brake testers

The minimum values for plate brake testers are as follows.

Class 1 and 2 (all equipment)

The minimum values are:

  • 0
  • 30kgf (66lb)
  • 100kgf (220lb)
  • 200kgf (440lb)

Class 3 and 4 all equipment

The minimum values are:

  • 0
  • 30kgf (66lb)
  • 100kgf (220lb)
  • 200kgf (440lb)
  • 600kgf (1320lb)

Class 7 all equipment

The minimum values are:

  • 0
  • 100kgf (200lb)
  • 200kgf (440lb)
  • 600kgf (1320lb)
  • 1000kgf (2200lb)

Accuracy of brake force readings

Brake force readings shall be accurate to within:

  • +/- 3 kgf (6.6 lb) of the true value from zero up to and including 100kgf

  • +/- 3% of the true value for all readings above 1000kgf

Calibration certificates for brake testers are to contain the following (or similar) statement: “This is to certify that the above brake test equipment has been calibrated and is within the limits specified by DVSA”.

ATL weighing facility

Certificates must include a record of the test load, gauge readings and percentage error.

Accuracy to within +/- 3% between 200kg and 3000kg imposed weight traceable to an acceptable quality standard.

Calibration certificates for brake testers and ATL weighing facility are to contain the following (or similar) statement: “This is to certify that the above brake test equipment has been calibrated and is within the limits specified by DVSA”.

Headlamp aim testers

Calibration certificates for headlamp aim testers are to contain the following (or similar) statement: “This is to certify that the above headlamp aim testing equipment has been checked and is in correct alignment with the vehicle standing area”.

Diesel smoke meter

Smoke meters are to be calibrated every 12 months. Calibration certificates are normally valid for 12 months from the date of issue. However, if the certificate is issued no more than one month before the expiry of an existing certificate then the expiry date may be 12 months from the expiry of the old certificate.

A new diesel smoke meter should be supplied with an initial calibration certificate in one of two forms.

It may have a certificate of conformity issued by a BSI/ISO registered company, the meter will have been calibrated as a part of the in-house quality control procedure. It will carry the BSI and/or ISO logos, and will be dated. Within six months of the issue of a Certificate of Conformity a new meter must be calibrated by a UKAS accredited engineer.

You may find that some new smoke meters have very little time left to run with this type of certificate when delivered.

Alternatively, it may have a UKAS calibration certificate issued immediately prior to or following delivery by a UKAS Accredited Engineer. Like all other UKAS issued calibration certificates on diesel smoke meters a new meter must be calibrated by a UKAS Accredited Engineer within twelve months of the issue of this certificate.

If you have any questions regarding the certification of a smoke meter, contact the manufacturer or their agent.

Motorcycle weighing facility

Certificates must include a record of the test load, gauge readings and percentage error.

Accuracy should be within +/- 3%.

Calibration certificates for weighing facility are to contain the following (or similar) statement: “This is to certify that the above weighing facility has been calibrated and is within the limits specified by DVSA”.

6. MOT testing service IT and associated equipment

Authorised examiners are responsible for the supply and maintenance of all IT equipment and internet connection used for MOT testing purposes.

PC, iMac and Laptops

The MOT testing service is designed to run on most recent Windows and Mac OS computers and laptops with:

  • a 1GHz processor
  • 512MB system memory
  • 20GB hard drive space
  • 1024 by 768 screen resolution or above
  • a network cable socket (RJ45) or Wi-Fi

MOT testing service is designed to run on any tablet with screen sizes of 9 inches and above (measured diagonally across the screen).

MOT testing service works on internet connections of 0.5Mbps (512 Kbps) and above.

The internet connection may be via fixed line, 3G, 4G, 5G or satellite.

Browser requirements

A suitable browser is required to view MOT testing service website. One of the following browsers will need to be installed on your device to use MOT Testing Service:

  • Chrome (latest version) - supplied by Google and can be used on either Windows, MacOS, iOS and Android
  • Firefox (latest version) - supplied by Mozilla and can be used on either Windows or MacOS
  • Edge (latest versions) - supplied by Microsoft with its latest IT equipment
  • Safari 12 and later - supplied by Apple with its latest IT equipment
  • Safari for iOS 12.1 and later - supplied by Apple with its latest mobile equipment
  • Samsung Internet (latest version) - can be used on Android operating systems

Printer requirements

An A4 black and white printer is required to print MOT certificates and other documents from the MOT testing service.

All printer consumables, such as paper and ink, are provided by the AE/VTS.

MOT security code

All MOT testing service users with a role assigned to their MOT testing service profile need to enter a security code when signing into MOT testing service. Security codes generated by authentication app or email will be required once a day if the sign in details remain the same.

The 6 digit security code is generated by either:

Authentication app

Users will use an authentication app installed on their personal smart phone or tablet. This app will be linked to their MOT testing service profile. The app automatically generates the security code and is entered into MOT testing service when required as part of the sign in process

Email

MOT testing service will send a security code to the users unique email address recorded on their MOT testing service profile. A new code is sent when required and is entered as part of the sign in process

Security card

The card generates a new 6 digit code when pressed. A new code is required each time a user signs into MOT testing service. Card holders must not write their user ID or password on the card. Security cards are no longer issued or replaced

7. Complaints about the MOT testing service

Complaints concerning MOT testing service should be made in the first instance via the MOT testing service desk. If the complaint is not resolved the AE should contact the DVSA customer service centre.

Contact DVSA service desk

enquiries@dvsa.gov.uk
Telephone: 0330 123 5654
Monday to Friday 7:30am – 6pm (excluding Bank holidays)
Find out about call charges

Contact DVSA customer service centre

enquiries@dvsa.gov.uk
Telephone: 0300 123 9000
Monday to Friday, 8am to 5pm
Find out about call charges

Appendix 3
Grounds for refusal
Reasons why a tester can refuse to carry out a test.

The Motor Vehicles (Tests) Regulations 1981, as amended, list the reasons why a tester can refuse to carry out a test. These are:

a) The registration certificate (V5C) or other evidence of the date of first use is not produced if the information therein is necessary for the test to be properly carried out.

Normally this document will be necessary only if the vehicle has a ‘cherished’ registration mark or if the registration mark’s year letter does not make clear the standard that should be applied - for instance, regarding the seat-belt requirements for D-prefix vehicles.

If evidence of the date of first use is produced and it shows that the vehicle was first used abroad, the presenter should be made aware that the vehicle may need an Individual Vehicle Approval test (IVA), not an MOT test, before the vehicle can be registered for use in Great Britain and a VT32 advisory notice should be issued.

b) The vehicle or any part or equipment on the vehicle is so dirty that examination is unreasonably difficult.

c) The vehicle is not fit to be driven when necessary to complete the test because of a lack of fuel, or oil, or for any other reason.

d) The tester considers a load or other items, or insecurity of a load or other items, would prevent a proper test being carried out - unless the load is secured or removed.

e) The vehicle testing station (VTS) asks for the test fee to be paid in advance and this is not done.

f) The vehicle emits substantial quantities of avoidable smoke.

g) A proper examination cannot be carried out because of the inability to open any device, for example door, tailgate, boot lid, engine cover or fuel cap - designed to be readily opened.

h) The vehicle’s condition is such that, in the opinion of the tester, a proper examination would involve a risk of injury to any person or damage to the vehicle or other property. This would cover refusal to test a diesel where the engine’s maintenance history or condition was suspect.

i) The vehicle has neither vehicle registration mark nor VIN/chassis number/frame number by which it can be identified or, that all such identifications are illegible or use letters and numbers not normally used in the English language.

If this applies, issue a handwritten CT30 containing as many of the vehicle details as possible. A copy of the CT30 should be retained.

In addition to the above, a tester must decline to test a vehicle if it is of such size, weight or configuration that it cannot be properly or safely tested on the approved facilities.

In the case of classes 1 or 2 a VTS must decline to test any motor bicycle the frame of which is stamped ‘not for road use’ or words to that effect.

When a vehicle presenter requests a ‘refusal to test’ decision in writing, the vehicle details should be registered onto the MOT testing service, a VT30 printed detailing the reason for refusing to carry out the test, and the test abandoned without a fee being charged.

Refer to Section N. MOT contingency testing procedures for guidance when contingency testing has been invoked

Appendix 4
Liability for loss or damage
Authorised examiner's liability for loss or damage that occurs as a result of testing.

The extent of an authorised examiner’s (AE) liability for damage is set out in regulation 14(1) of the Motor Vehicles (Tests) Regulations 1981 (SI 1981 No 1694) as amended but is repeated here for information.

14 (1) Where a motor vehicle has been submitted for an examination to be carried out by a person other than a section 66A examiner, the authorised examiner or designated council (as the case may be ) shall have the same responsibility for:

a. loss of or damage to the vehicle or its equipment or accessories occurring in connection with the carrying out of the examination during any period while the vehicle is, in connection with the carrying out of the examination, in the custody of the authorised examiner or designated council (as the case may be)

b. loss or damage to any other property or personal injury (whether fatal or not), being loss, damage or injury arising out of the use of the vehicle in connection with the carrying out of the examination,

as would rest on a person who, having the same facilities for carrying out the examination as are available to the person who is carrying out the examination, had undertaken for payment to accept the custody of the vehicle and to carry out the same examination under a contract making no express provision with respect to the incidence of liability as between the parties thereto for any such loss, damage or injury.

The above regulation is particularly difficult for a layman to follow. Its exact meaning can only be decided by the courts. The department’s legal advisers have produced the following, which, whilst not a definitive interpretation of the legal position, is intended to make the meaning of regulation 14(1) clearer. The term examiner in the explanation covers both AEs and designated council inspectors.

An examiner will be liable for the following in certain circumstances:

  • loss or damage to a vehicle that has been submitted for testing
  • loss or damage to the equipment or accessories of a vehicle submitted for testing
  • loss or damage to any other property
  • personal injury (whether fatal or not)

Liability if there is loss or damage to a vehicle, its equipment or accessories

For an examiner to be liable for the types of damage listed in (1) and (2), the circumstances must be that the damage can be connected to an examination carried out by that examiner whilst the vehicle or accessory concerned was in their custody.

Examples of these types of damage that (1) and (2) are intended to cover are where an examiner, whilst testing a vehicle smashes a brake light, causes the steering to become defective or inflicts other types of harm to the vehicle that did not exist at the time it was left in their possession for testing.

Liability if there is loss or damage to any other property or personal injury

For an examiner to be liable for the types of damage listed in (3) and (4), the circumstances must be that the damage arose as a result of the use of the vehicle and can be connected to an examination carried out by an examiner.

Examples of the types of damage that (3) and (4) are intended to cover are where an examiner gives a vehicle the all clear. Subsequently when it is used the brakes fail and a collision occurs, in which the driver or a passenger is injured or dies or property is damaged. If it can be shown that the examiner cleared the vehicle at a time when the brakes were defective they are liable.

Appendix 5
Tester qualifications
Information on acceptable qualifications to become a tester

The vocational educational qualifications acceptable to DVSA are listed below. Proof of qualifications will be required in the form of copies of the final certificate (or copies of duplicates issued by the examining authority) and a training provider may request to see the original certificate.

It is acceptable for certificates for testers to be presented electronically for the purpose of course attendance. The electronic certificate must be emailed from the awarding organisation.

Records of achievement, unit credits towards the final certificate, or other similar documentation are not acceptable.

Periodically, extra qualifications are added to this list. Additions can only be made by DVSA after consulting the awarding body and satisfying ourselves that the qualification represents an appropriate level of achievement. This verification process is not quick and can sometimes be impossible if the awarding body no longer exists.

If you have qualifications not on the list but which you believe to be equivalent, please send evidence of the qualification with your application to your chosen training provider. Where qualifications are from an unfamiliar source the applicant maybe required to provide further supporting information.

National Craft Certificate

In the specialism of Vehicle Maintenance and Electronic Systems.

City and Guilds

Repair and Servicing of Road Vehicles, 383 - full level 2 or 3

Motor Vehicle Craft Studies, Modular - part 3 (requires 3 modules)

Motor Vehicle Craft Studies, 381 - full part 2 or 3

Motor Vehicle Craft Studies (pre 381 syllabus) - full part 2

Light Vehicle Mechanics Craft Studies - full part 2 or 3

Heavy Vehicle Mechanics Craft Studies - full part 2 or 3

Motor Vehicle Technician’s Certificate - full Part 1

Automotive Qualification NVQ Level 3

Business and Technician Education Council

Motor Vehicle Engineering Studies, National Certificate or ONC

Scottish Vocational Education Council

National Certificate in Vehicle Mechanics and Systems - part 3

National Vocational Qualification or Scottish Vocational Qualification

Vehicle Mechanical and Electronic Systems - Maintenance and Repair (LV or HV) Level 3

Vehicle Technician - Vehicle Maintenance and Repair (LV or HV) Level 3

The Institute of Motor Industry (IMI)

IMI Level National Diploma in Vehicle Maintenance and Repair (LV or HV) VRQ (Level 3)

Automotive Technician Accreditation

ATA Light Vehicle, Diagnostic Technician

ATA Light Vehicle, Inspection Technician

ABC Awards

Vehicle Technician Accredited Assessment (VTAA)

Appendix 6
Tester training and demonstration tests
Training requirements for testers, initial MOT testing training, demonstration tests, MOT annual training for testers, keeping a training record, assessment of new and returning testers, assessment of continuing competence, arranging a demonstration test.

1. Training for testers

In addition to meeting the criteria given in Section E2. Eligibility for becoming a tester prospective testers must successfully complete:

  • an initial training course that explains the processes of MOT testing and reinforces the standards set out in the relevant inspection manual
  • an observed demonstration test for an officer of DVSA

Testers may be required to complete additional training and observed demonstration tests before being allowed to test vehicles in classes that they have not previously been testing.

The following indicates the circumstances in which testers and potential testers are required to attend training courses, annual or additional training and to provide practical demonstrations of their testing competence to DVSA.

Candidates to become a tester

Anyone wanting to become a tester will need to do:

  • initial tester training
  • a demo test

From the date of issue of a Level 2 Award in MOT testing, a demonstration test must be successfully completed on a vehicle of testable age, within 6 months.

If the request for a demonstration test is over 6 months and up to 5 years from that date, the current years MOT annual training and MOT annual assessment and any additional training must be completed prior to the demonstration. Should this time period exceed 5 years they will need to re-attend initial training.

To continue testing following a formal warning or short term cessation

To continue testing following the issue of a formal warning, disciplinary period of 28 days (short term cessation), or when requested by DVSA, the tester will need to do:

  • current year annual training and assessment
  • additional training
  • a demo test

If the current years training and assessment have already been completed, the tester will not need to redo them. However, if directed, they must take the appropriate additional training where requested within the disciplinary decision letter issued by DVSA and ensure all areas of weakness have been covered. All training must be complete prior to conducting the demonstration test.

Becoming a tester after a disciplinary period of either 2 or 5 years

To become a tester following a disciplinary period of either 2 or 5 years a tester will need to do:

  • initial tester training
  • a demo test

Testers wishing to add additional test classes

If a tester wants to add an additional test classes 3 and/or 5 to their test group they will need to do:

  • additional training
  • a demo test

See training requirements for class 3 and 5 vehicles.

Resuming testing following a lapse of 6 months to 5 years

To maintain their testing status, a tester must complete a full MOT test within a 6 month period for each test group they test. If a full test is not completed for either test group, the testers status becomes lapsed for that test group.

Before resuming testing following a lapse of over 6 months and up to 5 years, a tester will need to do:

  • current year annual training and assessment
  • additional training
  • a demo test

Testers who wish to resume testing following a lapse of over 6 months and up to 5 years must complete the current years MOT annual training and MOT annual assessment and any additional training prior to the demonstration test.

Resuming testing following a lapse of 5 years

Before resuming testing following a lapse of 5 years a tester will need to do:

  • initial tester training
  • a demo test

If a candidate fails the demonstration test

If a tester candidate fails the demonstration test, they cannot reapply for another demonstration test for at least 10 working days to allow them time for further training and practice.

If a tester candidate fails the demonstration test on the second attempt, they cannot apply for a further assessment for 6 months. In addition, they are required to successfully complete the current year’s annual assessment and training prior to phoning the contact centre to arrange their demonstration test.

Any further failures would repeat the 6-month cycle, as such successfully complete the current year’s annual assessment and training. Should this cycle exceed 5 years they will need to re-attend initial training.

Monitoring test standards

To monitor test standards a tester will need to do a demo test when required to do so by DVSA.

Annual training

For annual training, a tester will need to do the current year annual training and assessment for each Group (A and/or B) they test. It is the testers responsibility to ensure that the annual assessment has been uploaded against their MOT Testing Service (MTS) profile

Testers who do not successfully complete the annual assessment and have it recorded against their MTS profile by the 31st of March will have their testing status switched to suspended. If they wish to resume testing, they must complete the current years MOT annual training and MOT annual assessment and any additional training prior to the demonstration test.

See MOT annual training for testers.

New testers are not required to complete the annual assessment or record annual training within the current year (1 April to 31 March) of a successful demonstration test unless they become lapsed.

2. Test groups

For the purpose of demonstration tests, vehicles are grouped as:

  • group A - for all vehicles in class 1 and 2
  • group B - for all vehicles in classes 3, 4, 4A, 5, 5A and 7

With group B classes, a demonstration test may be required for each vehicle class within the test group. In some cases, a demonstration test may be observed on one class and the tester questioned about class variation to assess their competency on the other vehicles in this test group.

3. MOT training requirements for testers (all classes)

MOT Tester training is delivered by third party training providers and is paid for by tester candidates.

These qualifications are Level 2 Award in MOT testing in either:

  • class 1 and 2 vehicles (group A)
  • class 4 and 7 vehicles (group B)

4. Training requirements for testing class 3 and 5 vehicles

Before testing class 3 or 5 vehicles, testers will be required to carry out:

  • additional training
  • a further demonstration test with DVSA

Contact the IMI or ABC Awards for details of where you can take class 3 and 5 training.

There is a charge for training. Each course provider sets their own price so the costs can vary.

5. MOT annual assessment and training for testers

Testers must complete at least three hours training annually and successfully complete the annual assessment. The annual assessment must be carried out solely by the tester.

If a tester fails the annual assessment, they should not re-sit the annual assessment for 7 calendar days to allow them time to study and review areas that may have caused them concern, this must be recorded on their training log. If that assessment is failed the tester should wait another 7 calendar days before they re-sit the annual assessment again, allowing further time for study.

The 7 calendar days cycle would be repeated if there were continued failures.

How MOT annual training is completed is purely at the discretion of the tester and authorised examiner (AE), which best suits the individual or organisational needs and requirements.

For further information please refer to MOT tester training and annual assessments.

The annual assessment is available from awarding organisations and is a pay per assessment approach. On successful completion of an assessment, the candidate will be provided with a certificate and a record of this assessment is recorded on MOT testing service by the awarding organisation.

When it can be proven that a tester did not complete their annual assessment themselves then DVSA will revoke the result and the tester is required to complete a further annual assessment and demo test before being allowed to return to testing.

6. Recording annual training

Testers are responsible for recording their training log on the MOT testing service (user’s profile page). Entries can only be made in the current training year (1 April to 31 March). These will be available to DVSA to review remotely.

The training record must include:

  • the date of the training
  • how long the training session lasted
  • what topics you covered during the session
  • notes on what you did, how you did it and what you learned

AEs must ensure that their testers’ training is up to date. Where a tester is assigned to more than one site, the AE cannot assume that other AEs have ensured the tester training records have been kept up to date.

You have to keep previous paper and electronic records (prior to those recorded on the MOT testing service) for 5 years. These must be made available to DVSA on request.

The training record must include:

  • the tester name and user ID
  • which groups the training covered
  • the date of the training
  • how long the training session lasted
  • what topics were covered during the session
  • notes on what you did, how you did and what you learned

7. Additional training

If the work of a tester reveals shortcomings in the required standards, DVSA may recommend that they carry out additional appropriate training. This may range from reading inspection manuals to sourcing external training support.

This recommendation does not prevent the tester from continuing to test, but failure to act upon it could decrease the value of anything put to DVSA in mitigation should formal disciplinary action against the tester be considered by DVSA within the following five years.

8. Demonstration tests

At various times, testers and prospective testers will be required to carry out an observed demonstration test to show that they are capable of testing in the required manner and applying the required standards.

Assessment of new and returning testers

The assessment of new testers, testers seeking to test additional classes and returning testers following a lapse in testing (see table above) will be scored using a major and minor error approach. Up to 5 questions will also be asked, incorrect answers will be marked as minors. If the demonstration is not completely satisfactory, counselling and advice may be given and written appropriate to the assessment result which will either be pass or fail as set out in Appendix 8.9: Major and minor errors demonstration test table.

Group A (class 1 and 2)

To pass the assessment the tester requires:

  • no major errors
  • no more than 4 minor errors in total across all sections
  • not to exceed the total minors allowed as noted in any one section

Group B (Class 3, 4, 5 and 7)

To pass the assessment the tester requires:

  • no major errors
  • no more than 6 minor errors in total across all sections
  • not to exceed the total minors allowed as noted in any one section

Assessment of continuing competence

A current tester may be requested by DVSA to carry out a demonstration test to monitor test standards and ensure continuing competence. Should this assessment not be completed satisfactorily, counselling may be given and written or disciplinary action may be taken in accordance with the disciplinary procedures (see Section I. Discipline).

Such demonstration tests will be scored using the points system set out in Appendix 8.3: Incorrect test methods.

If the candidate scores no more than 9 points

The assessment is considered to be satisfactory. However, counselling on any shortcomings should be noted.

If the candidate scores 10 to 39 points

The assessment is considered to have displayed minor shortcomings. However, counselling on any shortcomings should be noted and the tester should revise their knowledge and overcome the weaknesses noted. The tester may be required to carry out a further demonstration test for DVSA.

If the candidate scores 40 points or more

The assessment is considered to be unsatisfactory and this may result in disciplinary action.

9. Arranging a demonstration test

A demonstration test is arranged by filling in a demonstration test request form. This is for new or returning testers and testers that need a demo test following a training module to add an additional test class.

Before arranging the demonstration test, the candidate must be satisfied that they can competently test appropriate vehicles, can use the MOT testing service to obtain information, record and confirm test results both directly and indirectly using contingency testing.

Before requesting a demo test a candidate must record their MOT tester qualification certificate details onto the MOT testing service.

Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) checks

A basic Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) check must be submitted for each:

  • new tester (or an existing tester adding an additional test group, A or B)
  • tester returning after a disciplinary period of 28 days (short term cessation) or a 2 or 5 year cessation
  • tester returning after being lapsed or suspended

The DBS check must be dated within the 3 months leading up to the demonstration test.

Submit your DBS consent check code when you apply to book a demonstration test.

You can still book a test if:

After you apply to book your demonstration test, you’ll need to post all pages of your original DBS. Please attach a covering letter with your MOT user id, your full name, the Test Group you are requesting a demonstration test on (Group A classes 1 & 2 Group B 4 & 7) and the date you made the online request. Include a stamped addressed envelope for its return.

Original certificates will be sent back using your stamped address envelope. If you wish to have your documents returned by any other service, such as Royal Mail Special Delivery, you must provide a pre-paid envelope that can be purchased from a Post Office.

DVSA
MOT Hub
Broadway Business Park
Broadgate
Chadderton
Oldham
OL9 9XA

The request will be processed and the candidate will be later contacted by a DVSA examiner to arrange the demonstration test.

Ideally, the demonstration test should be carried out within one month of the training course to which it is linked.

At VTSs equipped with an automated test lane (ATL) or one person test lane (OPTL) the demonstration test must be conducted using an assistant with the equipment in the manual mode with additional questioning and/or demonstration to ensure the tester can test with and without an assistant as well as demonstrating competence in equipment operation.

10. Use of the MOT testing service

As part of (or in addition to) the demonstration test testers and prospective testers will be required to demonstrate satisfactorily that they can use the MOT testing service. In order to become a tester or continue to test a tester will be assessed using the criteria in Section E3. Ongoing requirements and on their ability to use the MOT testing service.

Where the satisfactory use of the MOT testing service has not been demonstrated the following action may be taken.

In the case of a prospective tester

Prospective testers will not be allowed to test until they have demonstrated satisfactory use of the MOT testing service.

In the case of an existing tester

Existing testers who have not demonstrated satisfactory use of the MOT testing service will be advised of their shortcoming and recommended that they carry out additional training in the use of the system in order to become proficient.

Testers who have difficulty in using the MOT testing service due to reading difficulties such as dyslexia should contact the DVSA customer service centre.

Contact DVSA

DVSA Customer Service Centre
enquiries@dvsa.gov.uk
Telephone: 0300 123 9000
Monday to Friday, 8am to 5pm
Find out about call charges

Appendix 7
Convictions and repute
Notifying DVSA of any convictions for individuals involved in the MOT scheme, how DVSA defines convictions and repute, what happens when DVSA are notified about convictions, what happens if you fail to notify DVSA of any convictions.

1. Convictions and repute general

Within the MOT scheme, it is important that the DVSA protect the public, DVSA staff, the integrity of the MOT scheme and the Agency. This includes preventing entry and removing any individual who should not be involved in the MOT scheme.

Any individual involved in the MOT scheme must be free of conviction and be of good repute as defined within this appendix.

Any individual involved includes:

  • AE principals (AEPs)
  • authorised examiner designated managers (AEDMs)
  • AE delegates (AEDs),
  • site managers (SMs)
  • site admin
  • testers
  • AE consultants (AECs)

2. Convictions general

The DVSA must be notified of all convictions as described in this appendix immediately for any individual involved in the MOT scheme. The responsibility to notify the DVSA of any conviction lies with both the AE and the individual who holds the role in the MOT scheme.

An AE is responsible for making the necessary checks on an individual prior to assigning them any role within their authorisation, ensuring they are free of any convictions as described in this appendix.

All notifications of conviction should be sent directly to MOT administration.

This includes cases where a conviction has taken place, but sentencing is pending.

When a sentence has been applied the notification must include a DBS certificate dated after the conviction. If sentencing has not been completed a court extract (or extract decree for Scottish convictions) must be included with the notification.

When the person has been sentenced, we will require a further DBS certificate (dated after sentencing).

MOT administration
MOTadministration@dvsa.gov.uk

3. Convictions criteria

The DVSA understand that certain convictions can be emotive in nature and as such DVSA will take into consideration any conviction which is defined to be a serious offence.

The DVSA considers a serious offence to be defined as any criminal conviction of an individual or business entity to which that individual had an association to, where any of the following has been imposed:

  • a prison sentence (including suspended sentences) of three months or more

  • a fine exceeding level 4 on the standard scale (currently £2500)

  • a community service order (or equivalent) requiring unpaid work for more than 60 hours

  • any punishment outside the UK corresponding to the above

If the conviction does not fall under these categories then the conviction will be considered acceptable for participation within the MOT scheme, unless there are grounds for consideration as part of an individual’s good repute.

4. Authorised examiner convictions outcomes

It is the responsibility of the authorised examiner (AE) to notify the DVSA immediately of any convictions, as described in this appendix, to any individual involved in the MOT scheme under their authorisation, this includes: AEPs (directors, partners and sole traders), AEDMs, AEDs, site managers, site admin and testers.

An AE must notify the DVSA and make the necessary arrangements to remove any individual immediately.

All notifications of conviction should be sent directly to MOT administration.

MOT administration
MOTadministration@dvsa.gov.uk

Once notified the approval to test will be ceased after 28 days unless the person who has the unacceptable conviction is removed or there is enough evidence of an application with continuity with intent to remove the individual.

A person cannot hold any role within the MOT scheme in any capacity until the conviction is considered spent under the relevant/current rehabilitation act.

Please refer to Appendix 8: Disciplinary procedures for all disciplinary outcomes.

5. Tester convictions outcomes

It is the responsibility of the tester to notify the AE and the DVSA immediately of any convictions as described in this appendix which they receive.

All notifications of conviction should be sent directly to MOT administration.

MOT administration
MOTadministration@dvsa.gov.uk

The individual cannot hold any role within the MOT scheme in any capacity until the conviction is considered spent under the relevant/current rehabilitation act.

Refer to Appendix 8: Disciplinary procedures for disciplinary outcomes

6. Failure to notify

Failure to notify the DVSA of any convictions, as described in this appendix, against any individual involved in the MOT scheme that would have resulted in the authorisation not being granted/removed or in the case of a tester the authorisation to test being refused/removed will result in immediate cessation action being taken against the authorisation and/or the tester.

Refer to Appendix 8: Disciplinary procedures for disciplinary outcomes.

7. Repute general

To participate in the MOT scheme any business, authorisation, site and any individuals involved must be of good repute, the DVSA may take into consideration any information available at any time, whether that is during an initial application or on going. The information available can be DVSA generated but can also be from other reputable sources of intelligence, such as but not limited to the police and other government bodies.

The DVSA interprets good repute as the ability to continually meet requirements and expected behaviours within the MOT scheme. Any individual must be a credible professional, any conduct or behaviour that could be considered unacceptable in the eyes of the public or the DVSA may deem a person to no longer being of good repute.

It is the responsibility of all individuals involved to be aware of and adhere to the requirements. The core principles that DVSA consider underpin good repute are:

  • Professionalism, the expected skills, judgement and behaviour of someone or a business carrying out a service/job

  • Integrity, trust, being honest

  • No negligence, failure to take proper care and manage

  • Responsibility, accept the results of your actions
  • Excellence, strive for quality

  • No evidence of repeated criminality or short comings within any DVSA service or scheme

8. Repute considerations

The DVSA can take into consideration any conduct or involvement in activities which could deem a person to no longer being of good repute. Any involvement in such activities or conduct may result in an authorisation to participate in the MOT scheme being declined or removed. This includes if the individual or business was directly involved in the activity/offence or facilitated or commissioned the activity/offence.

This may include but is not limited to:

  • previous and/or repeating failures to adhere to MOT testing service rules and/or test standards, regardless of the previous role or disciplinary outcomes

  • failure to follow DVSA guidance that has been reasonably requested

  • inability of DVSA and/or other enforcement officers to contact those in control of the MOT test station

  • failure to supply documents or data that is held and which have been reasonably requested

  • production of false documents to DVSA or MOT training providers

  • failure to comply with other government agencies such as HM Revenue and Customs or the police

  • removing or tampering with emissions equipment

  • tampering with a vehicle odometer

  • issuing fraudulent MOT certificates

  • other poor conduct such as a lack of co-operation or honesty

  • repeating criminality

  • convictions of the company/business

  • fraud

  • money laundering

  • fronting a garage

When considering repute, the DVSA may also take into consideration any convictions which may not have been considered in the convictions criteria. This would include any case where an individual or business has been convicted of an offence or where relevant intelligence information suggested involvement in relation to, but not limited to the following:

  • offences covered by the Fraud Act

  • offences covered by the Theft Act

  • offences covered by the Misuse of Computers Act

  • offences covered by the Money Laundering and Terrorism act

  • offences involving violence

  • offences of a sexual nature

  • offences concerning the operation of a business

  • offences involving dishonesty

  • offences resulting in incarceration

9.Repute outcomes

The DVSA will take into consideration all the information which is available. A decision on whether an individual and/or authorisation is of good repute will be based on that information.

If it is considered repute is lost disciplinary action may be taken, where it is considered that there is an immediate risk to road safety or the integrity of the MOT testing service immediate cessation action may also be taken.

Refer to Appendix 8: Disciplinary procedures for all disciplinary outcomes.

Appendix 8
Disciplinary procedures
Reasons for cessation of authorisation for authorised examiners and testers, informal appeal hearings, notice of cessations.

Test results

‘Recording a test result’ means either:

  • recording if the vehicle passed or failed its MOT on the MOT testing service
  • completing a CT20 or CT30 certificate if you’re carrying out a contingency test

1. Cessation without previous warning (single offence cessation)

A. Authorised examiners

Normally an authorised examiner’s (AE’s) authorisation will be subject to cessation for disciplinary reasons following a single instance of the types mentioned under sections 1, 2 and 3 below, whether committed by the AE or their employee or agent.

Where fraud has been committed, prosecution may be considered.

Authorisation may also be subject to cessation following a single instance of the types mentioned in sections 4 and 5 below, again whether committed by the AE or their employee or agent.

1. Fraud, dishonesty or gross negligence

Shortcoming Points
Improper recording on the MOT testing service of the test result of a vehicle or issue of a VT20 or a VT30 involving some act of fraud, including misuse of the MOT testing service, dishonesty, or gross negligence 500 points

For example:

  • a tester records a pass or fail test result without personally taking any active part in the examination of the vehicle
  • a duplicate VT20 is issued unjustifiably
  • unjustified changes are made to a test record
  • a bribe is accepted to record a pass result for a vehicle
  • the recording of a test result to vehicles which have attended a VTS in which their start and finish test time recorded in the MOT testing service would not allow a full examination to be carried out
  • CT20 or CT30 issued for vehicles when there was no contingency testing (CT) incident

2. Conviction

Shortcoming Points
Convictions, as defined in Appendix 7: Convictions and repute, to any persons involved in the MOT scheme under the authorisation 500 points

This includes:

  • AE principals (AEPs) - directors, partners, and sole traders
  • authorised examiner designated managers (AEDMs)
  • AE delegates (AEDs)
  • site managers (SMs)
  • site admin
  • testers

3. Repute

Shortcoming Points
Loss of good repute, as defined in Appendix 7: Convictions and repute 500 points

4. Other very serious offences

Shortcoming Points
a. A test is carried out by a person who is not properly authorised to carry out tests at the VTS - a person is properly authorised to test at a particular VTS if they are acceptable as set out in Section E - Tester 500 points
b. Testing is carried out on a vehicle that the VTS is not authorised to test. For example, wrong class or inappropriate emissions test group. The normal penalty will be reduced to 50 points if the vehicle is not obviously of a type that the VTS is not authorised to test provided that the documentation has not been incorrectly completed in a way that tends to disguise the vehicle’s correct classification 500 points
c. The improper recording of a pass result to a vehicle operated by, or on behalf of, the AE or which the AE has an interest in selling or seeking to sell 500 points
d. Assault (either physical or verbal) on, serious threats against, or deliberate intimidation of vehicle presenters or DVSA staff or contractors 500 points
e. Involvement in offering a service that undermines MOT test standards and/or the integrity of the MOT testing service, such as removing or bypassing emission control equipment or the clocking of odometer instruments 500 points
f. Testing of vehicles with major equipment known to be faulty or known to be out of calibration. Major items of equipment are defined in section D2 500 points

5. Other serious offences

The following single acts may also result in cessation of authorisation. If the circumstances are not considered sufficiently serious to justify single-case cessation then the penalty will be 100 points.

Shortcoming Points
a. Failure to notify DVSA of a conviction, as required in Section B4 - General responsibilities, to any persons involved in the MOT scheme under the authorisation, this includes: AEPs (directors, partners and sole traders), AEDMs, AEDs, site managers, site admin and testers, as defined in Appendix 7: Convictions and repute 500 or 100 points
b. Breaches of security leading to improper recording of a vehicle test result or where the system has been accessed. Or breaches of security that could enable unauthorised system access, such as passwords written down 500 or 100 points
c. False statement made on an application for authorisation. Confirming details when required to do so, that are known to be false 500 or 100 points
d. Failure to notify DVSA of a change in the constitution or operation of a business, a change to, or of an approved site, or the failure to cease testing after such a change pending DVSA’s written confirmation that testing may resume. Further information can be found in sections B3 - Cessation of authorisation and other changes to business and B4 - General responsibilities 500 or 100 points
e. The AE is no longer in control of the VTS or an AE ceased for disciplinary reasons is involved in the management of a VTS 500 or 100 points
f. A vehicle and/or tester are not present on the premises for the duration of time that a test is registered on the MOT testing service 500 or 100 points
g. Abuse or misuse of the MOT testing service free text option(s) which could cause loss of good repute to the MOT service -this provision will be used only in serious cases where urgent action is essential to preserve the integrity of the MOT service 500 or 100 points
h. The improper recording on the MOT testing service of a test outcome, or the failure to correctly record a test result, which may have caused a complaint about data integrity (where there is evidence of incorrectly identifying the true vehicle identity) 500 or 100 points
i. Other cases of loss of good repute as defined in Appendix 7: Convictions and repute 500 or 100 points
j. Deliberate obstructive behaviour towards vehicle presenters or DVSA staff or contractors 500 or 100 points

Examples of deliberate obstructive behaviour towards vehicle presenters or DVSA staff or contractors include:

  • failure to offer an appointment for a test within a reasonable period of a request, bearing in mind existing test bookings and the availability of the vehicle concerned
  • unjustified refusal to test a vehicle presented or to honour, within a reasonable time, an appointment previously made
  • refusal to allow a test to be watched
  • failure to allow or preventing a reinspection taking place where a reasonable request has been made
  • preventing a DVSA activity being conducted, as permitted in the MOT testing guide, that has been reasonably requested

B. Testers

Normally a tester will be subject to cessation if they are personally involved in any act that could lead to single offence cessation of the authorisation of an AE.

Where fraud has been committed, prosecution may be considered.

The points penalties for such acts are listed above for AEs. A tester will also usually be subject to cessation for acts of the type covered below.

Additionally it is normal practice for a tester to be subject to cessation where there are significant procedural omissions (e.g. non-use of designated equipment), and cessation may be applied for a single major incident of substandard testing that could have significant road safety implications.

Penalty points will be calculated from Appendices 8.1 to 8.3 and the action level determined in accordance with Appendix 8.8.

Additional very serious offences for testers

1. Fraud, dishonesty or gross negligence

Shortcoming Points
The improper recording of a pass result to a vehicle operated by, or on behalf of, the tester or which the tester has an interest in selling or seeking to sell 500 points

2. Conviction

Shortcoming Points
a. Conviction for any offence as defined in Appendix 7: Conviction and repute 500 points
b. Conviction for any offence involving violence or intimidation which DVSA considers could put customers or DVSA staff at risk 500 points

3. Repute

Shortcoming Points
Loss of good repute, as defined in Appendix 7: Conviction and repute 500 points

4. Other serious offences

Shortcoming Points
Production of false documents and/or false statements to DVSA or MOT training providers 500 points

2. Incorrect test standards

General

When investigating possible incorrect test standards DVSA will judge what the condition of the particular item would have been at the time of test. Points will be attributed based on what that condition was judged to be.

A single defect will not be double counted. For example, only one score is merited by a single area of corrosion covering adjacent body panels or components within 30cm of two critical components, but two separate areas of corrosion in a similar position draw a double score.

Disciplinary points

Disciplinary points will be awarded as follows for each defect when DVSA judges that the defect was in the condition described below at the time of test.

Shortcoming Points
1.Any defect categorised as dangerous within the relevant inspection manual that is missed on a testable item 40 points
2. Any defect categorised as major within the relevant inspection manual that is missed on a testable item 20 points
3. Item failed is not testable 20 points
4. Item failed has no defect (i.e. not a case involving an error of judgement) 20 points
5. Any defect categorised as minor within the relevant inspection manual that is missed or incorrectly added 10 points
6a. Error of judgement – dangerous defect (e.g. dangerous item ‘advised’, or ‘advisory’ item failed or wrong defect classification) 10 points
6b. Error of judgement – major defect (e.g. major failure item ‘advised’, or ‘advisory’ item failed or wrong defect classification) 5 points
6c. Error of judgement – minor defect (e.g. minor item ‘advised’, or ‘advisory’ item failed or wrong defect classification) 0 points

3. Incorrect test methods

Scoring methods

Items that the presenter may have difficulty observing during a mystery shopper check are marked with an asterix in the associated tables. DVSA will take this into account if disciplinary action is to be considered.

The following methods are used to report shortcomings noted during an observed test:

Major and minor error scoring method

The major and minor error scoring method will be used for:

  • new candidates who have attended a group A or group B testers training course
  • testers returning to testing following a 2 or 5 year cessation or following a lapse of 5 years and have successfully re-attended an initial tester training course
  • following a lapse in testing of six months
  • following the issue of a formal warning, short term cessation or wish to resume testing following a lapse of two years
  • when an additional test class is wanted (class 3 or 5)

Shortcomings of method noted during this type of assessment will be scored according to the major and minor errors demonstration table for group A and group B.

Disciplinary points error scoring method

The disciplinary points error scoring method will be used for the assessment of a tester to ensure continuing competence.

Shortcomings of method noted during this type of assessment will be scored according to the point tables for group A and group B.

Where no testable item within a section or sub-section is assessed the section or sub-section scores will be applied.

The term assistant for a VTS authorised to use an ATL or OPTL means the appropriate equipment used to replace the assistant.

Retests

The extent of test required is set out in Section B - Testing responsibilities. For such retests, disciplinary points will only be awarded for shortcomings in those parts of the test that you were required to do (excluding non-testable advisories).

Split testing

Split testing occurs when a tester records the test result but only personally assesses some of the testable items. For the remaining items, another person’s assessment is relied upon.

Items assessed by the other person will be considered as not examined, and the maximum points for those items will be limited to 50.

Tester recording the test result

The tester who records the result will be liable for:

  • incorrect test methods (whether by the tester or the other person)
  • inappropriate standards applied (whether by the tester or the other person)
  • items that were not examined at all

The penalty for failing to carry out the part of the test done by the other person will be subject to a maximum of 50 points.

Tester who carries out part of the test

The tester who carries out part of a test but allows another tester to record the test will receive disciplinary points for:

  • incorrect test methods in the part they conducted
  • incorrect test standards in the part they conducted

The penalty for failing to carry out the part of the test done by the other person will be subject to a maximum of 50 points.

Responsibility for test results

Only the score assigned to the tester who recorded the test result will be considered against the relevant AE (Authorised Examiner).

Seeking advice and guidance

Testers can seek advice from another tester in marginal decisions or when the second tester is more familiar with a particular vehicle type.

However, the tester conducting the test must make the final decision on whether to pass or fail a specific item.

Cases where the tester who recorded the test result had not personally made any of the pass/fail assessments are dealt with under Appendix 8.1.

4. Incorrect operation of testing scheme

General

A graduated sanction level will be applied for shortcomings in this section rather than following the traditional disciplinary points method. The levels will be applied consecutively for each occurrence within a 5-year period. The sanction may increase in severity on each occurrence, within 5 years.

The sanction levels to be applied are as follows.

Level 1 (L1)

Advice will be issued to the AE and/or tester in writing via an MOT advisory warning letter/notice and recorded as an MTS event.

Level 2 (L2)

Testing will be suspended until the case has been answered and rectified satisfactorily. Issued via a temporary suspension notice and recorded as an MTS event.

Level 3 (L3)

A disciplinary case will be submitted for:

  • previous or repeating failures to adhere to MOT testing service rules or test standards, regardless of the previous role or disciplinary outcomes
  • failure to follow DVSA guidance that has been reasonably requested
  • other cases of loss of good repute as defined in Appendix 7: Convictions and repute

Sanctions

The following table lists the graduated sanction level which will be applied to each shortcoming. Where more than one level sanction is noted both will apply.

All items and sanctions will be considered against the AE and/or tester.

A. Equipment calibration and maintenance

The level of action is determined by the number of occurrences of the shortcoming as indicated by levels L1, L2 or L3 in the columns.

Some test equipment requires periodic calibration checks, as defined in Appendix 2: Facilities and security. It is the AE’s responsibility to provide valid calibration records to DVSA staff. Failure to produce these records will result in the following sanctions being applied.

Shortcoming First occurrence Second occurrence Third occurrence Fourth or more occurrence
1. One or more items of equipment on which calibration is overdue or calibration certificate not available L2 L2 L2 and L3 L2 and L3

Where the calibration certificate is not available and there is no evidence to suggest the calibration is overdue or that the equipment is inaccurate, DVSA may permit pre-booked vehicles to be tested for no more than 24 hours before the suspension is applied.

Unless DVSA has been notified that testing has been suspended, test equipment which is clearly malfunctioning, inoperative or missing a mandatory upgrade/inspection, regardless of its calibration status, will also attract the following sanction level.

Shortcoming First occurrence Second occurrence Third occurrence Fourth or more occurrence
2. Any major items of equipment clearly unable to fulfill their prescribed testing functions or missing mandatory upgrade/inspection. For major items of equipment see section D L2 L2 L2 and L3 L2 and L3
3. Any equipment with minor faults where the defect may reduce the effectiveness or accuracy with which it carries out required testing functions, such as seized turn plates or defective play detectors - this shortcoming also covers missing or defective tyre tread depth gauges L1 L2 L2 and L3 L2 and L3

B. Other items

The level of action is determined by the number of occurrences of the shortcoming as indicated by levels L1, L2 or L3 in the columns.

Shortcoming First occurrence Second occurrence Third occurrence Fourth or more occurrence
1.Mandatory notices, and signs required by MOT guide not displayed in required manner or illegible L1 L2 L2 L2 and L3
2.Viewing area or access to it unusable or viewing facility provides a restricted view of all the testing area L1 L1 L2 L2 and L3
3.Emissions records not readily retrievable for previous 3 months L1 L1 L1 L3
4.An adequate appointment system was not provided on request. For example, full details of vehicle and presenter are not contained L1 L1 L1 L3
5. Displaying or asking customers to sign a loss or damage disclaimer L1 L1 L1 L3
6. Where a new vehicle record has been created on the MOT testing service, that does not match the presented vehicle and a test record has been recorded (where this is not covered in Appendix 8.1) L1 L1 L1 L3
7. Inappropriate reason for rejection or incorrect location recorded L1 L1 L1 L3
8. Incorrect manual entry of measured test values onto the MOT testing service, where overall test result remains unchanged (where the incorrect manual entry has been deliberately entered to change the overall test result, refer to Appendix 8.1) L1 L1 L1 L3
9. VT20/CT20 certificate or VT30/CT30 notice not issued when required or on request L1 L1 L1 L3
10. CT30 notice showing failures issued for non testable items L1 L1 L1 L3
11. Where the vehicle and tester are still on the premises - failure to register a vehicle at the start of the test and / or the result is not entered within one hour of the test being completed L1 L1 L1 L3
12. Charging more than the statutory fee for the class of vehicle tested L1 L1 L1 L3

C. Training

When records cannot be produced, or the produced records do not comply with the listed requirements the shortcomings will be subject to graduated sanctions that are applied to the AE and tester.

The level of action is determined by the number of occurrences of the shortcoming as indicated by levels L1, L2 or L3 in the columns.

Shortcoming First occurrence Second occurrence Third occurrence Fourth or more occurrence
1. One or more training year records incomplete, not completed correctly or not produced L1 L1 L1 L3

Where the tester has been in continuous service at the same VTS corresponding to the shortcoming and has received advice/advisory notice previously, consideration should be given to applying the same sanction to the AE. Testers with less than 4 weeks service with an AE should not impact the AE.

Shortcoming First occurrence Second occurrence Third occurrence Fourth or more occurrence
2. A tester not completing the annual assessment as required (completing the assessment without help or assistance), they will attract the following sanction level L2 L2 L2 and L3 L2 and L3

The tester will have to successfully complete the annual assessment and demo test before being allowed to return to testing.

5. Not in use

6. Normal sanction levels for testers

There are 4 normal sanction levels for testers:

  • advise
  • formal warning
  • short term cessation
  • cessation

Advise

The tester should be given advice if they have between 1 and 39 points from the current case.

Formal warning

The tester will be subject to a formal warning if they have:

  • 40 points or more for the current case
  • less than 50 points in total from the current case, unspent formal warnings, and unspent short term cessation

Short term cessation

The tester will be subject to a short term cessation if they have:

  • 40 points or more for the current case
  • between 50 and 99 points in total from the current case, unspent formal warnings and unspent short term cessation

Cessation

The tester will be subject to cessation if they have 500 or more points from Appendix 8.1 for the current case.

The tester will also be subject to cessation if they have:

  • 40 points or more for the current case
  • 100 points or more in total from the current case, unspent formal warnings, and unspent short term cessation

Normal sanction level for testers flow chart

Formula A

Formula A is the total number of points from:

  • the current case
  • unspent formal warnings
  • unspent short-term cessation.

Formal warnings and short-term cessations become spent after 5 years.

All relevant mitigation will be taken into consideration before deciding on any level of disciplinary action.

7. Normal sanction levels for authorised examiners

There are 4 normal sanction levels for authorised examiners:

  • advise
  • formal warning
  • short term cessation
  • cessation

Advise

The AE should be given advice if they have between 1 and 39 points from the current case.

Formal warning

The AE will be subject to a formal warning if they have:

  • 40 points or more for the current case
  • less than 140 points in total from the current case, unspent formal warnings, and unspent short term cessation

Short term cessation

The AE will be subject to a short term cessation if they have:

  • 40 points or more for the current case
  • between 140 and 199 points in total from the current case, unspent formal warnings and unspent short term cessation

Cessation

The AE will be subject to cessation if they have 500 or more points from Appendix 8.1 for the current case.

The AE will also be subject to cessation if they have:

  • 40 points or more for the current case
  • 200 points or more in total from the current case, unspent formal warnings, and unspent short term cessation

Normal sanction level for AEs flow chart

Formula A is the total number of points from:

  • the current case
  • unspent formal warnings
  • unspent short-term cessation

Formal warnings and short-term cessations become spent after 5 years.

All relevant mitigation will be taken into consideration before deciding on any level of disciplinary action.

8. Informal hearings

Notes for guidance and code of practice for informal hearings

Informal hearings foreword

These notes explain the procedures for informal hearings which may be held as part of the process of determining appeals from:

  • authorised examiners (AE), designated councils (DC), testers and designated council inspectors (DCI) who have been served with a statutory notice of cessation of their authorisation, designation or approval to test
  • applicants who have been served with a notice of intent to refuse their application for authorisation, designation or approval to test

These notes should be read in conjunction with Section D. Requirements for authorisation, Section E. Tester and Section I. Discipline.

The statutory requirements in relation to appeals are contained in the Motor Vehicles (Tests) Regulations 1981 as amended. The regulations provide that where those who have been served with a statutory notice wish to make representations to the effect that either:

  • their authorisation, designation or approval should not cease or should be restored
  • their application for authorisation, designation or approval to test should be approved

they should make such representations in writing within 14 days from the date of the notice (regulations 10 (1) (c) and 8 (9) respectively). All written representations or statements should fully set out your case and all the evidence you wish to rely upon. The availability of informal hearings does not affect the terms of the regulations.

Informal hearings provide an additional process whereby cases may be put personally to officials in DVSA’s appeals section.

Requests for a hearing

Requests for a hearing are at the discretion of DVSA and may be granted if there are exceptional circumstances.

If you wish to present your case at a hearing, you should submit your request preferably to the email address on the decision letter. We will accept postal hearing requests, however, this might cause a delay in processing the appeal if you use this method.

This request must be submitted as soon as possible after you have received the notice of cessation or intent to refuse to authorise, approve or designate. If a date for the hearing is offered by the Appeals team, you will be permitted to refuse the first date offered.

Who may attend the hearing

You may attend and/or be represented by your trade association, consultant or legal representative. The appeals section may arrange for DVSA personnel involved in the disciplinary or intended refusal action to attend the hearing where their evidence is at issue.

Prior to the hearing

An important element of this procedure is that the appeals officer must be fully aware of the relevant issues and arguments so that they can properly lead the discussion. Your written representations or statement should contain full particulars of the case you wish to make at the hearing including a list of any documents to which you wish to refer.

The provision of your written representations or statement within 14 days of the issue of the notice of cessation or intent to refuse is a necessary procedure. If you are appealing against a notice of cessation you may however, within the 14 day period, state in writing that you wish to rely, at hearing, on the written representations made earlier to the DVSA office that issued the decision.

To assist you the grounds of appeal have been categorised. The following list is not exhaustive, and it is recognised that there are some overlapping grounds:

  • the disciplinary procedures have not been followed by DVSA at each and every stage
  • the technical evidence is disputed
  • other evidence is disputed
  • the wrong interpretation has been placed upon the facts
  • the sanction imposed and/or the number of disciplinary points allotted is not in accordance with the MOT testing guide
  • the penalty is not proportionate to the offence
  • there are mitigating circumstances
  • the intent to refuse is unreasonable

The venue

Appeals will, where possible, be heard via Microsoft Teams. In extreme circumstances where this is not possible, we will consider conducting them in person at a mutually convenient location.

The hearing will be held by a senior officer of the appeals team who will have a thorough knowledge of the MOT service and the relevant procedures. The procedures will be fully explained to you at the start of, and throughout, the hearing.

The appeals officer will first set out the case as it appears from their reading of the papers, outlining what they consider are the main issues. In some cases, this might take the form of an agenda. They will also indicate those matters on which further information is needed. This will not preclude you from referring to other aspects you consider to be relevant.

All evidence will have been disclosed beforehand so that you will have had time to understand it and it will not normally be necessary to read this out at the hearing. If further documents are made available at the hearing the appeals officer may ask or allow questions on any points which emerge which may need further information or clarification.

The hearing will take the form of a discussion which you or your representative will be invited to start. You may, if you wish, decline to do so. The parties will be encouraged to ask questions informally throughout the proceedings, subject only to the discussion being conducted in an orderly manner.

Cross-examination will not be permitted unless the appeals officer considers that cross-examination is required to ensure a thorough examination of the main issues. You will be given the opportunity to make any final comments before the hearing is closed.

If a hearing needs to be adjourned this will be at the discretion of the officer holding the hearing. If a date for the resumption of the hearing cannot be set at the time of the adjournment, the date will be notified to the appellant within 5 working days.

The appeals officer may close the proceedings if, at any time during the hearing, matters are in their judgement not progressing satisfactorily. The appeal will then be determined on the basis of any written representations submitted. Full reasons for the closure of the hearing will be given in the appeal decision letter.

A recording will be made of the hearing (audio only). A copy of the recording and a transcript will be available as evidence in the event of subsequent court proceedings.

The decision

Decisions will not be made at the hearing as they are made by DVSA’s chief executive on behalf of the Secretary of State. The administrative target for determining appeals after hearings will be the same as that for appeals determined by written representations - 95% of appeals to be determined within 5 weeks.

In the case of written representations, the target date is calculated from the date the written representations are received. The target date following a hearing will be calculated from the date of the hearing. The decision letter will be issued by the appeals section on the date the appeal is determined.

Notice of cessation - effective date of cessation

If you wish your case to be heard at a hearing you should bear in mind that it is unlikely that your appeal can be determined prior to the notice of cessation becoming effective. The date the notice comes into effect cannot be deferred pending the outcome of the appeal. Whilst the appeals section will try to determine your appeal as quickly as possible, there may be a period during which you/your testing station must cease testing pending the determination of the appeal.

9. Major and minor errors for class 1 and 2 (group A) demonstration tests

The following tables are for use during observed demonstration tests.

For further details see Appendix 6.8: Demonstration tests.

The tester should personally assess the following items during a demonstration test. They will be awarded major or minor errors if they do not. Testers will also be asked questions on procedures, standards, and vehicles classes within this test group.

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Defect missed on a testable item 1 major error
2. Item failed is not testable or has no defect 1 major error
3. Motorcycle not correctly identified or entered onto MOT testing service correctly. 1 major error
4. Candidate unable to correctly use test facilities 1 major error
5. Candidate unable to answer a question correctly 1 minor error

Section 0 - Identification of vehicles

The tester should personally assess the following items during a demonstration test. They will be awarded major or minor errors if they do not.

Rear registration plates

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check rear registration plate for compliance, condition and security 1 minor error per check omitted

Vehicle identification number - VIN

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check vehicle identification number 1 minor error

Section 1 - Brakes

The tester should personally assess the following items during a demonstration test. They will be awarded major or minor errors if they do not.

Brake controls

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Did not check the presence, security and condition of the foot brake and handlebar brake lever and mountings 1 minor error per control
2. Did not check the brake pedal and lever for wear on pivots, reserve travel, or damage and smoothness of operation 1 minor error per control
3. Did not check hydraulic systems, a control for creep under load or for sponginess of operation 1 minor error per control

Brake systems

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Did not check the brake disc for condition 1 minor error one or more discs not checked
2. Did not check mechanical brake components 1 minor error per item not checked
3. Did not check hydraulic brake components 1 minor error per item not checked
4. Did not check the hydraulic brake components while held under pressure for leaks and hose bulging 1 major error no system pressure checks carried out

1 minor error one or more pressure checks not done

Use of equipment

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Did not carry out the brake test using the appropriate test using the appropriate, approved, brake test equipment 1 major error
2. Unable to correctly use the brake testing equipment 1 major error

Brake performance checks

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Did not carry out a brake test on the primary system 1 major error
2. Did not carry out a brake test on the secondary system 1 major error
3. Did not ascertain the weight of the machine 1 minor error
4. Did not calculate the brake efficiency 1 minor error

Roller brake tester

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Did not hold the front brake steady at about half the maximum reading and check for fluctuation 1 minor error
2. Did not hold the rear brake steady at about half the maximum reading and check for fluctuation 1 minor error

Sidecar brake, if applicable

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check side car brake 1 major error

Brake fluid reservoir

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check transparent reservoirs for contaminated fluid 1 minor error

Section 2 - Steering

The tester should personally assess the following items during a demonstration test. They will be awarded major or minor errors if they do not.

Steering controls

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not assess steering controls/system 1 major error
Did not raise front of machine from floor 1 major error
Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Did not check handlebars/grips/clamps/fork yoke for security, condition or weakness. 1 minor error
2a. Lock to lock check: did not check for fouling fixed parts or impede controls 1 minor error
2b. Lock to lock check: did not check whether control cables/hydraulic hoses were pulled taught on full lock 1 minor error
2c. Lock to lock check: did not check security and adjustment of steering lock stops 1 minor error
2d. Lock to lock check: did not check security of steering damper (where fitted) 1 minor error
2e. Lock to lock check: did not check for engine speed change during lock to lock check 1 minor error

Steering system

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1a. Did not check steering head bearing for tightness and roughness 1 minor error
1b. Did not check steering head bearing for free play 1 minor error

Wheel alignment

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check wheel alignment 1 major error
1. Did not fully complete all elements of wheel alignment check 1 minor error
2. Did not check alignment of sidecar relative to motorcycle (if fitted) 1 major error - no alignment completed
1 minor error - vertical alignment not assessed

Section 4 - Lamps and reflectors

The tester should personally assess the following items during a demonstration test. They will be awarded major or minor errors if they do not.

Headlight aim and use of headlamp aim equipment

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Headlamp aim tester not used to assess headlamp aim 1 major error
2. Headlamp tester not correctly aligned to the headlamp being tested 1 minor error - one or more lamps incorrectly aligned
3. Headlamp aim checked on the incorrect beam 1 minor error - one or more lamps checked on incorrect beam
4. Did not check light source and lamp are compatible 1 minor error

Lights including, headlamps, front and rear position lamps, stop lamp, indicators, reflectors , number plate lamps

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Did not check and assess all front and rear lights 1 major error
1a. Did not check and assess all front and rear lights for operation 1 minor error - one or more system operation not checked
1b. Did not check and assess all front and rear lights for security 1 minor error - one or more unit security not checked
1c. Did not check and assess all front and rear lights for condition 1 minor error - one or more unit condition not checked

Lighting switch(es), indicator switch and tell-tale(s)

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Did not check and assess a switch/control 1 major error
1a. Did not check and assess a switch/control for operation 1 minor error per switch or control not checked
1b. Did not check and assess a switch/control for security 1 minor error per switch or control not checked
1c. Did not check and assess a switch/control for condition 1 minor error per switch or control not checked

Section 5 - Wheels, tyres and suspension

The tester should personally assess the following items during a demonstration test. They will be awarded major or minor errors if they do not.

Wheel bearings

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Did not check condition of the front and rear wheel bearings by rocking the wheel. (Check wheel bearing on any side car) 1 minor error - one or more bearings not checked
2. Did not check condition of the front and rear wheel bearings by spinning the wheel. (Check wheel bearing on any side car) 1 minor error - one or more bearings not checked

Wheels

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Did not check road wheels 1 major error
1a. Did not check front road wheel for security 1 minor error for one or more checks not carried out
1b. Did not check front road wheel for condition of wheel/spokes 1 minor error for one or more checks not carried out
1c. Did not check front road wheel for buckling / eccentricity 1 minor error for one or more checks not carried out
2a. Did not check rear road wheel for security 1 minor error for one or more checks not carried out
2b. Did not check rear road wheel for condition of wheel/spokes 1 minor error for one or more checks not carried out
2c. Did not check rear road wheel for buckling / eccentricity 1 minor error for one or more checks not carried out

Tyres

1. Did not check tyres 1 major error
1a. Did not check tyre for type and suitability 1 minor error per tyre not checked
1b. Did not check tyre for condition, correct fitment 1 minor error per tyre not checked
1c. Did not check tyres on twin wheels are not of a different structure 1 minor error
1d. Did not check tyres on twin wheels are not different sizes 1 minor error
2. Did not check tyres for signs of fouling of tyres on other components 1 minor error - one or more tyre not checked for fouling

Sidecar when fitted

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not assess sidecar when fitted 1 major error
Did not check the sidecar wheel / tyre condition 1 minor error

Suspension

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not assess suspension 1 major error
1. Did not check suspension components 1 major error - front of machine not raised from floor
1 major error - rear of machine not raised from floor
1a. Did not check suspension components for security 1 minor error
1b. Did not check suspension components for condition (including suspension joint dust covers) 1 minor error
1c. Did not check suspension components for presence (note rear suspension is not mandatory on motorcycles) 1 minor error
1d. Did not check suspension components for any unsafe modifications 1 minor error
2. Did not check shock absorbers 1 major error
2a. Did not check shock absorbers for security 1 minor error
2b. Did not check shock absorbers for presence 1 minor error
2c. Did not check shock absorbers for operation 1 minor error

Section 6 - Structure and attachments

The tester should personally assess the following items during a demonstration test. They will be awarded major or minor errors if they do not.

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not assess condition of structure 1 major error
1. Did not check the structure for cracks/damage/distortion/corrosion 1 minor error - one or more areas not checked
2. Did not check joining/attachment plates or fastenings for security 1 minor error - one or more areas not checked

Exhaust system

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not assess exhaust system 1 major error
1. Did not check security, condition and completeness of the exhaust system 1 minor error
2. Did not check silencer for any unacceptable markings 1 minor error

Fuel system

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not assess fuel system 1 major error
1. Did not check fuel tank (s), all visible fuel hoses, pipes, unions and system components for damage, leaks or insecurity 1 minor error
2. Did not check fuel tank cap for presence and effectiveness 1 minor error

Transmission

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check transmission related components, condition and operation 1 minor error

Engine mountings (only when engine is a stressed member)

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check for presence, condition and excessive movement 1 minor error

Seats

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check the presence and security of the seats 1 minor error

Clutch and throttle controls

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Did not check operation of throttle controls 1 minor error
2. Did not check condition and operation of clutch control 1 minor error

Footrests

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check condition and security of machines footrests 1 minor error

Section 7 - Audible warning

The tester should personally assess the following items during a demonstration test. They will be awarded major or minor errors if they do not.

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not asses audible warning (horn) 1 major error
1a. Did not check and assess a switch/control for operation 1 minor error
1b. Did not check and assess a switch/control for security 1 minor error
1c. Did not check and assess a switch/control for condition 1 minor error

Section 8 - Nuisance

The tester should personally assess the following items during a demonstration test. They will be awarded major or minor errors if they do not.

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not assess exhaust noise 1 major error
1. Did not check noise from exhaust (at approximately half maximum engine speed) 1 minor error
2. Did not check security of exhaust 1 minor error

10. Major and minor errors for class 3, 4, 5 and 7 (group B) demonstration tests

The following tables are for use during observed demonstration tests.

For further details see Appendix 6.8: Demonstration tests.

The tester should personally assess the following items during a demonstration test. They will be awarded major or minor errors if they do not. Testers will also be asked questions on procedures, standards, and vehicles classes within this test group.

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate major or minor errors
1. Defect missed on a testable item 1 major error
2. Item failed is not testable or has no defect 1 major error
3. Vehicle not correctly identified or entered onto MOT testing service correctly 1 major error
4. Candidate unable to correctly use test facilities 1 major error
5. Candidate unable to answer a question correctly 1 minor error

Section 0 - Identification of vehicles

The tester should personally assess the following items during a demonstration test. They will be awarded major or minor errors if they do not.

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check front and rear registration plates 1 major error
1. Did not check condition and security of front registration plate 1 minor error - one or more registration plate not checked (1, 2, 3) capped at 1 error
2. Did not check condition and security of rear registration plate 1 minor error - one or more registration plate not checked (1, 2, 3) capped at 1 error
3. Did not check front and rear number plates match 1 minor error - one or more registration plate not checked (1, 2, 3) capped at 1 error

Vehicle identification number

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check vehicle identification number 1 minor error

Section 1 - Brakes

The tester should personally assess the following items during a demonstration test. They will be awarded major or minor errors if they do not.

Parking brake mechanism

For class 5, you should also refer to Section 11.

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Did not check the presence, security and condition of parking brake lever or control 1 minor error
2. Did not check handbrake components 1 minor error

Service brake mechanism, servo, ABS, ESC system

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Did not check service brake control for condition, security, creep or sponginess 1 minor error
2. Did not check service brake control for condition and operation of the vacuum servo with the engine running 1 minor error
3. Did not check and assess a warning lamp for correct operation 1 minor error
4. Did not check brake system components, hoses and pipe work with the brake system pressurised and engine running in the case of servo assisted brakes 1 major error - no system pressure checks carried out
5. Did not check systems for mechanical wear whilst being operated. 1 minor error
6. Did not check brake fluid for contamination 1 minor error

Prescribed areas

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check relevant vehicle bodywork within a prescribed area 1 minor error one or more check not done

Use of equipment

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not carry out the brake test using the appropriate test using the appropriate and approved brake test equipment 1 major error

Performance checks

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Did not carry out a service brake test 1 major error
2. Did not carry out a test on front service brakes 1 major error
3. Did not check maximum effort on each wheel 1 minor error - one or more maximum effort not assessed
4. Did not check unapplied effort with both wheels rotating 1 minor error - one or more unapplied effort not assessed
5a. Did not run both the front wheels together and gradually increase and release the brake effort and assess grabbing 1 minor error for one or more checks not carried out (a, b, c, d) – capped at 1 error
5b. Did not run both the front wheels together and gradually increase and release the brake effort and assess lag in operation 1 minor error for one or more checks not carried out (a, b, c, d) – capped at 1 error
5c. Did not run both the front wheels together and gradually increase and release the brake effort and assess fluctuation in brake effort 1 minor error for one or more checks not carried out (a, b, c, d) – capped at 1 error
5d. Did not run both the front wheels together and gradually increase and release the brake effort and assess imbalance 1 minor error for one or more checks not carried out (a, b, c, d) – capped at 1 error
6. Did not carry out a test on rear service brakes 1 major error
7. Did not check maximum effort on each wheel 1 minor error - one or more maximum effort not assessed
8. Did not check unapplied effort with both wheels rotating 1 minor error - one or more unapplied effort not assessed
9a. Did not run both the rear wheels together and gradually increase and release the brake effort and assess grab or judder 1 minor error for one or more checks not carried out (a, b, c, d) – capped at 1 error
9b. Did not run both the rear wheels together and gradually increase and release the brake effort and assess uneven application 1 minor error for one or more checks not carried out (a, b, c, d) – capped at 1 error
9c. Did not run both the rear wheels together and gradually increase and release the brake effort and assess uneven release 1 minor error for one or more checks not carried out (a, b, c, d) – capped at 1 error
9d. Did not run both the rear wheels together and gradually increase and release the brake effort and assess imbalance 1 minor error for one or more checks not carried out (a, b, c, d) – capped at 1 error
10. Did not record the maximum reading for each wheel and carry out the service brake efficiency calculation when appropriate 1 minor error
11. Did not check brake performance test on a vehicle with servo assisted or power brakes with engine idling 1 minor error
12. Did not carry out a test on the parking brake 1 major error
13. Did not record maximum reading for each wheel (parking brake) 1 minor error - one or more maximum effort not assessed
14. Did not carry out the parking brake efficiency calculation when appropriate 1 minor error

Section 2 - Steering

The tester should personally assess the following items during a demonstration test. They will be awarded major or minor errors if they do not.

Steering control and system

For class 5, you should also refer to Section 11.

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Did not assess steering control for excessive free play 1 minor error
2. Did not assess operation of steering lock(when required) 1 minor error
3. Did not asses electronic power steering operation and warning/fly by wire operation 1 minor error

Steering system

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Did not check steering components for condition and security whilst assistant ‘rocked’ the steering wheel firmly against the resistance of the road 1 minor error
2. Did not check the operation/condition of the power steering system components which could be inspected from under vehicle, while the engine was running 1 minor error
3. Did not check steering for fouling and condition, with the suspension in normal running position, front wheels turned lock to lock on unlocked turning plates (if appropriate for suspension type) 1 minor error
4. Did not check sector shaft condition, (if applicable) steering gear fixing holes elongated 1 minor error

Section 3 - Visibility

The tester should personally assess the following items during a demonstration test. They will be awarded major or minor errors if they do not.

View to rear

For class 5, you should also refer to Section 11.

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check interior mirror or indirect vision device for presence, security and condition 1 minor error

Wiper and washers system

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1a. Did not check operation and effectiveness of wipers 1 minor error
1b. Did not check operation and effectiveness of washers 1 minor error

View to the front, windscreen and view of obligatory exterior mirrors

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Did not check drivers view of the road through windscreen swept area 1 minor error
2. Did not check driver’s view of obligatory exterior mirror or mirrors 1 minor error

Wiper blades

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check wiper blades for condition and security 1 minor error - one or more wiper blade not checked

Exterior mirrors

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check exterior mirror for presence, security and condition 1 minor error - one or more exterior mirror not checked

Bonnet

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Did not check bonnet security, condition of retaining devices 1 minor error

Section 4 - Lamps, reflectors and electrical equipment

The tester should personally assess the following items during a demonstration test. They will be awarded major or minor errors if they do not.

Lighting switch(s), indicator switch and tell-tale(s)

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not assess lighting switch(es), indicator switch and tell-tale(s) 1 Major error
1a. Did not check and assess a switch/control for operation 1 minor error per switch or control not checked (a, b, c) – capped at 1 error
1b. Did not check and assess a switch/control for security 1 minor error per switch or control not checked (a, b, c) – capped at 1 error
1c. Did not check and assess a switch/control for condition 1 minor error per switch or control not checked (a, b, c) – capped at 1 error

Lights including front and rear position lamps, stop lamps, indicators, reflectors, DRL’s, reversing lamps, front fog lamps, marker lamps where appropriate

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not assess lights including front and rear position lamps, stop lamps, indicators, reflectors, DRL’s, reversing lamps, front fog lamps, marker lamps where appropriate 1 major error
1a. Did not check and assess all front and rear lights for operation (also not affected by other lights) 1 minor error - one or more cluster operation not checked
1b. Did not check and assess all front and rear lights for security 1 minor error - one or more cluster operation not checked
1c. Did not check and assess all front and rear lights for condition 1 minor error - one or more cluster operation not checked

Headlight aim and use of headlamp aim equipment

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Headlamp aim tester not used to assess headlamp aim 1 major error
2. Headlamp tester not correctly aligned to the headlamp being tested 1 minor error - one or more lamps incorrectly aligned
3. Headlamp aim checked on the incorrect beam 1 minor error - one or more lamps checked on incorrect beam
4. Did not check HID and LED headlamps for mandatory levelling and cleaning devices 1 minor error
5. Did not check light source and lamp are compatible 1 minor error

Electrical wiring and battery

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Did not check battery for condition and security 1 minor error
2. Did not check condition and security of all visible wiring 1 major error no assessment carried out
1 minor for one or more areas of visible wiring not checked
3. Did not check tow bar socket as required for security, condition and operation 1 minor error

Section 5 - Axles, wheels tyres and suspension

The tester should personally assess the following items during a demonstration test. They will be awarded major or minor errors if they do not.

Jacking of vehicle – front

For class 5, you should also refer to Section 11.

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Front of vehicle not jacked 1 major error
2. Did not check suspension components with front end of vehicle appropriately jacked for suspension type 1 minor error - one or more sides not checked and/or jacked appropriately
3. Did not check suspension components using a suitable bar under the wheel 1 minor error - one or more sides not checked and/or jacked appropriately

Wheel bearings – front

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Did not check condition of the front wheel bearings and suspension components by the rocking wheel 1 minor error - one or more sides not assessed
2. Did not check condition of the front wheel bearings by spinning the wheel 1 minor error - one or more sides not assessed

Jacking of vehicle – rear (N/A for large vehicles DGW over 5000kg)

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Rear of vehicle not jacked 1 major error
2. Did not check condition of the rear wheel bearings and suspension components by rocking wheel. 1 minor error - one or more sides not assessed

Wheels

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check road wheels 1 major error
Did not check road wheel security and condition 1 minor error for one or more road wheels not checked

Tyres

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check tyres (including load and speed rating - class 5 and 7 only) 1 major error
1. Did not check tyre for condition, correct fitment and type, including structure and size 1 minor error for one or more tyres not checked
2. Did not check tyres for fouling a part of the vehicle. 1 minor error for one or more tyres not checked
3. Did not check tyre pressure monitoring system (when fitted) for malfunctioning or tyre obviously underinflated 1 minor error

Suspension

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Suspension checks done without the engine running in the case of hydro pneumatic suspension 1 minor error
2. Did not check suspension components for fouling and condition, with the suspension in normal running position, front wheels turned lock to lock on unlocked turning plates (if appropriate for suspension type) 1 minor error
3. Did not check suspension components for condition whilst the front wheels are rocked at the 3 and 9 o’clock position with the front wheels resting on unlocked swivel plates (if appropriate for suspension type) 1 minor error
4. Did not check that spring is not missing 1 minor error

Shock absorbers

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check presence, security and condition of shock absorbers 1 minor error - one or more not assessed

Section 6 - Body structure and attachments

The tester should personally assess the following items during a demonstration test. They will be awarded major or minor errors if they do not.

Structure and attachments

For class 5, you should also refer to section 11.

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Did not check vehicle structure for fracture, damage, corrosion outside prescribed areas 1 minor error - one or more areas not checked
2. Did not check if the strengthening plates or fastenings are insecure 1 minor error - one or more areas not checked

Exhaust

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Did not check security of the exhaust system 1 minor error
2. Did not check system components for leaks with the engine running. 1 minor error
3. Did not check that fumes are not entering cab 1 minor error

Fuel system including cap(s)

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Did not check visible fuel hoses, pipes and system components security and condition 1 minor error
2. Did not check fuel system components for leaks (including holes above the fuel line) 1 minor error
3. Did not check fuel tank cap/filler neck condition and seal 1 minor error
4. Did not check for any part of the LPG/CNG/LNG or hydrogen system defective 1 minor error
5. Did not check that any missing heat shield does not present a fire risk 1 minor error

Bumper

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check security and any damage not likely to cause injury 1 minor error

External Spare wheel carrier (if fitted)

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check security of spare wheel and carrier 1 minor error

Coupling mechanisms and towing equipment

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Did not check tow bar and mountings 1 minor error
2. Did not check operation of tow bar coupling indicator 1 minor error

Transmission

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not asses transmission 1 major error
a) Did not check and inspect all prop shafts 1 minor error per component not checked (a, b, c, d) – capped at 1 error
b) Did not check and inspect all drive shafts 1 minor error per component not checked (a, b, c, d) – capped at 1 error
c) Did not check and inspect all prop shaft and drive shaft couplings and bearings 1 minor error per component not checked (a, b, c, d) – capped at 1 error
d) Did not check and inspect all drive chains or belts 1 minor error per component not checked (a, b, c, d) – capped at 1 error

Engine mountings

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check engine mounts for presence, condition and security 1 minor error

Body and interior

This inspection is for all vehicles and includes:

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
a) Did not check all body panels 1 minor error; one or more areas not assessed (a, b, c, d) – capped at 1 error
b) Did not check undertrays 1 minor error; one or more areas not assessed (a, b, c, d) – capped at 1 error
c) Did not check spoilers 1 minor error; one or more areas not assessed (a, b, c, d) – capped at 1 error
d) Did not check mirror housings 1 minor error; one or more areas not assessed (a, b, c, d) – capped at 1 error

Cab and body mounting (vehicles with a separate body and/or cab)

Check cab/body for:

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
a) Did not check security 1 minor error; one or more areas not assessed (a, b, c) – capped at 1 error
b) Did not check mountings 1 minor error; one or more areas not assessed (a, b, c) – capped at 1 error
c) Did not check corrosion at mounting points 1 minor error; one or more areas not assessed (a, b, c) – capped at 1 error

Doors (drivers, passengers & emergency doors/exits)

Check:

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
a) Did not check all doors will not open using the relevant control and close properly 1 major error - one or more doors not assessed
b) Did not check a door hinge, catch or pillar for presence and condition 1 minor error - one or more areas not assessed

Seats

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check seat security 1 major error
1. Did not check driver and all passenger seats for security 1 minor error for one or more front seat security not checked
2. Did not check all seat backrests for security in upright position 1 minor error for one or more rear seat security not checked
3. Did not check driver’s seat for fore and aft adjustment 1 minor error if not checked

Cab steps (If fitted)

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check if a cab step or step ring is secure and not likely to cause injury 1 minor error per component not checked

Handgrips and footrests (quads and trikes)

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check if a handgrip or footrest missing or insecure 1 minor error

Section 7 - Other equipment

The tester should personally assess the following items during a demonstration test. They will be awarded major or minor errors if they do not.

Seat belts and supplementary restraint systems (SRS)

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check seat belts 1 major error
a) Did not check all seat belts fitted for condition and operation (functioning as intended) 1 minor error
b) Did not check all seat belts fitted for security 1 minor error
c) Did not check all seat belts fitted are of the correct type 1 minor error
Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
a) Did not check seat belt load limiter not missing or deployed 1 minor error
b) Did not check seat belt pre-tensioner not missing or deployed 1 minor error
c) Did not check for fitment and condition of airbags 1 minor error

Anti-theft device (if appropriate)

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check if steering lock missing or not functioning correctly 1 minor error

Audible warning horn

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1a. Did not check and assess a switch/control for operation 1 minor error per switch or control not checked (a, b, c) – capped at 1 error
1b. Did not check and assess a switch/control for security 1 minor error per switch or control not checked (a, b, c) – capped at 1 error
1c. Did not check and assess a switch/control for condition 1 minor error per switch or control not checked (a, b, c) – capped at 1 error

Speedometer

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check speedometer fitment, condition, illumination and operation if road test carried out 1 minor error

Electronic stability control (ESC)

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not assess electronic stability control (ESC) 1 major error
Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
a) Did not check wheel speed sensors 1 minor error per switch, component, sensor wiring or warning not checked
b) Did not check ESC wiring 1 minor error per switch, component, sensor wiring or warning not checked
c) Did not check if other ESC component missing or damaged 1 minor error per switch, component, sensor wiring or warning not checked
d) Did not check if ESC switch damaged or not functioning correctly 1 minor error per switch, component, sensor wiring or warning not checked
e) Did not check if ESC MIL indicates a system malfunction 1 minor error per switch, component, sensor wiring or warning not checked

Section 8 - Nuisance

The tester should personally assess the following items during a demonstration test. They will be awarded major or minor errors if they do not.

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not assess noise suppression system 1 major error
a) Did not check that the exhaust noise levels are not excessive 1 minor error
b) Did not check security of the noise suppression system 1 minor error
c) Did not inspect exhaust silencers and under bonnet sound deadening material 1 minor error

Engine emissions control equipment

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
a) Did not check original emission control equipment is not missing, obviously modified or defective 1 minor error
b) Did not check for induction or exhaust leak that could affect emissions 1 minor error
c) Did not check for evidence that a diesel particulate filter has been tampered with 1 minor error

Use of equipment - emission procedure

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Did not carry out emissions test using the appropriate, approved equipment 1 major error
2. Carried out an inappropriate emissions test e.g. Cat test of non cat vehicle 1 major error
3. Used incorrect limits 1 major error

Test pre-checks

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
1. Did not ensure the vehicle has clearly reached normal temperature before carrying out an exhaust check 1 minor error
2. Omitted a stage (including elements of pre checks on diesels) in the emissions test appropriate to the vehicle 1 minor error for one or more stage omitted

Fluid leaks

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check for fluid leaks 1 minor error

Section 9 - Supplementary tests for buses and coaches

The tester should personally assess the following items during a demonstration test. They will be awarded major or minor errors if they do not.

Doors

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not asses doors 1 major error
1a. Did not check entrance and exit doors for operation 1 minor error
1b. Did not check entrance and exit doors for condition 1 minor error
1c. Did not check entrance and exit doors for operation of emergency control condition 1 minor error
1d. Did not check entrance and exit doors for operation of remote control or warning device 1 minor error
2a. Did not check operation of emergency exits 1 major error
2b. Did not check if emergency exit does not meet requirements 1 minor error
2c. Did not check emergency exits for presence of break glass hammer where applicable 1 minor error
2d. Did not check emergency exits for presence/access to emergency exit 1 minor error

Passenger grab handles

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check for presence and condition of a passenger grab handle 1 minor error

Steps and Stairs

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check condition of steps and stairs 1 major error
Did not check operation of retractable step 1 major error

Section 10 - Seat belt installation checks

Notes only.

Section 11 - Additional information for class 5 vehicles

The tester should personally assess the following items during a demonstration test. They will be awarded major or minor errors if they do not.

Driving controls

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not assess driving controls 1 major error
a) Did not check clutch 1 minor error
b) Did not check accelerator 1 minor error
c) Did not check gear selector 1 minor error

Brake performance

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
a) Did not check if the correct weight has been used in any brake performance calculation 1 minor error if not calculated correctly
b) Did not carry out applied brake test (if appropriate) 1 minor error

Steering

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
Did not check that tester is aware that use of turning plates is not mandatory for class 5 vehicle but they should be used if suitable 1 minor error

Visibility

Checks and assessments not completed by the candidate Major or minor errors
a) Did not check if windscreens and windows on either side of the driver’s seat made from safety glass 1 minor error
b) Did not check if all other windows made from safety glass or safety glazing 1 minor error

11. Disciplinary points for class 1 and 2 (group A)

Items that the presenter may have difficulty observing during a mystery shopper check are marked with an asterix in the associated tables. DVSA will take this into account if disciplinary action is to be considered.

1. Using the designated MOT inspection area

Shortcoming Points
Failure to use the designated MOT inspection area for the mechanical inspection 30 points

2. Using an assistant

Shortcoming Points
Failure to use an assistant when necessary so that an effective inspection was not carried out. 30 points

With motor bicycles, testers can check some items satisfactorily without the use of an assistant. A score will be allocated if the non use of an assistant meant that the item was not checked properly. In cases like this, score it as if the check had not been carried out.

3. Sit on machine

Shortcoming Points
No testable item personally assessed by tester 40 points

The tester should personally assess the following items. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they do not.

Shortcoming Points
Did not assess the operation of a switch or control 3 points per switch/control
Did not assess the security of a switch or control 3 points per switch/control
Did not assess the condition of a switch or control 3 points per switch/control
Did not assess the handlebars for security or weakness 3 points
Did not assess the handlebars for fouling fixed parts 3 points per side
Did not assess whether the control cables or hydraulic hoses were pulled taught on full lock 3 points per lock
Did not assess the security of any steering damper that was fitted 3 points
Did not assess the security and adjustment of the steering lock stops 3 points
Did not assess the steering from lock to lock 3 points
Did not assess the effectiveness of the front suspension damping 3 points
Did not assess the condition and security of the foot brake/handlebar brake lever and mountings 3 points per control
Did not assess the foot brake or handlebar brake lever for wear on pivots/reserve travel/damage/ smoothness of operation 3 points per control
In the case of hydraulic systems, did not assess a control for creep under load or for sponginess of operation 3 points per control
Did not assess the effectiveness of the rear suspension damping 3 points

4. Checks made at the front of the machine

Shortcoming Points
No testable item personally assessed by the tester 50 points

4.1 Failure to raise the front of the machine

Shortcoming Points
Failure to raise the front of the machine 25 points

The tester should personally assess the following items. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they do not.

Shortcoming Points
Did not assess the condition of the head bearing 3 points
Did not assess the security of the front wheel 3 points
Did not assess the front wheel for buckling and eccentricity 3 points
Did not assess the condition of the front wheel/spokes 3 points
Did not assess the condition of the front wheel bearings 3 points
Did not assess the condition of the front tyre throughout its full circumference 3 points
Did not assess the front tyre for fouling and fitment 3 points
Did not assess the front brake disc for condition/run out 3 points
Did not assess the steering from lock to lock 3 points

4.2 Further checks at the front of the machine

The tester should personally assess the following items. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they do not.

Shortcoming Points
Did not assess the security of the front mudguard 3 points
Did not assess the mechanical brake components 3 points per item
Did not assess the hydraulic brake components 3 points per item
Did not assess the hydraulic brake components whilst under pressure 3 points per item
Did not assess the condition of the front fork assembly 3 points per item
Did not assess the operation of lights 3 points per system
Did not assess the security of lights 3 points per unit

The tester should use the following resources. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they do not.

Shortcoming Points
Did not use the approved headlamp aim tester to check the headlamp aim 20 points
Did not use an assistant seated on the machine whilst checking the headlamp aim 3 points
Did not use the approved headlamp aim standing area 8 points
Did not use an appropriate method to align the headlamp aim tester to the headlamp being tested 3 points

5. Sides of the machine

Shortcoming Points
No testable item personally assessed by the tester 50 points

The tester should personally assess the following items. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they do not.

Shortcoming Points
Did not assess the exhaust system for suitability/effectiveness/security 3 points
Did not assess the engine running 3 points
Did not assess the structure for cracks, damage, distortion and corrosion 3 points
Did not assess the machine for defects likely to impede the rotation of the rear wheel 3 points
Did not assess the security of the seats 3 points
Did not assess the security of the footrests 3 points
Did not assess the condition and security of the foot brake lever and mountings 3 points
Did not assess the brake pedal lever for wear on pivots/ reserve travel/ damage/ smoothness of operation 3 points
Did not assess the mechanical brake components 3 points
Did not assess the hydraulic brake components 3 points per item
Did not assess the hydraulic brake components whilst under pressure 3 points per item
Did not assess the wheel alignment 30 points

6. Checks made at the rear of the machine

Shortcoming Points
No testable item personally assessed by the tester 40 points

6.1 Failure to raise the rear of the machine from the floor

Shortcoming Points
Failure to raise the rear of the machine from the floor 20 points

The tester should personally assess the following items. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they do not.

Shortcoming Points
Did not assess the machines registration plate 3 points
Did not assess for play in the rear suspension 3 points
Did not assess the rear wheel security 3 points
Did not assess the condition of the rear wheel/spokes 3 points
Did not assess the condition of the rear wheel bearings 3 points
Did not assess the condition of the rear tyre throughout its full circumference 3 points
Did not assess the rear tyre for fouling and fitment 3 points
Did not assess the rear tyre for suitability 3 points

6.2 Further checks at the rear of the machine

The tester should personally assess the following items. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they do not.

Shortcoming Points
Did not assess the operation of lights 3 points per system
Did not asses the security of lights 3 points per unit

7. Brake test

Shortcoming Points
Tester did not carry out the brake performance test using the appropriate and approved brake test equipment 60 points

The tester should personally assess the following items. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they do not.

Shortcoming Points
Did not carry out a brake test on the front brake control 40 points
Did not carry out a brake test on the rear brake control 40 points
Did not ascertain the weight of the machine 3 points
Did not calculate the brake efficiency 3 points
Did not correctly use the brake testing equipment 3 points
Did not hold the front brake steady at about half the maximum reading and check for fluctuation (RBT only) 3 points
Did not hold the rear brake steady at about half the maximum reading and check for fluctuation (RBT only) 3 points
Did not check the sidecar brake, where applicable 40 points

8. Sidecar, when fitted

Shortcoming Points
No testable item assessed by the tester 40 points

The tester should personally assess the following items. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they do not.

Shortcoming Points
Did not assess the sidecar for security and presence of fixing devices 6 points
Did not assess the suspension for freedom of movement/ condition/ security 3 points
Did not assess the condition of the wheel bearings with the sidecar wheel raised 3 points
Did not assess the sidecar wheel and tyre condition 3 points
Did not assess the alignment of the sidecar relative to the motorcycle 30 points

12. Disciplinary points for class 3, 4, 5 and 7 (group B)

Items that the presenter may have difficulty observing during a mystery shopper check are marked with an asterix in the associated tables. DVSA will take this into account if disciplinary action is to be considered.

1. Interior

Shortcoming Points
No testable item personally assessed by tester 40 points

The tester should personally assess the following items. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they do not.

Shortcoming Points
Did not assess the operation of a switch/control 3 points per switch/control
Did not assess the security of a control 3 points per control *
Did not assess the condition of a control 3 points per control *
Did not assess the steering control for excessive free play 3 points
Did not assess the steering lock operation 3 points
Did not assess the service brake control for creep/ sponginess 3 points *
Did not assess the service brake control for servo operation 3 points
Did not assess a warning lamp for correct operation 3 points *
Did not assess the fitment and condition of the speedometer 3 points *
Did not assess the fitment and condition of airbags 3 points *
Did not assess the drivers seat fore and aft adjustment 3 points
Did not assess a seatbelt for condition and operation 3 points per belt
Did not assess the drivers or front passengers seat for security 3 points per seat *
Did not assess a seat back for security in the upright position 3 points per seat *
Did not assess an obligatory mirror or indirect vision device for presence, security and condition 3 points *
Did not assess the drivers and front passengers door for opening from inside and secure latching in the closed position 3 points per door
Did not assess the passenger entrance/ exit doors and emergency exits (class 5 only) 3 points per door
Did not assess the bodywork within a prescribed area 3 points per area

The tester should use the correct tools during the assessment. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they.

Shortcoming Points
Use the corrosion assessment tool incorrectly 3 points
Use an unauthorised tool to assess corrosion 3 points

2. Front of the vehicle

Shortcoming Points
No testable item personally assessed by tester 40 points

The tester should personally assess the following items. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they do not.

Shortcoming Points
Did not assess the operation of the lights 3 points per system
Did not assess the security of the lights 3 points per unit
Did not assess the condition and security of the front registration plate 3 points *
Did not assess the headlamp aim using the approved headlamp aim tester 20 points
Did not assess the alignment of the headlamp tester correctly for the headlamp aim check 3 points per unit
Did not assess the headlamp aim on the correct beam 3 points per unit
Did not assess the headlamp aim with the engine running (hydropneumatic suspension only) 3 points
Did not assess HID or LED headlamps for mandatory levelling and cleaning device 3 points
Did not assess the vehicle bodywork within a prescribed area 3 points per area

The tester should use the correct tools during the assessment. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they.

Shortcoming Points
Use the corrosion assessment tool incorrectly 3 points
Use an unauthorised tool to assess corrosion 3 points

3. Sides of the vehicle - exterior ground level

Shortcoming Points
No testable item personally assessed by tester 30 points per side

The tester should personally assess the following items. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they do not.

Shortcoming Points
Did not assess the operation/security of the direction indicator side repeater 3 points per side
Did not assess the wiper blade for condition and security 3 points per blade
Did not assess the security of a road wheel 3 points per wheel
Did not assess the condition of a tyre 3 point per tyre
Did not assess obligatory exterior mirror(s) for presence, security and condition 3 points per mirror
Did not assess the front and rear doors for opening from outside 3 points per door
Did not assess the front and rear doors for secure latching in the closed position 3 points per door
Did not assess passenger entrance and exits steps for operation and security (class 5) 3 points per door
Did not assess the fuel filler cap condition and seal 3 points
Did not assess the body for security 3 points
Did not assess the body for sharp projections 3 points *
Did not assess the externally fitted spare wheel and its carrier for security 3 points
Did not assess the bodywork within a prescribed area 3 points per area

The tester should use the correct tools during the assessment. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they.

Shortcoming Points
Use the corrosion assessment tool incorrectly 3 points
Use an unauthorised tool to assess corrosion 3 points

4. Rear of the vehicle

Shortcoming Points
No testable item personally assessed by tester 30 points

The tester should personally assess the following items. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they do not.

Shortcoming Points
Did not assess the operation of the lights 3 points per system
Did not assess the security of the lights 3points per unit
Did not assess that lights were not affected by other lights 3 point
Did not assess the condition and security of the rear registration plate 3 points *
Did not assess the vehicle bodywork within a prescribed area 3 points per area
Did not assess the towbar or its mountings 3 points
Did not assess the towbar socket for security, condition and operation 3 points
Did not assess any electrical wiring for security and condition 3 points

The tester should use the correct tools during the assessment. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they.

Shortcoming Points
Use the corrosion assessment tool incorrectly 3 points
Use an unauthorised tool to assess corrosion 3 points

5. Luggage/load compartment

Shortcoming Points
No testable item personally assessed by tester (when testable items could not be assessed without inspecting inside the compartment 15 points

The tester should personally assess the following items. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they do not.

Shortcoming Points
Did not assess the luggage/load compartment access for security in the closed position 3 points

In the case of testable items which could not be inspected other than from within the luggage compartment the tester did not personally assess:

Shortcoming Points
Did not assess the condition/security of any seat belt within the luggage compartment 3 points per belt *
Did not assess theall visible fuel hoses, pipes and system components for leaks, security and condition 3 points *
Did not assess the electrical wiring for security and condition 3 points *
Did not assess the bodywork within a prescribed area 3 points per area

The tester should use the correct tools during the assessment. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they.

Shortcoming Points
Use the corrosion assessment tool incorrectly 3 points
Use an unauthorised tool to assess corrosion 3 points

6. Under vehicle bonnet

Shortcoming Points
No testable item personally assessed by tester 40 points

6.1 Using an assistant

Shortcoming Points
No assistant was used to operate the controls 25 points

The tester should personally assess the following items. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they do not.

Shortcoming Points
Did not assess the steering components for condition and security while the assistant ‘rocked’ the steering wheel firmly against the resistance of the road wheels 6 points ( 3 points per side)
Did not assess the braking system for leaks from components with the system pressurised 3 points
Did not assess the condition and operation of the vacuum servo with the engine running 3 points
Did not assess the operation/condition of the power steering while the engine was running 3 points
Did not assess the braking system for mechanical wear whilst being operated 3 points

6.2 Further under vehicle bonnet checks

The tester should personally assess the following items. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they do not.

Shortcoming Points
Did not assess the exhaust system components for leaks with the engine running 3 points
Did not assess the fuel system for leaks with the engine running 3 points
Did not assess the fuel system for leaks with the engine not running 3 points
Did not assess the battery for condition and security 3 points
Did not assess the electrical wiring for condition and security 3 points *
Did not assess the engine mounts for presence, condition and security 3 points*
Did not assess the bodywork within a prescribed area 3 points per area

The tester should use the correct tools during the assessment. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they.

Shortcoming Points
Use the corrosion assessment tool incorrectly 3 points
Use an unauthorised tool to assess corrosion 3 points

7. Under vehicle

Shortcoming Points
No testable item personally assessed by tester 100 points
The approved lift or pit was not used 40 points

7.1 Under vehicle checks using an assistant

Shortcoming Points
An assistant was not used 40 points

The tester should personally assess the following items. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they do not.

Shortcoming Points
Did not assess the steering components for condition and security whilst an assistant ‘rocked’ the steering wheel firmly against resistance of the road wheels 6 points (3 points per side)
Did not assess the operation/condition of the power steering system components, which could only be inspected from the under the vehicle, while the engine was running 3 points
Did not assess the steering and suspension components for fouling and condition with the suspension in the normal running position and the front wheels turned from lock to lock on unlocked swivel plates if appropriate for suspension type 6 points (3 points per side)
Did not assess the steering and suspension components for condition whilst the front wheels were rocked at the 3 o’clock and 9 o’clock position with the front wheels resting on the unlocked swivel plates if appropriate for suspension type 6 points (3 points per side)
Did not assess the brake hoses and pipe work with the braking system pressurised and the engine running in the case of servo assisted brakes 3 points per hose plus 3 points per fixed pipe system

7.2 With the front of the vehicle jacked up

Shortcoming Points
Personally assessed no testable item with the front of the vehicle jacked up 40 points

The tester should personally assess the following items. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they do not.

Shortcoming Points
Did not assess the suspension components etc. with the front end of the vehicle jacked in the manner appropriate to the suspension type 6 points (3 points per side) *
Did not assess the suspension components using a suitable bar under the wheel 3 points per side *
Did not assess the condition of the tyres 3 points per tyre*
Did not assess the condition/security of the front wheel drive shaft and couplings 3 points per side *
Did not assess the condition of the front wheel bearings and suspension components by rocking the wheel 3 points per side
Did not assess the condition of the front wheel bearings by spinning the wheel 3 points per side
Did not assess the condition of the CV gaiters 3 points per side *

7.3 With the rear of the vehicle jacked up

Shortcoming Points
Personally assessed no testable item with the rear of the vehicle jacked up 15 points

The tester should personally assess the following items. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they do not.

Shortcoming Points
Did not assess the condition of the tyres 3 points per tyre *
Did not assess the condition of the rear wheel bearings by spinning the wheel 3 points per side
Did not assess the condition of the rear wheel bearings by rocking 3 points per side

7.4 Further under vehicle checks

The tester should personally assess the following items. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they do not.

Shortcoming Points
Did not assess the handbrake components 3 points *
Did not assess the exhaust system for leaks and effectiveness with the engine running 3 points
Did not assess the electrical wiring for condition and security 3 points *
Did not assess the bodywork within a prescribed area 3 points per area

The tester should use the correct tools during the assessment. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they.

Shortcoming Points
Use the corrosion assessment tool incorrectly 3 points
Use an unauthorised tool to assess corrosion 3 points

8. Brake test

Shortcoming Points
Tester did not carry out the brake performance test using the appropriate and approved brake test equipment 60 points
Shortcoming Points
Tester did not personally carry out a brake test on the service brake 45 points

8.1 Front service brakes

The tester should personally do the following checks. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they do not.

Shortcoming Points
Did not carry out a brake test on the front service brakes 35 points
Did not check maximum effort on each wheel in turn (both wheels run together on ATL) 3 points per wheel
Did not check unapplied effort with both wheels rotating 3 points per wheel *
Did not run the front wheels together and gradually increase and decrease the brake effort to assess grab or judder; uneven application; uneven release; imbalance 3 points per check

8.2 Rear service brakes

The tester should personally do the following checks. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they do not.

Shortcoming Points
Did not carry out a brake test on the rear service brakes 30 points
Did not check maximum effort on each wheel in turn (both wheels run together on ATL) 3 points per wheel
Did not check unapplied effort with both wheels rotating 3 points per wheel *
Did not run the rear wheels together and gradually increase and decrease the brake effort to assess grab or judder; uneven application; uneven release; imbalance 3 points per check

8.3 Other service brake tests

The tester should personally do the following checks. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they do not.

Shortcoming Points
Did not record the maximum reading for each wheel and carry out the service brake efficiency calculation when appropriate 3 points
Did not carry out the brake performance test on a vehicle with servo assisted or power brakes, with the engine idling 3 points

8.4 Parking brake

The tester should personally do the following checks. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they do not.

Shortcoming Points
Did not carry out a brake test on the parking brake 20 points
Did not check maximum effort on each wheel 3 points per wheel
Did not carry out the parking brake efficiency calculation when appropriate 3 points

9. Emissions test

Shortcoming Points
Tester did not carry out the emissions test using the appropriate and approved equipment 40 points
Shortcoming Points
Carried out an inappropriate emissions test, for example a catalyst test instead of a non catalyst test 20 points
Selected incorrect limits 15 points

The tester should personally do the following checks. They will be awarded disciplinary points if they do not.

Shortcoming Points
Did not ensure that the vehicle had clearly reached normal operating temperature before carrying out an exhaust emissions check 3 points
Did not carry out a stage (including elements of pre-checks on diesels) in the emissions test appropriate to the vehicle 3 points per stage
Updates
MOT testing guide for test stations

2026

9 January 2026

B. Authorised examiners

3. Cessation of authorisation and other changes to businesses – updated 'Transfer of records following cessation or disciplinary action' to add: "Where disciplinary action results in a 2 or 5-year cessation of all sites held by the AE, any individual, partner or officer of a company is not permitted to hold any role within an AE and/or Vehicle Testing Station for the cessation period."

5. Testing responsibilities – updated 'Viewing the test' to add that you are required to provide an adequate viewing facility for customers.

D. Requirements for authorisation

1. Authorised examiner – updated 'Cessation for disciplinary reasons' to add: "If an AE has received a 2 or 5 year disciplinary cessation of all their sites, none of the associated AEPs will be able to hold any role within another AE and/or Vehicle Testing Station during the cessation period."

E. Tester

1. General – added "If a tester receives a 2 or 5 year disciplinary cessation, they will not be able to hold any role within an Authorised Examiner and/or Vehicle Testing Station during the cessation period."

I. Discipline

4. Underlying principles - authorised examiners – added "If an Authorised Examiner has received a 2 or 5 year disciplinary cessation of all their sites, none of the associated AEPs will be able to hold any role within another Authorised Examiner and/or Vehicle Testing Station during the cessation period. Requesting or accepting any MOT roles during this period could result in the loss of their good repute as defined in Appendix 7. It could also affect any future application to re-enter the MOT scheme following cessation."

M. System rules and user roles

2. Getting a role – updated the list of bullet points to include: "have not been subject to disciplinary action that would prevent them from holding any role in the MOT testing service".

2025

10 December 2025

A. Introduction

Changes made to quadricycle vehicle types and how they are defined. A definition for heavy quadricycles has been added.

13 November 2025

D. Requirements for authorisation

3. Class 1 and 2 vehicles – updated 'Brake testing' to clarify the decelerometer requirements for garages testing class 2 vehicles.

Appendix 2: Facilities and security

4. Equipment calibration – added "suitably qualified maintenance engineer or calibration specialist" to the list of who is suitable to carry out maintenance of equipment.

23 October 2025

Appendix 2: Facilities and security

Updated 'Equipment maintenance, calibration and records' to include inspection of steering and suspension play detectors on ATLs and OPTLs.

3 October 2025

D. Requirements for authorisation

4. Class 3 and 4 vehicles – Premises, test bay and equipment layout: added a note to the lift section about changes to jacking equipment specifications from 1 April 2026. These changes apply if you open a new MOT centre or make changes to an existing centre from 1 April 2026.

4. Class 3 and 4 vehicles – Connected equipment: removed class 3 from the table.

Appendix 6: Tester training and demonstration tests

8. Demonstration tests – Assessment of new and returning testers: changed the number of questions asked from 10 to 5.

Appendix 7: Convictions and repute

2. Convictions general – added 'This includes cases where a conviction has taken place, but sentencing is pending. When a sentence has been applied the notification must include a DBS certificate dated after the conviction. If sentencing has not been completed a court extract (or extract decree for Scottish convictions) must be included with the notification. When the person has been sentenced, we will require a further DBS certificate (dated after sentencing).'

8. Repute considerations – added 'offences resulting in incarceration' to the list of offences that impact on repute.

1 April 2025

D. Requirements for authorisation

Sections 4, 5 and 6 – updated the BS reference numbers for lifts.

E. Tester

Section 2. Eligibility for becoming a tester – removed the need to bring a DBS certificate to the demonstration test.

I. Discipline

Section 10. Disciplinary action flow chart – updated the flowchart to show that the threshold for disciplinary action is 40 points.

Appendix 6: Tester training and demonstration tests

Section 8. Demonstration tests – updated 'Assessment of continuing competence' as the threshold for disciplinary action is now 40 points.

Appendix 8: Disciplinary procedures

Sections 6 and 7 – changed the disciplinary points threshold from 30 points to 40 points.

Sections 3, 11 and 12 – changed the disciplinary points allocated to shortcomings.

8.3 Split testing -–clarification on points applied to testers and other person involved in the test.

2024

29 November 2024

B. Authorised examiners

4. General responsibilities – removed content from 'Premises and equipment'. Site managers no longer need to inform DVSA when the calibration of a piece of equipment that requires it has expired.

H. Documentation

5. Retention of documentation – added "If emissions records are not available, DVSA could consider that an emission test was not conducted."

I. Discipline

7. Formal disciplinary procedure – added new content about the fast track process.

M. System rules and user roles

5. Vehicle test station roles – updated the section 'Tester' to clarify that it's the tester's responsibility to make sure the equipment they use when conducting a test meets the mandatory requirements.

5 August 2024

D. Requirements for authorisation

Updated 1. Authorised examiner, section 'How to apply to become an AE' with information about third parties submitting applications on behalf of an AE.

Updated 4. Class 3 and 4 vehicles, 5. Class 5 vehicles and 6. Class 7 vehicles, sections on 'Who needs connected equipment' with information on repairs for combined units.

M. System rules and user roles

Updated 8. MOT Testing Service System Security to say everyone with a user ID and role must not have more than one MOT testing Service account/user id.

Appendix 6: Tester training and demonstration tests

Appendix 6 Section 9 Arranging a demonstration test - updates on sending an original DBS certificate with a request for a demo test.

Appendix 7: Convictions and repute

Updated 3. Convictions General, removed the word 'unspent'. This section refers to all convictions that have been received and includes those which are spent and unspent.

Updated 7. Repute General added more information on what is included in good repute.

Appendix 8: Disciplinary procedures

Appendix 8 Disciplinary procedures, paragraph 10 Major and minor errors for class 3,4,5 and 7 (group B demonstration tests).
Performance checks, points 3 and 7. Removal of words 'in turn'.

2 April 2024

Appendix 2: Facilities and security

2. Signs and notices –
removed the reference to the Business Names Act.It has been repealed and replaced with Companies House Act 2006 and 2015.

4. Equipment calibration –
Updated the paragraph about calibration expiry dates. Changed 'For roller brake testers (RBTs), plate brake testers (PBTs), automated test lane (ATL) weighing facility, motorcycle weighing equipment (where applicable) and headlamp aim testers the calibration expiry date will be taken as the month end date where certificates only show the month and year of expiry' to 'For roller brake testers (RBTs), plate brake testers (PBTs), automated test lane (ATL) weighing facility, motorcycle weighing equipment (where applicable) and headlamp aim testers, the calibration expiry date will be taken as the month end date. For example, a certificate showing an expiry date of 15 July 2024 will be taken as 31 July 2024'

Appendix 6: Tester training and demonstration tests

Updated section 6 (Recording annual training) as from 1 April 2024, MOT testers must record their annual training on the MOT testing service. They must also keep previous paper and electronic records (prior to those recorded on the MOT testing service) for 5 years.

9 February 2024

B. Authorised examiners

Updated section 3 (Cessation of authorisation and other changes to businesses) as you can now fill in an online form to tell DVSA that you are surrendering your AE authorisation or closing an MOT centre.

L. Accounts and fees

Updated section 6 (MOT accounts) as you can now fill in an online form to request a slot refund and to tell DVSA you are closing an MOT centre.

8 January 2024

D. Requirements for authorisation

2. Premises – updated the paragraph on the use of digitally relayed images for viewing areas. The monitor must be available to view the test when requested by the vehicle presenter. The relayed images cannot be interrupted or used for other purposes during that period, for example displaying advertisements.

2. MOT testing signs and notices – added 'If the notice board displays both MOT and business documents, there must be clear and distinct separation between the MOT documents and any documents not related to MOT testing.'

Appendix 2: Facilities and security

3. Notice board – updated to add "If the notice board displays both MOT and business documents, there must be clear and distinct separation between the MOT documents and any documents not related to MOT testing."

Appendix 6: Tester training and demonstration tests

9. Arranging a demonstration test – updated the information about Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) checks when booking a demonstration test.

2023

6 December 2023

Abbreviations and definitions

MOT Manager – AED removed.

Notify DVSA – fax removed.

A. Introduction

Purpose and scope of the test – updated to add that the electronic record of an MOT is the legal record of that test. The test result is lawful once the test has been recorded on the MOT testing service or a CT20 test certificate has been issued during contingency testing. The vehicle testing station does not need to automatically issue a paper record of the test.

Added information about the MOT history check service and the MOT reminder service.

Test classes – added category N1 to class 4.

Classes 4 and 7 – changed '4 x 4 pickup vehicles with a DGW over 3000kg up to and including 3500kg are to be considered dual purpose vehicles for test purposes where no unladen weight data is available' to '4 x 4 pickup and crew cab type vehicles with a DGW over 3000kg up to and including 3500kg are to be considered dual purpose vehicles for test purposes where no unladen weight data is available if they meet all other criteria in either option A or option B detailed within Section 2.2 Dual purpose vehicles.

B. Authorised examiners

Replaced references to the issue of test certificates with references to recording a test result on the MOT testing service.

Retests (Re-examinations) – changed 'In such cases the VT30 for the original fail must be endorsed to the effect that the seat belt installation check has been passed' to 'In such cases the VT30 for the original fail must be endorsed or a non-component advisory should be recorded to the effect that the seat belt installation check has been passed'.

C. Designated councils, taxis and private hire vehicles

Removed references to the issue of VT20 and VT30 MOT certificates. The electronic record of an MOT is the legal record of that test.

D. Requirements for authorisation

Changes to businesses – DVSA must now be told within 28 calendar days about any significant changes to the control or operation of the business.

Updated information about changes made to the members of an Authorised Examiner.

Roller brake tester standing area for classes 4, 5 and 7 – updated to include that where part of the roller brake test vehicle standing area is located outside of the building, the standing area must not encroach any public thoroughfare.

Premises – changed from:

- a clearly identified weatherproof public waiting room or area from which the whole test can be directly observed without interruption, except for road testing (room for 2 seated people is considered sufficient)
- mirror or camera relayed images may be acceptable if all parts of the test can be clearly observed as it would from an enclosed viewing area with window - consideration should be given to the quality of image produced by the equipment used including during variable light conditions - the use of recording equipment (CCTV) is unacceptable
- the observation room or area should be identified by a notice and floor markings if applicable - there should also be a notice in reception indicating the presence of a viewing area.

to:

- a clearly defined weatherproof viewing area from which all stages of the MOT test in progress can be observed safely without interruption, except for road testing (room for 2 seated people is considered sufficient)
- a sign installed in the customer reception area to alert presenters of vehicles for MOT tests of the presence of the MOT viewing area
- safe access from the customer reception to the designated viewing area if the viewing area is to be located in the workshop

Alternatively, you may opt to install a fixed display monitor in the customer reception or waiting area to display camera relayed ‘live feed’ images of the whole of the test bay area. The image displayed on the monitor must be in colour and of good quality but must not be recorded.  The monitor must be identified as the MOT viewing facility/area and must not be used for any other purpose.

Supplementary monitors (such as portable handheld devices) are acceptable only when a fixed viewing monitor is also available and functional.

MOT testing signs and notices – changed from:
An MOT notice board with a protective transparent covering so positioned that DVSA notices can easily be read by anyone submitting vehicles for test. The board must be of sufficient size to accommodate at least one A3 fees poster (landscape) and one certificate of authorisation (portrait).

to:

A notice board with a protective transparent covering positioned inside the vehicle testing station so that DVSA notices can be easily read by any persons intending to or submitting vehicles for test.

The MOT notice board must not be obscured or be inaccessible and must be of sufficient size to accommodate at least one A3 fees poster (landscape) and one Certificate of Authorisation (A4 portrait). It must not be used for any other purpose other than official DVSA MOT notices and company public liability insurance and certificates of incorporation.

All authorised examiners (AEs) must display:

- the certificate of authorisation (VT9) issued by DVSA
- the current fees and appeals poster (form VT9A) showing vehicle classes, test fees and appeals procedure and the details of how to contact DVSA

Delays to authorisation – updated to include that the applicant may be contacted by email.

Evidence of exclusive use – updated to clarify that the letter must be signed by a solicitor of the firm you appoint.

Acceptable variations to layout and equipment – changed 'a test certificate is issued' to 'recorded on the MOT testing service'.

F. Driver and Vehicle Standards Agency

DVSA role – changed 'updating and maintaining access to MOT test related documentation' to 'updating and maintaining access to digital MOT test records and test related documentation'.

G. Vehicle presenters

Updated to reflect that the electronic record of an MOT is the legal record of that test.

Changed 'Statutory appeal against the issue of a VT30' to 'Statutory appeal against the refusal to pass a test'.

Changed 'An owner or presenter of a vehicle has the right to appeal against a decision to refuse to issue a test certificate following an MOT examination' to 'An owner or presenter of a vehicle has the right to appeal against a decision to refuse to pass a test following an MOT examination'.

Changed 'Complaint against the issue of a VT20' to 'Complaint against the decision to pass a test'.

Changed 'An owner or presenter of a vehicle has the right to complain against the issue of a test certificate' to 'An owner or presenter of a vehicle has the right to complain against the decision to pass a test following an MOT examination.'

H. Documentation

Replaced references to a 'VT20 pass certificate' and 'VT30 refusal to issue' with references to a pass or fail test outcome and the digital vehicle test record as the definitive result.

VT9 - Authorisation of an examiner – you can now apply for a replacement VT9 certificate online if you have lost or damaged the original.

Duplicate test documents – updated to clarify that test certificates can be downloaded from the check MOT history service for free.

I. Discipline

Underlying principles – added 'When considering the outcome of disciplinary cases, DVSA will also consider if the good repute of an AE (including any individuals who is part of the AE) and a tester has been lost. Where good repute has been lost, any affected individual(s) will be unable to hold any role within the MOT testing service.

Where this occurs, DVSA will notify any authorisations that are affected by this loss of good repute, advising that the individual(s) concerned can no longer be involved in MOT testing operations. For further information about repute, see [Appendix 7: Convictions and repute](https://www.gov.uk/guidance/mot-testing-guide/appendix-7-convictions-and-repute)'.

Disciplinary action – multiple amendments to change terminology from the issue of the paper test certificate to the outcome of the MOT test.

Appeals against cessation – updated 2 of the bullet points in the list of grounds for appeal:

- 'the penalty is not proportionate to the offence - for example, cited formal warnings or previous short-term cessation letters are disputed' has been changed to 'the penalty is not proportionate to the offence'
- removed 'the conditions imposed are unreasonable'

J. Vehicle prohibitions

Prohibitions general – replaced references to test certificates with references to MOT test outcomes.

K. Police vehicle defect rectification scheme (VDRS)

Vehicle defect form – changed 'When a police officer finds a fault on any vehicle that is, or will be, required to have an MOT test certificate' to 'When a police officer finds a fault on any vehicle that is, or will be, required to pass an MOT test'.

L. Accounts and fees

VAT, credit card payments and appeal fees – changed 'The fee payable to DVSA for an appeal against the refusal of a test certificate is the maximum fee for the appropriate vehicle class' to 'The fee payable to DVSA for an appeal against the decision to fail an MOT test is the maximum fee for the appropriate vehicle class'.

Class 4A and 5A retests – changed 'The tester issuing the original VT30 must endorse it to the effect that the seat belt installation check standards have been met and showing the number of belts installed' to 'The tester who conducted the original test must endorse the original VT30 or enter a non-component advisory to the effect that the seat belt installation check standards have been met and showing the number of belts installed'

M. System rules and user roles

Tester responsibilities – changed 'issue replacement documentation' to 'amend incorrect test records and issue replacement documentation'.

N. MOT contingency testing procedures

Contingency testing documentation – changed 'test certificate' to 'test record'.

Issuing duplicate and replacement certificates when contingency testing – changed heading to 'Amending test records and issuing duplicate and replacement certificates when contingency testing'.

Added references to test record amendment throughout the section.

Changed 'If the test was before the CT incident and they request a duplicate or replacement certificate during the incident' to 'If the test was before the CT incident and they request a duplicate certificate, a test record amendment or replacement certificate during the incident'.

Added a new sentence: 'Test records cannot be amended during CT'.

Changed 'If the test was a CT test and they request a duplicate or replacement certificate during the incident' to 'If the test was a CT test and they request a duplicate certificate, a test record amendment or replacement certificate during the incident '.

Changed 'When performing catch up enter the details that match the replacement certificate as a normal test' to 'When performing catch up enter the new details recorded on the replacement certificate as a normal test'.

Changed 'A replacement certificate must only be issued by a tester, preferably the tester who carried out the original test. The tester must be satisfied that the amendments required are correct and refer to the vehicle that was actually tested.
Replacement certificates must be issued free of charge' to 'Amendments to the test record and its accompanying replacement certificate must only be issued by a tester, preferably the tester who carried out the original test. The tester must be satisfied that the amendments required are correct and refer to the vehicle that was actually tested. Test record amendments and replacement certificates are issued free of charge'.

Changed 'If the test was a CT test and they request a duplicate or replacement certificate after the incident but before a catch up' to 'If the test was a CT test and they request a duplicate certificate, a test record amendment or replacement certificate after the incident but before a catch up'.

Appendix 2: Facilities and security

Signs added to align with Section D All Classes -

The business trading name as described within either the Companies or the Business Names Acts is displayed conspicuous and legibly.

Notice board – changed from:

'All authorised examiners (AEs) must also display:

- the certificate of authorisation (VT9) issued by DVSA
- the current fees and appeals poster (form VT9A) showing vehicle classes, test fees and appeals procedure and the details of how to contact DVSA

The notices must be displayed on a notice board with a protective transparent covering inside the vehicle testing station (VTS) in a location where they can be read by those presenting, or intending to present, vehicles for test.

The current fees and appeals poster may be displayed adjacent to the ‘official’ notice board if it will not fit on the notice board proper. Additional copies of this poster can be obtained online.'

To:

'A notice board must be installed with a protective transparent covering which must be positioned inside the vehicle testing station so that DVSA notices can be easily read by any persons intending to or submitting vehicles for test.

The MOT notice board must not be obscured or be inaccessible and must be of sufficient size to accommodate at least one A3 fees poster (landscape) and one certificate of authorisation (A4 portrait) and must not be used for any other purpose other than official DVSA MOT notices and company public liability insurance and certificates of incorporation.

All authorised examiners (AEs) must also display:
- the certificate of authorisation (VT9) issued by DVSA
- the current fees and appeals poster (form VT9A) showing vehicle classes, test fees and appeals procedure and the details of how to contact DVSA

The current fees and appeals poster may be displayed adjacent to the ‘official’ notice board if it will not fit on the notice board proper. Additional copies of this poster can be obtained online.'

Appendix 8: Disciplinary procedures

Updated to incorporate the change from the issue of of paper MOT test documentation (VT20/VT30) to the vehicle's digital record as the definitive test record.

References to the issue of a VT20/VT30 have been replaced with recording a pass or fail test result on the MOT testing service.

Appendix 8.2 incorrect test standards –
Changed '6a. Error of judgement (e.g. failure item ‘advised’, or ‘advisory’ item failed) - judgement obviously significantly wrong – Dangerous defect advised' to '6a. Error of judgement – dangerous defect (e.g. dangerous item ‘advised’, or ‘advisory’ item failed or wrong defect classification)'

Changed '6b. Error of judgement (e.g. failure item ‘advised’, or ‘advisory’ item failed) - judgement obviously wrong – Major defect advised' to '6b. Error of judgement – major defect  (e.g. failure item ‘advised’, or ‘advisory’ item failed or wrong defect classification)'

Changed '6c. Error of judgement (e.g. failure item ‘advised’, or ‘advisory’ item failed) - judgement overruled but only marginally wrong – Minor defect advised' to 'Error of judgement – minor defect (e.g. minor item ‘advised’, or ‘advisory’ item failed or wrong defect classification)'

Informal hearings – bullet points removed from the list of examples for grounds for appeal:
* cited formal warnings and/or previous short-term cessation letters are disputed
* the conditions imposed are unreasonable

The venue –
Removed paragraph: 'The venues for English and Welsh cases will normally be DVSA’s offices in Bristol, Manchester and Leeds. Scottish cases will normally be heard in Edinburgh. The arrangements for (and the conduct of) the hearing will aim to create an appropriate atmosphere for discussion. For this reason, the parties will usually sit around a table.'

Replaced with: 'Appeals will, where possible, be heard via Microsoft Teams. In extreme circumstances where this is not possible, we will consider conducting them in person at a mutually convenient location.'

3 April 2023

D. Requirements for authorisation

D. Requirements for authorisation - Evidence of exclusive use - Bullet changed from 'that the applicant is the owner of the land or that an enforceable lease, licence to occupy or rental agreement is in place between the applicant and the owner of the land' to 'that the applicant is the owner of the land or that an enforceable lease or rental agreement is in place between the applicant and the owner of the land'

E. Tester

E. Tester - 1. General - Bullet changed from 'have been issued with an MOT security card' to 'have set up two factor authentication'

Appendix 6: Tester training and demonstration tests

Appendix 6 - 1. Training for testers - Resuming testing following a lapse of 6 months to 5 years - Paragraph changed from 'To maintain their testing status, a tester must complete a full MOT test within a 6 month period. If a full test is not completed the testers status becomes lapsed.' to 'To maintain their testing status, a tester must complete a full MOT test within a 6 month period for each test group they test. If a full test is not completed for either test group, the testers status becomes lapsed for that test group.'

Appendix 6 - 5. MOT annual assessment and training for testers - Paragraph changed from 'Testers must complete at least three hours training (16 hours over a rolling 5 year period) annually and successfully complete the annual assessment. The annual assessment must be carried out solely by the tester.' to 'Testers must complete at least three hours training annually and successfully complete the annual assessment. The annual assessment must be carried out solely by the tester.'

6 February 2023

B. Authorised examiners

Section B4 - General responsibilities - Checks by DVSA staff
Add additional paragraph for AEs to be responsible for their staffs actions towards DVSA staff.
Section B4 - General responsibilities - Premises and Equipment
Note added "For Connected equipment connectivity issues only, DVSA, at their discretion may consider requests to continue testing beyond 7 calendar days, Authorised Examiners must email motadministration@dvsa.gov.uk before the initial 7-day period has expired stating the reason for the request.  "

D. Requirements for authorisation

D1 - Authorised Examiners - Evidence of exclusive use
Update criteria of exclusive use to include planning permission and testing facilities.

M. System rules and user roles

M8 - MOT Testing Service system security.
Added additional content clarifying every users responsibility for information security.

Appendix 2: Facilities and security

Amend section 4 - equipment calibration

Change calibration frequency for decelerometers from 2 year to 1 year from 1 April 2023.

Remove information and ability to carry our self calibration of equipment.

Appendix 8: Disciplinary procedures

8.1.5.b replace word "would" with "could"
8.4.B add new sanction 12 - relating to charging more than the statutory fee.
8.4.C.1 change sanction level for 2nd, 3rd & 4th occurrences of missing or incomplete training logs from L1 -L2 -L2 - L2 and L3 to L1 - L1 - L1 - L3 as applying the previous level sanction could cause inconsistency.

2022

5 September 2022

D. Requirements for authorisation

Update to Section 1 - Authorised Examiner.
Removed the word 'Licence' from acceptable documents of exclusive use.

Removed IT requirements from this section as they are duplicated in Appendix 2. Replaced content with a link to the requirements in Appendix 2: facilities and security.
Content removed
"#### PC, Mac and laptops

The MOT testing service is designed to run on most recent Windows and Mac OS computers and laptops with:

* a 1GHz processor
* 512 MB system memory
* 20GB hard drive space
* 1024 x 768 screen resolution or above
* a network cable socket (RJ45) or Wi-Fi

#### Tablets

The MOT testing service is designed to run on any tablet with screen sizes of 9 inches and above (measured diagonally across the screen).

####Internet connection requirements

The MOT testing service works on internet connections of 0.5Mbps (512 Kbps) and above.
The internet connection may be via fixed line, 3G, 4G or satellite.

####Browser requirements

A suitable browser is required to view MOT testing service website. You can use:

* Chrome (latest version) – supplied by Google and can be used on either Windows or MacOS
* Firefox (latest version) – supplied by Mozilla and can be used on either Windows or MacOS
* Internet Explorer 9 (IE9) and above (IE10 and IE11) – supplied by Microsoft with its latest IT equipment
* Safari 7 – supplied by Apple with its latest IT equipment

####Printer requirements

An A4 black and white printer is required to print MOT certificates and other documents from the MOT testing service.

All printer consumables, for example paper and ink, are provided by the AE/VTS.

####MOT security code

All MOT testing service users with a role assigned to their MOT testing service profile need to enter a security code when signing into MOT testing service. Security codes generated by authentication app or email will be required once a day if the sign in details remain the same.

The 6 digit security code is generated by either:

**Authentication app**

Users will use an authentication app installed on their personal smart phone or tablet. This app will be linked to their MOT testing service profile. The app automatically generates the security code and is entered into MOT testing service when required as part of the sign in process

**Email**

MOT testing service will send a security code to the users unique email address recorded on the their MOT testing service profile. A new code is sent when required and is entered as part of the sign in process

**Security card**

The card generates a new 6 digit code when pressed. A new code is required each time a user signs into MOT testing service. Card holders must not write their user ID or password on the card. Security cards are no longer issued or replaced "

Update to Section 2 - Common to all classes.
Further details added on exemption to planning permission requirement's.

I. Discipline

Update to Section 1 - Shortcomings in testing and operation
Include reference to possible prosecution.

Update to Section 3 and 4 - Underlying Principles
Include details of when cessation can be taken and new reference to prosecution.

Update to Section 7 - Formal disciplinary procedure
To include further details on reapplication following cessation.

Note added to Section 10
Note added to cover where scenario where the flow chart does not apply.

Appendix 2: Facilities and security

Updates to section 6 MOT Testing Service IT and associated equipment.

Added additional internet connection type - 5G

Updated browser requirements for the MOT Testing Service.
From "A suitable browser is required to view MOT testing service website. One of the following browsers will need to be installed on your device to use MOT Testing Service:

* Chrome (latest version) - supplied by Google and can be used on either Windows or MacOS

* Firefox (latest version) - supplied by Mozilla and can be used on either Windows or MacOS

* Internet Explorer 9 (IE9) and above (IE10 and IE11) - supplied by Microsoft with its latest IT equipment

* Safari 7 - supplied by Apple with its latest IT equipment"

to

"A suitable browser is required to view MOT testing service website. One of the following browsers will need to be installed on your device to use MOT Testing Service:

* Chrome (latest version) - supplied by Google and can be used on either Windows, MacOS, iOS and Android
* Firefox (latest version) - supplied by Mozilla and can be used on either Windows or MacOS
* Edge (latest versions) - supplied by Microsoft with its latest IT equipment
* Safari 12 and later - supplied by Apple with its latest IT equipment
* Safari for iOS 12.1 and later - supplied by Apple with its latest mobile equipment
* Samsung Internet (latest version) - can be used on Android operating systems"

Appendix 6: Tester training and demonstration tests

Update to Section 1 - Training for testers Subsection - Annual Training
Added additional information to first paragraph. From "For annual training, a tester will need to do the current year annual training and assessment. "
to
"For annual training, a tester will need to do the current year annual training and assessment for each Group (A and/or B) they test. It is the testers responsibility to ensure that the annual assessment has been uploaded against their MOT Testing Service (MTS) profile "
Update to Section 8
Include reference to asking questions as part of the demonstration tests.
Update to Section 9
Include reference to new online demo test arrangement
Include information as to when a DBS check is required.

Appendix 8: Disciplinary procedures

Update to section 8.1
Include reference to prosecution.

Update to section 8.9 and 8.10
Include new minor errors for "Candidate unable to answer a question correctly"

2 March 2022

Abbreviations and definitions

Update AED definition
From - The AE Delegate is a Person appointed by the AE Designated Manager to act on their behalf on a temporary or permanent basis. Note: this does not devolve the ultimate responsibility held by the AE.

To - The AE Delegate is a Person appointed by the AE Designated Manager to assist the AEDM with administration and management functions. Note: this does not devolve the ultimate responsibility held by the AE.

Update AEDM definition
From - The AE Designated Manager is the person who represents the AE and who has normally attended the MOT Management Course. Typically, an AE Principal but in larger organisations may be a senior manager with responsibility for the totality of the entity's MOT testing operations.

To - The AE Designated Manager is the person who represents the AE and who has normally attended the MOT Management Course. Typically, an AE Principal but may be a senior manager with responsibility for the totality of the entity's MOT testing operations.

A. Introduction

Update Test Class information.
Class 1
From - Class 1 vehicles are motor bicycles (with or without sidecars) up to 200 cm3.

To - Class 1 vehicles are motorcycles and motorcycle combinations up to 200cc and electrically powered solo motorcycles with not more than 4kW maximum continuous rated power and a maximum design speed up to 45km/h (28mph).

Class 2
From - Class 2 vehicles are motor bicycles, other than mopeds, (including Class 1) (with or without sidecars).

To - Class 2 vehicles are all motorcycles and motorcycle combinations, including electrically powered variants, other than those in category L1.

B. Authorised examiners

Update to section B1 - If a company is in control of the testing operation
From - A copy of the current registrar of a company's record showing details of officers of the company will also normally be required to validate the confirmation.

To - The directors must be recorded on the company’s register at Companies House.

Update to section B2 - Training

From - Every new AE is required to have at least one person, the authorised examiner designated manager (AEDM), who has attended a DVSA approved MOT managers course that covers:

- testing responsibilities
- administrative arrangements
- quality systems
- disciplinary and appeal processes

The course is designed to help the AEDM to fully understand the role within the MOT testing service.

Existing authorisations granted before 1 April 1995 do not require an AEDM to have attended the MOT managers course. [Appendix 1: MOT manager training](/guidance/mot-testing-guide/appendix-1-mot-manager-training) gives more detail on the AEDM training requirements.

To - A DVSA approved MOT Managers course that covers testing responsibilities, administrative arrangements, quality systems, disciplinary and appeal processes must be attended for each AE by:

* An AE Principal for the AE
* The AE Designated Manager for that AE

The course is designed to help the AE and AEDM to fully understand their responsibilities and role within the MOT Service.

Authorisations granted before 1 April 1995, that have not been subject to change, do not require their AEDM to have attended the MOT Managers Course. Appendix 1 gives more detail on the AEDM training requirements.

Update the section B5 - Partial Retests - Guidance added to clarify that brake tests must be completed where applicable.
Previous - 12 When a partial re-examination is permissible, the Tester must examine all the failed defects (dangerous and major) along with any items that may have been affected by the repair. The tester should also check any minor defects or advisory item that had been recorded at the time of the initial test and mark as repaired as appropriate.

Changed to -

12 When a partial re-examination is permissible, the Tester must examine all the failed defects (dangerous and major) along with any items that may have been affected by repairs carried out since the initial test. Where applicable the partial retest must also include carrying out another brake performance test and entering the results in the MOT testing service. The tester should also check any minor defects and or advisory items that had been recorded at the time of the initial test and mark as repaired as appropriate.

D. Requirements for authorisation

Update to Section D1 - Company
From - A copy of the current registrar of company's record showing details of officers of the company will also normally be required to validate the confirmation

To - The directors must be recorded on the company’s register at Companies House.

Update to section D1 - AE responsibilities - General
From - Every new AE is required to have at least one person, the AEDM, who has attended a DVSA approved MOT managers course.

To - Every new AE is required to have at least one person, who is an AEP, plus the AEDM, who has attended a DVSA approved MOT Managers Course.

Update to section D1 - General
Removed out of date information - Membership of an approved code requires compliance with certain standards and trading ethics and DVSA may consider such VTS as low risk MOT operations, resulting in reduced regulatory checks. DVSA is committed to providing the public with information relating to VTSs in order that they are able to make an informed choice and part of this information will include details of any code membership.

Update to section D1 - Cessation for disciplinary reasons
From - The former AE shall not be involved in any way with the management or responsibility of any authorisation. However, they may continue as a tester if their nomination has not been ceased. In particular, because of the matrimonial relationship and property rights, it's improbable that the spouse of the former AE, partner or officer of a company would be considered sufficiently independent.

To - The former AE, including the AEDM and any individuals who were directly accountable in the cessation of the previous authorisation shall not be involved in any way with the management or responsibility of any authorisation. The spouse, partner, family members of the former AE, including the AEDM and any individuals who were directly accountable in the cessation of the previous authorisation, would not be considered sufficiently independent.

Update to section D1 - Changes to business
Added note - Any directors added to a currently Approved AE will need to meet the current requirements including a DBS check.

Update to section D1 - Authorisation granted
Bullet 2 Update from - the AE or an appropriate person within the partnership or company has attended the MOT managers course

To - * an AE Principal has attended the MOT Managers Course;
* an AE Designated Manager has attended the MOT Managers course;

Update to D1 - Authorisation granted
Removed Bullet - * prospective testers have satisfied DVSA that they can be included on the list of testers

Update to section D1 - Testers
From - The AE has identified at least one tester, prospective tester or a robust proposal for staffing the VTS.

To - The AE will not be able to test until they appoint a DVSA approved tester. The AE must appoint a tester and conduct MOT tests within 12 months of approval to retain their authorisation.

Update to section D1 - Mandatory roles and training
Remove sentence - Not all mandatory roles require access to the MOT testing service.

Update to section D1 - Mandatory roles and training
From - Depending on the size and make up of a business an individual can hold one or multiple roles. The role of AEDM will be appointed by DVSA from the information supplied in the AE’s application, the remaining roles must be appointed by the AEDM.

To - Depending on the size and make up of a business an individual can hold one or multiple roles. The roles of AE Principal and AEDM will be appointed by DVSA from the information supplied in the AE’s application, the remaining roles must be appointed by the AEDM.

Update to D1 Mandatory roles and training - AEDM
From - Every new AE is required to have an AEDM, who has attended a DVSA approved MOT managers course which covers testing responsibilities, administrative arrangements, disciplinary and appeal processes. The course is designed to help the AEDM to fully understand the role within the MOT service.

However, the AEDM training requirement does not apply if, when the application was received, the same applicant was an AE and authorised before 1 April 1995.

To - Every AE is required to have an AEDM who, on behalf of the AE, is responsible for ensuring testing is carried out in compliance with the Requirements of Authorisation.
Typically, the AEDM would be a person from within the AE, however it may also be a senior manager who has responsibility for testing across the entire AE.

Update to section D1 Mandatory roles and training - Who to train
Heading changed to Training requirements
Restructured to allow explanation of training of an AEP where the AEDM is not the AEP.

Update to section D1 - Mandatory roles and training - Timing of training
Removed final section - Cessation will also occur if a company is wound-up or ceases to manage the VTS but the business continues either:

- under another company with at least one director or officer of the former company
- as a partnership including at least one director or officer of the former company
- with one of the directors or officers of the former company as a sole trader

Update to D1 Mandatory roles and training - Tester
From - Every new AE is required to have at least one tester, prospective tester or a robust proposal for staffing the VTS with a tester, who has achieved a Level 2 Award in MOT Testing or previous equivalent DVSA MOT testers course, before authorisation to test is granted.

To - Every new AE is required to have at least one person, the Tester, who has achieved a Level 2 Award in MOT Testing or previous equivalent DVSA MOT Testers course, before testing can begin. If a tester isn’t present authorisation to test can be is granted but the test station will have deemed to have surrendered it approval if testing doesn’t begin within12 months of the approval date.

Update to section D2 - How to apply
Added content - Solicitors that submit evidence on behalf of the applicant must be governed by the Solicitors Regulator Authority (England and Wales) or the Law Society of Scotland (Scotland).

Update to section D2 - Acceptable variations to layout and equipment
Added note to final bullet - (where changes include the installation of equipment that needs to be connected)

E. Tester

Update to E2 eligibility for becoming a tester.
Note added to introduce DBS checks for new testers from 01 April 2022.

I. Discipline

I 7 Notice of cessation changes - references to '1 day' have been replace with 'immediate effect' and added a paragraph to state that immediate effect may be extended to a maximum of 24 hours.

Previous - For a Tester, the notice period before cessation becomes effective may be
reduced to;

a. 10 working days if the particular case justifies more than 100 point;
or
b. 1 day if the particular case justifies 500 points or more.

Change - 11. For a Tester, the notice period before cessation becomes effective may be
reduced to;

a. 10 working days if the particular case justifies more than 100 point;
or
b. Immediate effect if the particular case justifies 500 points or more.

Previous - 12. For an AE, the notice period before cessation becomes effective may be
reduced to;

a. 10 working days if the particular case justifies 200 points or more after
any credits have been considered and previous Formal Warnings
and/or Short Term Cessations justifying a total of 140 points or more
are still valid;
or
b. Up to 1 day if the case being considered justifies single offence cessation
under Appendix 8.1.

Change - 12. For an AE, the notice period before cessation becomes effective may be
reduced to;

a. 10 working days if the particular case justifies 200 points or more after
any credits have been considered and previous Formal Warnings
and/or Short Term Cessations justifying a total of 140 points or more
are still valid;
or
b. Immediate effect if the case being considered justifies single offence cessation
under Appendix 8.1.

Previous - 13. Cessation may be implemented with 1 days’ notice (without DVSA first issuing the normal Contemplated Disciplinary letter or considering any representation,)
in a few very serious cases that DVSA sees as representing a very significant
risk to road safety or the integrity of the MOT Service.

Change and new paragraph - 13. Cessation may be implemented with immediate effect, without DVSA first issuing the normal Contemplated Disciplinary letter or considering any representation, in a few very serious cases that DVSA sees as representing a very significant risk to road safety or the integrity of the MOT Service.
The notice period before cessation becomes effective for AEs and Testers may be extended to a maximum of 24 hours. During this period testing may be monitored, where anomalies are identified the cessation will take immediate effect.

I7 Period of Cessation for both AEs and Testers
Bullet point changed 3 options replaced with 4.
Previous bullet removed - 2 years, the period may be extended to 5 years where the cessation results from serious fraud, dishonesty, gross negligence, or repute under Appendix 8.1.

Replaced with - 2 years, the period may be extended to 5 years where the cessation results from repeated shortcomings considered to have major road safety implications or damage the integrity of the MOT testing service.
and
• 5 years where the cessation results from a shortcoming(s) listed in Appendix 8.1.

L. Accounts and fees

Update to section L MOT accounts
Removed reference to GVTS - no longer relevant

M. System rules and user roles

Major change to whole section - all information replaced and updated for improved guidance

Appendix 1: MOT management training

Update section heading from MOT Manager Training to MOT Management Training
Update to Appendix 1 - Who to train
Restructured section and additional content added to support changes to AEP and AEDM roles.

Update to Appendix 1 - Timing of training.
Removed final information - Cessation will also occur if a company is wound-up or ceases to manage the vehicle testing station (VTS) but the business continues:

- under another company with at least one director or officer of the former company
- as a partnership including at least one director or officer of the former company
- with one of the directors or officers of the former company as a sole trader

Update to Appendix 1 - If the AE is subject to cessation .
Removed sentence - In such cases retraining will normally be permitted only when the AE is eligible for re-authorisation.

Update to Appendix 1 - Course content
Update first line to include - responsibilities of an AE

Update to Appendix 1 - Departure of the trained AEDM from an AE
Removal of incorrect information and updated to allow 35 working days to replace in all cases

Appendix 6: Tester training and demonstration tests

Update to Appendix 6 - MOT annual assessment and training for testers
Section header updated from - MOT annual training for testers to MOT annual assessment and training for testers

Appendix 7: Convictions and repute

Update to Appendix 7 - Conviction and Repute -General
Add AE consultants (AECs) to the list of individuals who must be free from conviction to hold a role on MTS.

Appendix 8: Disciplinary procedures

Add references back in to section 8.1 Authorised Examiner - A and Tester - B

Update to Section 8.2 to improve understanding.
Previous -
1. Any defect missed on a testable item that would, in the opinion of DVSA, involve a risk of injury to any person if driven further. 40 points
2. Failable defect missed on a testable item. 20 points
3. Item failed is not testable. 20 points
4. Item failed has no defect, (i.e. not a case involving an error of judgement). 20 points
5. Minor defect missed or incorrectly added 10 points
6. Error of judgement (e.g. failure item ‘advised’, or ‘advisory’ item failed)
a. Judgement obviously significantly wrong 10 points
b. Judgement obviously wrong 5 points
c. Judgement overruled but only marginally wrong 0 points

Changed to -
1. Any defect categorised as dangerous within the relevant inspection manual that is missed on a testable item 40 points
2. Any defect categorised as major within the relevant inspection manual that is missed on a testable item. 20 points
3. Item failed is not testable. 20 points
4. Item failed has no defect, (i.e. not a case involving an error of judgement). 20 points
5. Any defect categorised as minor within the relevant inspection manual that is missed or incorrectly added 10 points
6. Error of judgement (e.g. failure item ‘advised’, or ‘advisory’ item failed)
a. Judgement obviously significantly wrong – Dangerous defect advised 10 points
b. Judgement obviously wrong – Major defect advised 5 points
c. Judgement overruled but only marginally wrong – Minor defect advised 0 points

8 February 2022

Abbreviations and definitions

New section added.

A. Introduction

New section added.

B. Authorised examiners

New section added.

C. Designated councils, taxis and private hire vehicles

New section added.

D. Requirements for authorisation

New section added.

E. Tester

New section added.

F. Driver and Vehicle Standards Agency

New section added.

G. Vehicle presenters

New section added.

H. Documentation

New section added.

I. Discipline

New section added.

J. Vehicle prohibitions

New section added.

K. Police vehicle defect rectification scheme (VDRS)

New section added.

L. Accounts and fees

New section added.

M. System rules and user roles

New section added.

N. MOT contingency testing procedures

New section added.

Appendix 1: MOT manager training

New section added.

Appendix 2: Facilities and security

New section added.

Appendix 3: Grounds for refusal

New section added.

Appendix 4: Liability for loss or damage

New section added.

Appendix 5: Tester qualifications

New section added.

Appendix 6: Tester training and demonstration tests

New section added.

Appendix 7: Convictions and repute

New section added.

Appendix 8: Disciplinary procedures

New section added.

Appendix 9: Contact DVSA

New section added.